Mercedes - S-Class - Brochure - 2009 - 2009

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:30; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 1 Version: 2.11.7.7 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read this manual. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endangering yourself and others. Items of optional equipment are marked with an asterisk *. The equipment or product designation of you vehicle may differ depending on: www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. In right-hand-drive vehicles, the arrangement and location of vehicle parts and controls differ accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features You cannot therefore base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions contained in this manual. The following are integral parts of the vehicle: ROwner's RBrief Manual Instructions RService Booklet RSupplements relating to vehicle equipment Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times and pass them on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in German and in English in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: 2215847882Z102 É2215847882Z102)ËÍ Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 2 Version: 2.11.7.7 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 3 Version: 2.11.7.7 Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 23 Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety ................................................... 37 COMAND .............................................. 61 Controls ............................................. 187 Operation ........................................... 309 Practical advice ................................ 339 Technical data ................................... 421 3 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 4 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 4 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 999 or 112 emergency call . . . . . . . 113 A ABC see Active Body Control ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . 53 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 355, 359 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Accident Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Acoustic warning tone see Warning tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Active Body Control (ABC) . . . . . . . . 259 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Active Light System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Active multicontour seat . . . . . 186, 195 Active partition (USB devices only) Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Active Service System PLUS see Service interval display . . . . . . 331 ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) . . . 258 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 210 Adaptive Main-beam Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Additional speedometer Fading in/out (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Address book Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Connecting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Creating an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Starting route guidance . . . . . . . . . 131 Voice entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Airbags Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Sidebag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Windowbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Air conditioning Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 278 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Automatic air-conditioning . . . . . . . 277 Auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . . . 286 COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Controlling automatically . . . . . . . . 279 Controlling centrally (COMAND) . . 180 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) . . . . . . . . . 285 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 279 Cooling with air dehumidification (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Demisting the windscreen . . . . . . . 283 Misted-up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Rear compartment (COMAND) . . . 181 Rear-compartment air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Setting the air distribution . . . . . . . 282 Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Setting the airflow (COMAND) . . . . 181 Setting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Setting the footwell temperature (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . 280 Setting the temperature (rear compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281 Switching the residual heat function on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Air-conditioning system see Air conditioning Air distribution Setting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Air filter Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 AIRMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 5 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Air pressure see Tyre pressure Alertness Assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST . . . . . . . . . 240 Ambient light Adjusting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Anti-lock braking system See ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Anti-theft alarm system See EDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 ASSYST PLUS see Service interval display . . . . . . 331 ASSYST PLUS service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) . . . . . . 59 Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . 59 ATTENTION ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Audio (COMAND) AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 CD mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 DVD mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 MP3 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Audio DVD Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Setting the audio format . . . . . . . . . 88 Stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 AUTO lights Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Automatic lane recognition system see Lane Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . 241 Automatic transmission Display message . . . . . . 344, 347, 354 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 386 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Program selector button . . . . . . . . 225 Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 AUX Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Rear Seat Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Setting the departure time . . . . . . . 182 Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Axle load, permissible Rear (trailer towing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 B Back button COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Ball coupling Folding in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Folding out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 BAS (Brake Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Batteries Changing (entertainment system headphones) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Changing (entertainment system remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Battery Changing (auxiliary heating remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 344, 355 Fitting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 410 Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Voltage (on-board computer) . . . . . 235 Belt adjustment see Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Belt force limiters Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 6 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 6 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Belt tensioners Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Blind see Roller sunblind Blind Spot Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 see Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Bluetooth® Authorising devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 External authorisation . . . . . . . . . . 117 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118, 121 Telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 120 Bluetooth® telephony Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Bonnet Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Bonnet release lever Release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Boot Automatic opening . . . . . . . . 191, 192 Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Limiting the opening angle . . . . . . . 177 Locking separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Boot/luggage compartment load (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Boot lid Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Boot lid opening limiter . . . . . . . . . . 177 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 See BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 see BAS Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Brake lamps Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Brakes Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378, 380 Brake system Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Brake wear Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Infrared light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Main-beam spot lamp . . . . . . . . . . 399 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 see Lamp C Calling up a fault see Display message . . . . . . . . . . . Calling voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a list entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . Care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matt paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Night View Assist Plus . . . . . . . . . . Paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel boss . . . . . . . . . . . . Tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 122 132 129 132 124 333 332 332 336 336 333 335 333 336 334 337 334 337 335 336 335 336 335 335 337 334 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 7 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 CD Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Selecting a medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selecting a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 CD player/CD changer Operation (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Operation (on-board computer) . . . 234 Central locking Activating/deactivating (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Central locking/unlocking button . . 189 Central unlocking Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Centre console Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Changing a wheel see Flat tyre Changing direction (COMAND) . . . . . 156 Changing direction (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Child-proof locks Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Children In the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Child seat Automatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Automatic recognition (malfunction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Cockpit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 COMAND Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Linguatronic settings . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 COMAND controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 COMAND display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 COMAND menu Automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . 177 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Conference connection . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . 241 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Convenience telephony . . . . . . . . . . 119 Coolant Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 355, 367 Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Coolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Cornering lights Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 352, 353 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Current fuel consumption (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 7 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 8 03. Mar 2009 15:16:31; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 8 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index D DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Sub-programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Dashboard Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 see Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . 227 see Cockpit Data carrier Music Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Date Setting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Switching on/off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (COMAND) . . . . . . 175 Interior lighting (COMAND) . . . . . . 175 Destination input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 destination memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Diesel Low outside temperatures . . . . . . . 312 Diesel engine Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Digital speedometer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 242 Digital TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display Adjusting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Display message Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . 354, 391 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . 331 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Up (AMG menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Distance display Displaying (on-board computer) . . . 240 Distance warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Distronic Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Display messages . . . . . . . . . 345, 346 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Door Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 354, 367 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . 189 Power closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Door control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive program Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Driver's door Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . 188 Driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Driver's seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 55 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 BAS PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 PRE-SAFE® Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Driving systems 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Active Body Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 AIRMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 ATTENTION ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Blind Spot Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Distronic Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Lane Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Night View Assist Plus . . . . . . . . . . 270 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Speed Limit Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 9 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Driving tips Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Distronic Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DTMF tone transmission . . . . . . . . . . 123 DVD Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Selecting a medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selecting a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 DVD audio Operation (on-board computer) . . . 234 DVD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 DVD video Operation (on-board computer) . . . 234 Dynamic route guidance . . . . . . . . . . 163 E EASY-ENTRY feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Activating (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . 174 EASY-EXIT feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Activating (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . 174 Crash-responsive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 EBV (electronic brake force distribution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Electronic brake force distribution See EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® Electronic Traction Support see ETS Emergency key element Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Emergency locking Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Emergency running mode Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 386 Emergency unlocking Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Engine Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Starting with KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . 218 Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Engine diagnostics warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . . 315 Checking the oil level (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 315, 373 Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Temperature display (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 55 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 56 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Trailer stabilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . 55, 378, 379 ETS (Electronic Traction Support) . . . 56 Exterior lighting see Exterior lighting Exterior mirror parking position Adjusting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Exterior mirrors Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . 202 Convenience settings . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . 201 Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . 201 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Exterior view Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 9 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 10 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 10 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index F Fatigue Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST . . . . . 240, 268 Fault message see Display message . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Favourites (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Flat tyre Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 MOExtended run-flat system . . . . . 409 Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 400 TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Foglamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Frequencies Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Front multicontour seat (COMAND) 183 Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Front-passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat . . . 195 Adjusting from the rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Fuel consumption Current (on-board computer) . . . . . 231 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Fuel filler flap Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Fuel filter Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Fuel line Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Fuel tank Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Function buttons (COMAND) . . . . . . . 64 Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Fuse box Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 G Garage door Opening/closing (with the remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming the remote control . . Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear indicator (on-board computer) Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 306 308 443 307 223 235 422 295 H Hands-free system Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Switching to the mobile phone . . . 125 Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . 316 Headlamps Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Misting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Head restraints NECK-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO luxury head restraints . . . . . . . . . . 394 Heating see Air conditioning High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 11 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index HomeLink® see Garage door opener I Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Indicator and warning lamp Automatic child seat recognition (malfunction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378, 380 Brakes (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Engine diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . . 47, 375 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 379 Indicator lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . 369, 370 see Indicator and warning lamp . . . 377 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Intelligent Light System . . . . . . . . . . 211 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 347, 372 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 242 Tourist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Interior lighting Ambient light (COMAND) . . . . . . . . 175 Automatic control system . . . . . . . 213 Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . 60, 176 ISOFIX child seat securing system . . 50 J Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 341 412 412 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Modifying the programming . . . . . . 189 KEYLESS GO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Key positions Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 227 L Lamp see Indicator and warning lamp . . . 377 Lane Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Lane recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Licence plate lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Lighting see Lights Lights Active light function . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . 208 Cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 212 Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . 208 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 208 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 212 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . 211 Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 210 Motorway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 11 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 12 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 12 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Switching off (display message) . . . Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) . Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIM indicator lamp Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . Linguatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locator lighting Adjusting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . Locking Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . From the inside (central locking button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting to automatic (COMAND) . . Luggage compartment Power closing feature . . . . . . . . . . Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 241 242 209 244 248 254 171 176 190 393 189 176 190 298 195 183 M Main-beam headlamps Adaptive Main-beam Assist . . . . . . 242 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 344, 370 Maintenance Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Making calls On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Manual drive program . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Massage function (PULSE) . . . . . . . . 186 Matt paintwork Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Media Interface Active partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Basic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 iPod® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 MP3 player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Selecting categories . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Selecting folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Selecting music files . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Selecting playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Switching to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 USB mass storage device . . . . . . . 106 Memory card Operation (on-board computer) . . . 234 Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Menu (on-board computer) AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Distronic Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Navi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Menu overview Bluetooth® telephony . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Convenience telephony . . . . . . . . . 120 Music Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Mercedes-Benz Contact . . . . . . . . . . 113 Message see Display message . . . . . . . . . . . 342 see Indicator and warning lamp . . . 377 Minispare emergency spare wheel Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Mirrors Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 see Exterior mirrors or Rear-view mirror Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Connecting (convenience telephony) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 De-authorising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 External authorisation . . . . . . . . . . 117 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Operation (on-board computer) . . . 237 Registering (authorising) . . . . . . . . 116 Second handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Modifying the programming Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 MOExtended run-flat system* . 319, 409 MP3 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 13 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Operation (on-board computer) . . . 234 Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Selecting a medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selecting a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Multicontour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Multi-contour seat Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 228 Overview (on-board computer) . . . . . 30 Music Register Copying music data . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Deleting all music files . . . . . . . . . . 105 Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 N Navigation Adjusting the map scale . . . . . . . . . 135 Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Calling up the map display . . . . . . . 135 Changing direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Changing direction (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Destination memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Entering a destination by address . 143 Entering a destination by map . . . . 153 Entering an intermediate stop . . . . 154 Entering special destinations . . . . . 156 Installing map software . . . . . . . . . 141 Navigation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Off-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Route info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Route options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Traffic jam function . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 NECK-PRO head restraints . . . . . . . . . 45 Resetting after being triggered . . . 394 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 195 Resetting after being triggered . . . 394 Night View Assist Plus . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 271 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Indicator in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Notes on running in a new vehicle . 310 O Odometer see Total distance recorder . . . . . . 231 see Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 232 Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . . 231 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Off-map Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Oil level Checking (dipstick) . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Checking (on-board computer) . . . 314 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Assistance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Navi menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Trip menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Opening limiter for boot lid . . . . . . . 177 Operating system see On-board computer . . . . . . . . . 228 Outside lighting Delayed switch-off (COMAND) . . . . 175 Outside temperature display . . . . . 228 Override feature Controls in the rear compartment . . 52 P Paint code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paintwork Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panorama sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . 424 334 292 216 216 13 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 14 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 14 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Rain closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Parking aid Exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 PARKTRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Parking brake Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . 220 Parking Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Parking lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Parking position Exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Exterior mirrors (COMAND) . . . . . . 174 PARKTRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 262 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 375 Pause function COMAND (Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 PCMCIA card Operation (on-board computer) . . . 234 Permanent four-wheel drive see 4MATIC Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 256 Petrol Minimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 see Fuel Phone book Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Creating an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Plastic trim Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 111 Playback options (COMAND) . . . . . . . 89 Power closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Power socket Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Power supply (trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Power window switch see Side windows Pre-emptive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with Distronic Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 PRE-SAFE® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Programmable button . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Program selector button Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 225 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 PULSE see Massage function R RACETIMER (on-board computer) . . 236 Radar sensor system Country overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Radar system sensors Switching on/off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Radio Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Radio Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 RDS frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . 78 Selecting a station (COMAND) . . . . . 76 Selecting a station (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Switching wavebands . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Radio-controlled equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Rain closing feature Panorama sliding sunroof . . . . . . . 292 Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 291 Range Calling up (on-board computer) . . . 231 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 RDS (Radio Data System) . . . . . . . . . . 78 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 15 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index RDS-TMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Rear compartment Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Rear-compartment seats . . . . . . . . . 196 Rear foglamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Rear-seat entertainment system Several users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Rear seats Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . 202 Rear window blind see Rear window roller sunblind Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Region code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Remote control Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Programming (garage door opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Reserve Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Reset (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Restraint systems For children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 See SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Retaining hooks (boot) . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Reversing lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Roller blind see Roller sunblind Roller sunblind Panorama sliding sunroof . . . . . . . Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window (COMAND) . . . . . . . . Roof load (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 301 174 429 300 162 S Seat Active multicontour seat . . . . . . . . 186 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Adjusting (rear compartment) . . . . 196 Correct driver's seat position . . . . . 206 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Seat belt Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 206, 364 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 381 Seat covers Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Seat ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 375 Selecting the route type . . . . . . . . . . 140 Sensors Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Service indicator see Service interval display . . . . . . 331 Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Settings Calling up a stored setting . . . . . . . 203 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Setting the air distribution COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Shift ranges Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 224 Sidebag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 15 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 16 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 16 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Side windows Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Skibag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Rain closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Sliding sunroof see Panorama sliding sunroof see Sliding/tilting sunroof Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Spare wheel Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Special destination Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Spectacles compartment . . . . . . . . . 295 Speed Limit Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Activating/deactivating message function (on-board computer) . . . . 239 Displaying (on-board computer) . . . 239 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Speed limiter Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Speedometer Additional speedometer (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . 232, 242 Selecting the display unit (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 379 Steering Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Steering wheel Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Buttons (on-board computer) . . . . . 228 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Steering wheel boss Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . 294 Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Rear seats (between) . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Stowage well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Boot floor (underneath) . . . . . . . . . 300 Summer opening see Convenience opening Sun blind Rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Supplemental Restraint System See SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Suspension tuning . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259 Switching off the alarm ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 System settings (COMAND) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Linguatronic settings . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Programmable button . . . . . . . . . . 172 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Setting the system language . . . . . 172 Time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 T Tail pipes Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank see Fuel tank Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data S 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 350 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 350 CDI 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 426 429 430 430 435 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 17 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY . . . . . . 435 S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY (Belgium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 S 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 S 450 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 S 450 CDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 S 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 S 500 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 S 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 S 63 AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 S 65 AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438, 439, 440 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438, 439, 440 Telephone Accepting/ending call . . . . . . . . . . 121 Calling voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Conference connection . . . . . . . . . 124 Ending an active call . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Entering phone numbers . . . . . . . . 122 Incoming call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Outgoing call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Redialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Sending DTMF tones . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Single call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Switching between hands-free system and mobile phone . . . . . . . 125 Switching hands-free system on/ off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Telephone basic menu Bluetooth interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Convenience telephony . . . . . . . . . 119 Telephone compartment . . . . . . . . . 296 Telephone keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Telephone number Entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Telescopic lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Temperature Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Engine oil (on-board computer) . . . 235 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Setting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Text message (SMS) Call sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Reading aloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Storing sender in address book . . . 127 Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Third brake lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Time Adjusting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Lap time (on-board computer) . . . . 236 Setting (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Timer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 236 TIREFIT kit Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Tourist mode see Intelligent Light System . . . . . . 242 Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . 59, 177 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Towing eye Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Traffic jam function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Trailer 7-pin connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 358, 369 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Trailer coupling see Trailer tow hitch Trailer loads Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Trailer towing Blind Spot Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Parking Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Transmission output (maximum) Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 423 17 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 18 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 18 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Trim strips Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Trip computer (on-board computer) 231 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Resetting (on-board computer) . . . 232 TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Information about the current programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Operation (on-board computer) . . . 235 Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Programme preview . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Selecting a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Showing/hiding the menu system . . 98 Showing/hiding the navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Two-way radio Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Type identification plate see vehicle identification plate . . . 424 Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Calling up (on-board computer) . . 322 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 351, 374 Tyre pressure loss warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Tyre pressure monitor Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Tyres Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Technical data . . . . . . . . 438, 439, 440 Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 U Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . From the inside (central unlocking button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up (display message) . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 393 189 235 V Vanity mirror (rear compartment) . . 304 Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Vehicle Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Individual settings (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 429, 436 Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 425 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . 424 Vehicle level Adjusting (Active Body Control) . . . 259 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Setting (AIRMATIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Video AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 DVD mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Video DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Fast forward/rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Operation (COMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Pause function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Selecting a film/title . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Selecting a medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Selecting a scene/chapter . . . . . . . 95 Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Video game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Volume Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 W Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind Spot Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic Plus (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 377 376 377 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 19 Version: 2.11.7.7 Index ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 379 ESP® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 LIM (cruise control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 LIM (Distronic Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 LIM (variable Speedtronic) . . . . . . . 254 Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . 381 Warning tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Washer fluid Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Wheel bolts Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Wheel chock Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Wheels General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Technical data . . . . . . . . 438, 439, 440 Windowbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Windows Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 see Side windows Windscreen Infrared reflective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Windscreen washer fluid Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . 316 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 399 Winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324, 325 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Limiting the speed (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Wiper blades Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 WMA Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Wooden trim Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 19 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 20 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 20 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Protection of the environment H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating Ryour conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- tion. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Returning used vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and re-use. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 21 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Operating safety Safety notes G Risk of accident and injury Always have work on the vehicle carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems as well as maintenance work must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G Risk of accident and injury Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. Therefore, do not switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems in your vehicle may no longer function correctly and, therefore, not protect you or others as they are designed to do. There is also a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result. G Risk of accident and injury Work carried out incorrectly or modifications to the vehicle, e.g. cables laid under the trim, can impair the function of the safety systems. The safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. There is also a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result. Therefore always have work and modifications to the vehicle, such as installations or conversions, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If you drive over obstacles at high speed or if the vehicle bottoms out in rough terrain, it could cause heavy impacts to the vehicle underbody, tyres or wheels. This could cause your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn might lead to an accident. This also applies to vehicles which are equipped with underbody protection. You should therefore drive over obstacles slowly and prevent the vehicle from bottoming out when driving off-road. If necessary, have your vehicle inspected at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, the equipment could stop functioning. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Such malfunctions can seriously compromise the vehicle's operating safety and your own safety as well. Therefore, have all work on and modifications to electronic components carried out by a qualified workshop. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. Z 21 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 22 03. Mar 2009 15:16:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 22 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual Rnational road traffic regulations Rnational road traffic licensing regulations G Risk of injury Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. from the fault memories. This is performed by authorised employees of the Mercedes-Benz service network using special diagnostic computers. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the memory. Other memory data is constantly overwritten. Other devices that store data Depending on its equipment, your vehicle may feature communications and/or entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devices, telephone systems). These allow you to save and edit data required for the operation of the respective device. Further information on operation (e.g. on deleting data) can be found in the separate operating instructions. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. Data stored in the vehicle Fault data Components critical for vehicle operation are equipped with fault data memories as standard. There are also memories dedicated to storing the technical reactions of vehicle components to driving situations (e.g. the triggering of an airbag, ESP® intervention). This data is used exclusively to: Rassist in the rectification of faults and defects Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop vehicle functions. The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced by MercedesBenz, this technical information can be read * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 23 Version: 2.11.7.7 23 Exterior view ....................................... Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. On-board computer and COMAND ..... Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. Rear seats ............................................ 24 25 27 30 31 32 33 35 At a glance 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:34; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 24 03. Mar 2009 15:16:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 24 Version: 2.11.7.7 Exterior view At a glance Exterior view Function Page : Boot Vehicle tool kit 190 341 ; Lights 397 = Rear window heating 284 ? Fuel filler flap 310 A Exterior mirrors 201 B Sliding/tilting sunroof* Panorama sliding sunroof* 290 292 C Demisting the windscreen Cleaning the windows 283 334 Function Page D Windscreen wipers 214 E Opening the bonnet Engine oil Coolant 313 314 316 F Headlamp cleaning system 211 G Towing 414 H Tyres and wheels Flat tyre 317 400 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:36; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 25 Version: 2.11.7.7 Cockpit 25 Cockpit Function At a glance Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles Page Function Adjusts the instrument cluster lighting and COMAND display Page 32 : Light switch 207 ; Combination switch 209 = Cruise control lever 244 C Overhead control panel ? Instrument cluster 27 D Automatic air conditioning 277 A Selector lever 221 E B Control panel for: Vehicle level Suspension tuning PARKTRONIC* Swivels the COMAND display Ignition lock Start/Stop button* 192 192 259 258 260 F Adjusts the steering wheel Steering wheel heating* 200 200 G Electric parking brake 220 73 H Night View Assist Plus* 270 * optional 74 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 26 03. Mar 2009 15:16:37; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 26 Version: 2.11.7.7 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehicles Function : Automatic air conditioning ; Overhead control panel = Control panel for: Vehicle level Vehicle level Suspension tuning PARKTRONIC* Swivels the COMAND display Adjusts the instrument cluster lighting and COMAND display ? Combination switch Page Function Page 277 A Cruise control lever 244 32 B Instrument cluster 27 C Selector lever 221 D Light switch 207 E Night View Assist Plus* 270 F Electric parking brake 220 G Adjusts the steering wheel Steering wheel heating* 200 H Ignition lock Start/Stop button* 192 192 259 257, 259 258 260 62 74 209 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:37; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 27 Version: 2.11.7.7 Instrument cluster 27 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster, kilometres i Please refer to the overview of the indicator and warning lamps (Y page 29). Function : Coolant temperature gauge ; Fuel gauge = PARKTRONIC* warning indicators for the area in front of the vehicle ? Page 227 260 Multi-function display Speedometer (the unit can be changed to miles in the on-board computer) 229 A Gear indicator 223 B Rev counter 228 C Drive program display 223 D Displays for Parking Guidance* 262 * optional 242 Function E Display unit for the speedometer F Outside temperature display G Displays for: ATTENTION ASSIST Speed Limit Assist* Adaptive Highbeam Assist* Lane Keeping Assist* HOLD Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake* Additional speedometer Page 228 240 239 242 241 256 57 242 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 28 03. Mar 2009 15:16:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 28 Version: 2.11.7.7 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster, miles i Please refer to the overview of the indicator and warning lamps (Y page 29). Function : Coolant temperature gauge ; Fuel gauge = PARKTRONIC* warning indicators for the area in front of the vehicle ? Page 227 260 Multi-function display Speedometer (the unit can be changed to kilometres in the on-board computer) 229 A Gear indicator 223 B Rev counter 228 C Drive program display 223 D Displays for Parking Guidance* 262 242 Function E Display unit for the speedometer F Outside temperature display G Displays for: ATTENTION ASSIST Speed Limit Assist* Adaptive Highbeam Assist* Lane Keeping Assist* HOLD Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake* Additional speedometer Page 228 240 239 242 241 256 57 242 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 29 Version: 2.11.7.7 Instrument cluster 29 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps Function Function Page : Turn signal indicator lamp 209 G ; Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) 220, 380 RBS* (regenerative braking system) warning lamp1 H Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 218 I Engine diagnostics warning lamp 380 J ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) warning lamp 377 K SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) warning lamp 379 = Electric parking brake warning lamp (yellow) 380 ? Seat belt warning lamp 381 A ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) warning lamp 378 B Distance warning lamp* 377 C Brake warning lamp 380 D ESP® OFF warning lamp 378 L E Tyre pressure monitor warning lamp* Main-beam headlamps indicator lamp 209 381 M Reserve fuel warning lamp 382 Turn signal indicator lamp 209 F 1 Page Only vehicles with BlueHYBRID*, see separate supplement. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:40; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 30 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer and COMAND 30 At a glance On-board computer and COMAND i Further information on operating the multi-function steering wheel (Y page 228). Function 2 Page : % Back or deactivates voice control* ; = ; Selects a menu 9 : Selects a function or scrolls through lists a Confirms selection or fades out display messages. 230 = Multi-function display 229 ? 6 ~ Makes/accepts or rejects/ends a call* W X Increases/ reduces the volume Operates RACETIMER2 8 Mute Function A ? Activates voice control*; see separate operating instructions B Swivels the COMAND display Adjusts the brightness of the instrument cluster illumination and the COMAND display 230 237 73 74 C COMAND display 63 D CD and DVD player/ changer* 83 COMAND controller and COMAND function buttons 63, 64 E 235 Page Only on AMG vehicles. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:42; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 31 Version: 2.11.7.7 Centre console 31 At a glance Centre console Function : Page D Rear window roller sunblind* 301 Folds the head restraints in the rear compartment down or up* 196 = Sets the drive program 221 ? Function button for the radio and CD/DVD 76 A Back button 73 B Hazard warning lamps 211 C Lumbar support Multicontour seat* 183 183 ; * optional Function Function button for the telephone* and navigation system* Page 135 E COMAND controller 63 F Activates/deactivates COMAND 67 G Adjusts the volume 68 H Programmable button I Telephone keypad* 172 64 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 32 03. Mar 2009 15:16:43; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 32 Version: 2.11.7.7 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : Spectacles compartment 295 ; p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 213 = u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 213 ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 213 A 3 Opens/closes the sliding/tilting sunroof* 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblinds* 290 Function B Page | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 213 y Extends/retracts the rear roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof* 293 D p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 213 E Rear-view mirror 202 F Transmitter buttons for the garage door opener* 306 C 292 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:44; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 33 Version: 2.11.7.7 Door control panel 33 Door control panel At a glance Front Function Page : Opens the door 189 ; & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle from the inside 189 = Adjusts the seat electrically 194 ? r45= Memory function* w Adjusts the frontpassenger seat from the driver’s seat* A B 202 195 c Seat heating* 199 s Seat ventilation* 198 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 201 * optional Function C D E W Opens/closes the side windows t Opens/closes the roller sunblinds* in the rear side windows o Unlocks the boot lid p Vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature*: opens/closes the boot lid n Override feature for the controls in the rear compartment Page 214 216 192 192 52 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 34 03. Mar 2009 15:16:46; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 34 Version: 2.11.7.7 Door control panel At a glance Rear compartment Function : Page C v Adjusts the frontpassenger seat from the rear* 197 r45= Memory function* 202 Adjusts the seat electrically* 196 ? Opens the door 189 A u Rear window roller sunblind* 301 y Operates the rear roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof* from the rear 293 ; = B Function D Page W Opens/closes the side windows t Opens/closes the roller sunblinds* in the rear side windows c Adjusts the seat heating* and s Adjusts the seat ventilation* 214 216 199 198 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:47; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 35 Version: 2.11.7.7 Rear seats 35 At a glance Rear seats Function Page : DVD player* ; Cup holder 298 = Control panel for multi-contour seat in the rear compartment* 198 ? Stowage compartment under the rear seat armrest 296 A Cover for skibag* or coolbox* 298 304 * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 36 03. Mar 2009 15:16:47; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 36 Version: 2.11.7.7 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 37 Version: 2.11.7.7 37 Occupant safety .................................. 38 Driving safety systems ....................... 52 Anti-theft systems .............................. 58 Safety 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:48; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 38 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 38 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety Occupant safety Notes on occupant safety Safety 03. Mar 2009 15:16:48; WK Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags, are complementary, coordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in specific, predefined types of accident situations and, thereby, increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, you should ensure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 193). Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 203). Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 41). Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 199). Rthe restraint systems have not been modified. i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. This is because – on the one hand – airbags are not deployed in all types of accident, as in some situations airbag deployment would not increase the protection afforded to vehicle occupants, provided they are wearing their seat belt correctly. On the other hand, airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the seat belt can more adequately prevent the occupant from being propelled towards the point of the impact, and is thus better suited to prevent injury. Therefore, in accident situations where an airbag is deployed, it only provides protection in addition to the seat belt if the seat belt is being worn correctly. G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. There is a risk of an accident and injury. G Risk of injury Modifications to or work performed incorrectly on the following parts can result in the restraint systems not functioning as intended: Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat belts and their anchorage points, belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags Rthe wiring Rany networked electronic systems Airbags and belt tensioners could fail, e.g. in the event of an accident, the deceleration force of which would normally be sufficient to trigger the systems, or could be triggered unintentionally. For this reason, never make any modifications to the restraint systems. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 39 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety You must not tamper with electronic components or their software. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) The SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. The SRS consists of: RThe 6 SRS warning lamp Rbelt tensioners Rbelt force limiters Rairbags The 6 SRS warning lamp SRS functions are checked regularly when you turn on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. G Risk of injury If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or not be deployed in the event of an accident with heavy braking. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 SRS warning lamp: Rdoes not light up when you switch on the ignition Rdoes not go out after the engine has been running for a few seconds Rlights up again once the engine is running In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 39 Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags In the event of a collision, the sensor in the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data such as duration, direction and force of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration. Based on the evaluation of this data and depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudinal deceleration in a collision, in the first stage the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners. i The front belt tensioners can only be triggered if the belt tongue is correctly engaged in the seat belt buckle. The front airbags are only deployed if there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage front airbags. When the first activation threshold is reached, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is only fully inflated if a second threshold is reached within a few milliseconds, due to the control unit having detected further deceleration. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and airbags In the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates the duration and direction of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in order to determine whether it is necessary to trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag must be deployed during – and not at the end of – the collision. i Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. They are controlled by complex sensor technology and evaluation logic. This process is pre-emptive in nature as airbag deployment must take place during the impact and must be adapted to provide Z Safety 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:48; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Safety 40 03. Mar 2009 15:16:49; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 40 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety calculated, additional protection for the vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. However, the deployment of each individual system will depend on the type of accident determined by the control system in the first stages of the collision (head-on collision, side impact and overturn) and the extent of the accident (in particular, the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration). The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are basically determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- cle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehicle Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of it. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the necessary deceleration does not occur. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformations. For example, this is the case if very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are affected and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. seat is not occupied. The belt tensioners could otherwise be triggered in an accident. If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt force limiter, the force exerted by the seat belt on the seat occupant is reduced. Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back towards the backrest. The front belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which distribute a proportion of the deceleration forces exerted on the occupant over a greater area. The seat belts have an automatic comfort-fit feature. Vehicles which have a rear bench seat with electrically adjustable outer seats* also have the automatic comfort-fit feature on the seat belts in the rear compartment. The automatic comfort-fit feature reduces the retraction force of the seat belts, which results in increased seat belt comfort. The belt tensioners cannot be triggered when the ignition is switched on unless: Rthe restraint systems are operational; see 6 SRS warning lamp. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each lap-shoulder belt in the front of the vehicle. Depending on the type and severity of an accident, the belt tensioners may be triggered: Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or acceler- Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. ! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat if the * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 41 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of impact Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle is subjected to high lateral acceleration/ deceleration Rin certain situations if the vehicle overturns, and the system determines that it can provide additional protection If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that escapes does not generally constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. G Risk of injury If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. Airbags Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that escapes does not generally constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. The SRS/AIRBAG identification indicates the location of the airbags. G Risk of injury Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. * optional 41 Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury if an airbag is deployed: Rall vehicle occupants ― in particular pregnant women ― must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the middle of the driver's front airbag cover as possible. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible, especially if a child is secured in a child restraint system on the seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their head into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Rrearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The front-passenger front airbag of a vehicle fitted with automatic child seat recognition* is only disabled when a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp must be continuously lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition*, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a Z Safety 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:49; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Safety 42 03. Mar 2009 15:16:49; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 42 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This allows the airbag to inflate fully. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area of deployment of the airbag. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example, coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. Router Rside side of front seats panel next to the rear seat backrest G Risk of injury When an airbag deploys, a small amount of powder is released. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. G Risk of injury The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them; otherwise, you may burn yourself. Have the airbags checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Front airbags The front airbags are designed to increase protection for the driver's and front passenger's head and chest. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injuries caused by an airbag due to the high speed at which the airbag is required to deploy. G Risk of injury The airbag's functionality can only be guaranteed if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: Rpadded Rknee umn steering wheel boss airbag cover below the steering col- Rfront-passenger front airbag cover Driver's front airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. They are deployed: Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:50; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 43 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently cle of other airbags in the vehi- Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction On vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat*, frontpassenger front airbag ; is only deployed when the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp next to the instrument cluster is not lit (Y page 47). This means that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition* has not been fitted to the frontpassenger seat or has been fitted incorrectly. Driver's knee airbag i The driver's knee airbag is only available in certain countries. Sidebags G Risk of injury If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, a head/thorax airbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Therefore, do not make any modifications to the doors or door trims, e.g. retrofitting loudspeakers. Damage to the doors can affect operation of the sidebags. The purpose of sidebag deployment is to enhance the level of protection for the thorax (but not the head, neck or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The driver's knee airbag can help reduce the risk of injury to the knees, thighs and lower legs. Driver's knee airbag : is always deployed along with the driver's front airbag and inflates underneath the steering column. Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushion. They are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently * optional of the seat belt use Z Safety Rat 43 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 44 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 44 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rif Safety 03. Mar 2009 15:16:50; WK the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Windowbags The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and run from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar). PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® system takes pre-emptive measures to protect you in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes in the event of: Remergency braking situations, e.g. if Brake Assist BAS is activated or Brake Assist BAS PLUS* intervenes powerfully Rthe radar sensor system detecting an immediate danger of collision in certain situations (on vehicles with Distronic Plus*) Rcritical situations involving driving dynamics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or understeers significantly due to physical limits being exceeded PRE-SAFE® may take the following measures in these situations: Rit tensions the front seat belts. Rit adjusts the seats to a better position if the front-passenger seat or the electricallyadjustable outer seats in the rear compartment* are in an unfavourable position Ron vehicles with the multicontour seat* or active multicontour seat*: it increases the air pressure in the seat side cushions and the backrest side cushions. Windowbags : are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a lateral direction Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rindependently of the front airbags Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rif the vehicle overturns and the system determines that windowbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the vehicle skids, it closes the sliding/ tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* and the side windows so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pretensioning. You can then reverse all settings made by PRE-SAFE®. On vehicles with a multicontour seat* or an active multicontour seat*, the air pressure in the side bolsters is then reduced. If the seat belts are not released: X Move the backrest back slightly until the belt tension is reduced. The locking mechanism releases. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:50; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 45 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety When adjusting the seat, make sure that nobody can become trapped. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints* NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints are designed to increase protection of the driver’s and front-passenger’s head and neck. To this end, the head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision when viewed in the direction of travel. This provides better head support. G Risk of injury Head restraint covers prevent NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints from triggering properly. The NECKPRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints can therefore not provide the intended protection. Do not use head restraint covers. If NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger seat (Y page 394). Head restraints that have been triggered are tilted forwards. Children in the vehicle If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size and age of the child and which is recommended for MercedesBenz vehicles. You should fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Ensure that the child is secured throughout the trip. * optional You can obtain information about the correct child restraint system from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. Information about this can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. Children could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. The child could get out and be injured in the process or be injured by a passing vehicle. Please also observe the information on HOLD. Relevant information can be found in the index. G Risk of injury An unsecured or an incorrectly positioned load increases the risk of injury for the child and all other occupants during: Ran accident Ra braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle unless they are secured. Further information can be found in the index under "Loading and unloading" and "Features". Child restraint systems Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed on (Y page 48). Z Safety G Risk of injury 45 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 46 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 46 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Safety 03. Mar 2009 15:16:51; WK Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children of this size. Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under twelve years of age on the frontpassenger seat. Exception: the child is secured in a vehicle with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* and is secured in a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition. Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with their original covers. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. For safety reasons, you should only use child restraint systems which have been approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Child seat on the front-passenger seat Rif you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces occurring in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. Warning on the front-passenger sun visor G Risk of injury The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system G Risk of injury If the front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seri- * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:51; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 47 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* Safety ously and even fatally injured by the frontpassenger front airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger front airbag when it deploys. Ra child must never be secured on the front- passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearwardfacing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Ralways The front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat*. Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat*, if no special child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat*, if the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is not lit. To alert you to this danger, a corresponding warning sticker is located on the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the frontpassenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The sensors for the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat detect whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In such cases, 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp : lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. G Risk of injury If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger front airbag is deployed, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. or Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions correctly, never place objects (such as a cushion) under the child restraint system. * optional 47 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 48 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety 48 Safety 03. Mar 2009 15:16:51; WK The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt tensioner on the front-passenger side are still active even if the front-passenger front airbag is disabled by the automatic childseat recognition on the front-passenger seat. Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This could lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp to light up without there being a child seat with automatic child seat recognition fitted. This means that the front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an accident. It is also possible that the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp will not light up briefly if you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. G Risk of injury Do not place electronic devices on the frontpassenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, Rmobile when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Weight categories and ages Group 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 18 months Child restraint system on the as recommended3, 4 front-passenger seat Group I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 8 months and 4 years Universal4 or as recommended Child restraint system on the Universal5 or as recommen- Universal5 or as recomleft-hand and right-hand rear ded mended seats Child restraint system on the Not suitable centre rear seat As recommended Only use child restraint systems featuring automatic child seat recognition. Move the front-passenger seat to the highest and rearmost position. Move the head restraints to their highest position. 5 Unsuitable for electrically adjustable rear seats*. 3 4 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 49 Version: 2.11.7.7 Weight categories and ages Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg between approximately 3½ and 12 years Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat Universal4 or as recommended Child restraint system on the left-hand and right-hand rear seats Universal5 or as recommended Child restraint system on the centre rear seat As recommended "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Example of an approval label on the child restraint system Recommended child restraint systems Weight categories and ages Group 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 18 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 8 months and 4 years Manufacturer Britax-Römer Britax-Römer Type BABY SAFE PLUS DUO PLUS Approval number E1 03 301146 E1 03 301133 Daimler order number A 000 970 10 00 A 000 970 11 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes Move the front-passenger seat to the highest and rearmost position. Move the head restraints to their highest position. 5 Unsuitable for electrically adjustable rear seats*. 4 * optional 49 Safety Occupant safety Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 50 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety Safety 50 Weight categories and ages Group 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 18 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 8 months and 4 years Daimler order number – A 000 970 16 00 Automatic child seat recognition – No Installation on the frontpassenger seat 6 6 Installation on an outer rear seat 7 7 Installation on the centre rear seat Not permissible Permissible Weight categories and ages Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg between approximately 3½ and 12 years Manufacturer Britax-Römer Type KID Approval number E1 03 301148 Daimler order number A 000 970 12 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Daimler order number A 000 970 17 00 Automatic child seat recognition No Installation on the front-passenger seat 6 Installation on an outer rear seat 7 Installation on the centre rear seat Permissible ISOFIX child seat securing system in the rear compartment ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right rear seats. G Risk of injury A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX Move the front-passenger seat to its most upright and rearmost position. Move the head restraints to their highest position. 7 Electrically adjustable rear seats*: move the outer backrests to their most upright position and the outer seat cushions to their rearmost and lowermost position. 6 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 51 Version: 2.11.7.7 Occupant safety 51 child seat securing system. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a lap-shoulder belt. The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. On the rear seats, only use child restraint systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing system which have been recommended for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that it is engaged in the securing rings on both sides. G Risk of injury Please note that if child restraint systems, or their retaining systems, are damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, they may not be able to provide their protective function. This could result in serious or even fatal injuries to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Safety G Risk of injury Fold upholstery cover : and the Velcro fastener upwards. X Attach the child seat to both securing rings ;. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Child-proof locks If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors. Child-proof locks for the rear doors The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable you to secure each door individually. A locked door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can be opened from the outside if the vehicle is unlocked. G Risk of accident and injury Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override feature for the rear compartment if children are travelling in the vehicle. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is moving, adjust the seats, use the cigarette lighter and injure themselves or others. ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not become trapped. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 52 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving safety systems 52 Rfront-passenger rear* seat adjustment from the roller sunblinds* in the roof, the rear window roller sunblind* and the roller sunblinds* on the rear side windows Safety Rthe G Risk of accident and injury To activate: press locking lever upwards :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X X Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override feature for the rear compartment if children are travelling in the vehicle. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is moving, adjust the seats, use the cigarette lighter and injure themselves or others. To deactivate: press locking lever downwards ;. i Except vehicles for the United Kingdom: if you press the % central unlocking button on the driver's or front-passenger door, the child-proof locks on the rear doors are disabled temporarily. G Risk of accident If the child-proof locks are deactivated by the central locking button % being pressed, both rear doors are unlocked and can be opened. Doors being opened by children can cause injuries to others. In addition, if children exit the vehicle, they could injure themselves in the process or else be injured by passing vehicles. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle; they could press the central unlocking button or open a door, thereby endangering themselves and others. Override switch for the controls in the rear compartment For the rear compartment, you can disable operation of: Rthe rear side windows Rthe cigarette lighter in the rear X To activate: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The override feature in the rear passenger compartment is enabled. The rear side windows can only be operated using the switches on the driver's door. X To deactivate: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The override feature in the rear passenger compartment is deactivated. You can operate the rear side windows using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 53 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving safety systems RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) G Risk of accident RBAS (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS* (Brake Assist System Plus*) Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. RAdaptive RESP® REBV brake lamps (Electronic Stability Program) (electronic brake-power distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® Brake* (vehicles with Distronic Plus*) i In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. Braking G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G Risk of accident The risk of an accident is significantly increased by driving too fast. This is particularly the case when cornering as well as on wet or slippery roads or when driving too close to the vehicle in front. The driving safety systems described in this section can neither reduce this risk nor override the laws of physics. For this reason, always adapt your driving style to suit prevailing road and weather conditions. Maintain sufficient distance from other road users and objects on the road. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. * optional G Risk of accident If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS, BAS PLUS* and ESP® are also deactivated. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit prevailing road and weather conditions. BAS (Brake Assist) G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Z 53 Safety 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 54 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving safety systems 54 Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X Safety 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK G Risk of accident If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking situations and the stopping distance may increase. BAS PLUS* (Brake Assist Plus) BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations and uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. G Risk of accident BAS PLUS is only an aid to assist you when driving. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from other vehicles, for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to the traffic conditions. You may otherwise recognise dangers too late, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Should you approach a detected obstacle quickly, BAS PLUS calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you additionally apply the brakes, BAS PLUS will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, PRE-SAFE® is activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again when: Ryou release the brake pedal Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision BAS PLUS is then deactivated. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS can also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles. Vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system*: the radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 446). For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational. You can check this by activating Distronic Plus* (Y page 246) or via the "Radar sensor" menu in the on-board computer (Y page 243). G Risk of accident Only clearly identified obstacles will initiate braking assistance by BAS PLUS. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are covered Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey garages BAS PLUS does not react to people or animals, oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic. BAS PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles such as motorcycles and vehicles driving on a different line. Following a collision or crash-related damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the braking * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 55 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving safety systems system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. 55 RUnder no circumstances should you deactivate ESP®. RWhen pulling away, only depress the accel- i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS*, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning switch button (Y page 211). erator pedal as far as is necessary. RAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Safety Adaptive brake lamps The vehicle may otherwise begin to skid. If you drive too fast, ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! If the vehicle is to be towed with the front or rear axle raised, the ignition must be switched off (key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock). Application of the brakes by ESP® could otherwise destroy the brake system on the front or rear axle. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed with the front or rear axle raised. i Only use wheels with the recommended ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle when braking. When ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G Risk of accident If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: * optional tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ESP® trailer stabilisation If your trailer begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. In this situation, ESP® assists you and can detect when the trailer begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/ trailer combination has stabilised. Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. G Risk of accident If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the trailer from swerving and will thus be unable to reduce the risk of an accident. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Safety 56 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 56 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving safety systems Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. Rtraction ETS (Electronic Traction Support) i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more Traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example, if the road surface is slippery on one side. Traction control remains active when you deactivate ESP®. G Risk of accident Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. Traction control cannot override the laws of physics. Activating/deactivating ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is running. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen Rin using snow chains control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. wheels start to spin, the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. X To deactivate: (Y page 240). The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G Risk of accident If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may start to skid then increases in certain situations. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To deactivate: (Y page 240). The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. deep snow Ron sand or gravel G Risk of accident Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rengine torque is not limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction. EBV (electronic brake force distribution) EBV monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability when braking. G Risk of accident If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system is still available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 57 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving safety systems ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE offers exceptional braking comfort and a higher level of braking safety. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD convenience function (Y page 256) and hill start assist (Y page 219). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 325). PRE-SAFE Brake®* (vehicles with Distronic Plus*) PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. This function will issue a warning at speeds of around 30 km/h or more if: Rfor a period of several seconds, the distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed at which you are travelling. The · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster will light up. Ryou are approaching the vehicle in front too rapidly. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause the system to display an unnecessary warning. G Risk of accident Pay particular attention to the traffic conditions if the distance warning lamp · in the instrument cluster lights up or an intermittent warning tone sounds. If necessary, brake or manoeuvre to avoid an obstacle. In addition, at speeds of around 30 km/h or more, PRE-SAFE® Brake can: Rbrake the vehicle gently and automatically within a speed range of up to around 180 km/h Rtrigger preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) * optional 57 G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is only an aid to assist you when driving. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to the traffic conditions. Otherwise, you may recognise dangers too late, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or steer, the vehicle will automatically brake slightly. In the event of an increased risk of a collision, PRE-SAFE® is activated (Y page 44). G Risk of accident Only clearly detected obstacles will trigger a warning and initiate braking assistance by PRE-SAFE® Brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles may be restricted if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are covered Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference from other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react to persons, animals, oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic. PRE-SAFE® Brake may not detect narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or vehicles driving on a different line. G Risk of accident Depending on the vehicle's speed, PRESAFE® Brake will brake your vehicle up to Z Safety 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 58 Version: 2.11.7.7 Anti-theft systems 58 maximum of 4 m/s2. This is equivalent to approximately 40 % of the maximum braking power of the vehicle. You must also apply the brakes yourself to avoid a collision. Safety 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a crash, you must apply the brakes yourself. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary obstacles, for example stopped or parked vehicles. G Risk of accident If, in a critical driving situation, you do not receive a visual and acoustic warning: RPRE-SAFE® Brake did not detect the risk of a collision RPRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated RPRE-SAFE® Brake has failed You must then brake to avoid a collision. To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 240). After activation, the Ä symbol is displayed on the left in the driver display. Vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system*: the radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 446). For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational. PRE-SAFE® Brake does not always clearly identify complex traffic situations properly. You can terminate the intervention of PRESAFE® Brake in a non-critical driving situation at any time if: X Ran acoustic and visual warning occurs Rthe vehicle brakes gently To end this you can either depress the accelerator pedal further, activate kickdown or release the brake pedal. The braking intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. Ryou drive slower than approximately 15 km/h. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. i While Distronic Plus is activated, PRESAFE® Brake remains passive. Following a collision or crash-related damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked. Choose a qualified specialist workshop for this which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. Activating the immobiliser X With the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X With KEYLESS GO*: press the start/stop button on the dashboard. The engine switches off. Deactivating the immobiliser X With the key: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X With KEYLESS GO*: press the start/stop button on the dashboard twice without depressing the brake. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:53; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 59 Version: 2.11.7.7 Anti-theft systems i The immobiliser is always deactivated Rinterior when you start the engine. 59 motion sensor Rtow-away protection Rinterior motion sensor and tow-away pro- A visual and audible alarm is triggered when the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door Ra door using the emergency key element Deactivating the alarm X With the key: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is deactivated. Rthe boot lid or Rthe bonnet X Press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is deactivated. X With KEYLESS GO*: grasp the door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is deactivated. The alarm is not switched off even if you close an open door again. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is deactivated. Tow-away protection* To prime: lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the alarm system is primed via the sensor surface on the exterior door handle. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, you can also unlock the vehicle by grasping the door handle. X i You can assign functions to the programmable button in the centre console, such as (Y page 172): * optional An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This happens if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection manually if your vehicle: Ris being transported Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car transporter Ris being parked on a movable surface, e.g. split-level garages i When you unlock your vehicle using the key or KEYLESS GO*, tow-away protection is automatically deactivated. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until you unlock and lock the vehicle again. Z Safety tection ATA* (anti-theft alarm system) Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:54; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 60 Version: 2.11.7.7 Anti-theft systems 60 X To activate/deactivate: (Y page 177) Safety Interior motion sensor* If the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is deployed if movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for example, if someone breaks the side windows of your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's interior. To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and Rpeople Rthe or animals remain in the vehicle side windows remain open Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* remains open. X Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang- ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grasp handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X To activate/deactivate: (Y page 176). i The interior motion sensor remains deac- tivated until you unlock and lock the vehicle again. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 61 Version: 2.11.7.7 61 Introduction ......................................... 62 Radio .................................................... 75 DAB* ..................................................... 79 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 ........ 80 Video DVD functions ........................... 91 TV* ........................................................ 97 MUSIC REGISTER* ............................. 102 Media Interface* mode .................... 106 Telephone* ........................................ 112 Navigation system* (introduction) . Navigation system* (entering a destination) ....................................... Navigation system* (entering special destinations) .............................. Navigation system* (route guidance) .................................................. Navigation* route guidance with RDS-TMC ............................................ Navigation system* (destination memory) ............................................ Navigation system* (previous destinations) ........................................... System ............................................... Vehicle ............................................... Automatic air conditioning .............. Seats .................................................. 133 143 156 156 163 165 169 169 173 177 183 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:54; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 62 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 62 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Introduction Operating safety G Risk of accident COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:16:54; WK Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use COMAND or the telephone* when the road and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that, at a speed of only 50 km/h, your vehicle covers a distance of nearly 14 m per second. The navigation system* will not provide you with information about stop signs, give-way signs, traffic regulations or road safety features. It is up to you to pay attention to these while driving the vehicle. Only enter a new destination when the vehicle is stationary. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. Dear radio user, This radio can be operated by anyone in accordance with the relevant EC directive. The equipment corresponds to current European and harmonised national standards. This guarantees that the equipment conforms to the relevant specifications regarding electromagnetic compatibility. As a result, interference caused by your equipment to other electrical/electronic equipment and interference to your equipment caused by other electrical/electronic equipment can be largely prevented. The equipment is approved by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with European Automotive EMC Directive 95/54/EC. This means that the equipment in your vehicle is authorised for use according to the given regulations. The equipment does not require certification and conforms to the relevant equipment-specific EMC specifications in accordance with European standards EN 55013 and EN 55020. Function restrictions when the vehicle is being driven For safety reasons, some COMAND functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. This will be indicated by COMAND displaying a message to this effect. Components You can use COMAND to operate the following in your vehicle: Rthe audio functions Rthe navigation system* Rthe telephone* and communication functions (text messages*) Rvideo DVD and TV* Rvarious vehicle settings COMAND consists of: Rthe COMAND display/SPLITVIEW* Rthe COMAND controller Rthe COMAND function buttons Rthe telephone keypad Rconnections in the glove compartment (USB, additional USB*, jack plug* and iPod® connection*) The entertainment system* comprises: Ra remote control* for the front passenger Ra remote control* for the Rear Seat Entertainment System* Rtwo sets of wireless headphones* for the Rear Seat Entertainment System* Rwireless headphones* for the front passenger Rtwo screens* (Rear Seat Entertainment System*) * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 63 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction System*) drive (Rear Seat Entertainment ? Submenus A Air-conditioning function bar Raudio/video connections on the screen (Rear Seat Entertainment System*) Raudio/video connections on the drive (Rear Seat Entertainment System*) The active area is highlighted in colour. If you have selected a main function ;, main area = is active. i The layout of the menus may vary depend- The Rear Seat Entertainment System operates the following: ing on the equipment in the vehicle. RDisc COMAND controller RTV* You can use the COMAND controller to select the menu functions in the COMAND display. (audio CD, MP3, audio DVD and video DVD) RAUX* RSystem settings COMAND display The COMAND controller can be: Rpressed Rturned COMAND display with its functions and respective menus : Status bar ; Main functions briefly or pressed and held clockwise or anti-clockwise Rslid to the left, to the right, up, down or diagonally This allows you to navigate within a menu, to select a menu item or to exit a menu. = Main area Symbol Operating the COMAND controller Functions W Press briefly RSelects a menu item RExits the full-screen view (e.g. for navigation system*, TV* or video) Press and hold until the selected action is carried out * optional RStores a station RAccepts tem* a destination in the navigation sys- Z COMAND RCD/DVD 63 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, COMAND 64 03. Mar 2009 15:16:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 64 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Symbol Operating the COMAND controller Functions cVd Turn RScrolls through vertical or horizontal menus RScrolls through text RMakes settings RScrolls through a vertical menu ZVÆ Slide RExits XVY Slide and hold RMoves in the navigation map* Slide RScrolls through a horizontal menu RExits Slide and hold aVb a horizontal menu Slide and hold a vertical menu RQuicker fast-forward or rewind during CD or DVD playback RMoves in the navigation map* RMoves in the navigation map* COMAND function buttons C Volume control The COMAND function buttons allow you to select a main function directly. D Programmable button (Y page 172) Example: X To select the radio or CD menu directly: press the R button ; once or twice. Telephone keypad : Function button for roller sunblind ; Function button for radio and CD/DVD or SD card = Back button ? Lumbar support/multicontour seat* A Function button for telephone* and navi- gation system* B On/off button for COMAND : Telephone keypad ; Folding cover * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 65 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Remote control* for the front passenger/Rear Seat Entertainment System* A remote control (for the front passenger) is included for the SPLITVIEW* option. A remote control for the rear compartment is included with the Rear Seat Entertainment System*. To select the screen The front passenger's remote control may be used to operate the display in the front. rear-compartment screens with the remote control for the Rear Seat Entertainment System*. X Turn thumbwheel = to the respective setting. Remote control for the front passenger: SPLITVIEW Front display COMAND Front display Remote control for the Rear Seat Entertainment System*: REAR L REAR R Rear-compartment screen, left-hand side Rear-compartment screen, righthand side Switching the screen on/off i If the key has been turned to position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or has been removed, the rear-compartment screens switch off after 30 minutes. Before the screens switch off, they show a message to this effect. You can switch the screens back on. However, this will discharge the starter battery. : To switch the screen on/off ; To switch the button lighting on/off = To select the screen ? To select the menu or menu item A To confirm the selection or setting B To switch the sound on/off (for wired headphones) C To adjust the volume (for wired head- phones) D To skip a track, fast forward/rewind E To select a track, direct entry F To exit a menu (back) i If the remote control batteries are low, To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. X Use function button B to switch on COMAND. X To switch off: point the remote control at the screen. X Press button :. X To switch on when COMAND is activated: point the remote control at the screen. X Press button :. X Switching the button lighting on/off X Press button ;. replace the batteries (Y page 396). * optional Z 65 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:56; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 66 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 66 i If you do not use the remote control for 15 seconds, the button lighting switches off automatically. Switching the sound on/off (wired headphones) X Press the B button. COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:16:57; WK Selecting a menu or menu item and confirming the selection X To select a menu or menu item: press arrow buttons ?. X To confirm the selection: press button A. Headphones* for the front passenger/Rear Seat Entertainment System* Wireless headphones : Volume control ; To select the rear-compartment screen8 = Battery compartment cover ? To switch the wireless headphones on/off A Indicator lamp, differing displays i Replace the headphone batteries if they are low (Y page 397). The colour of the indicator lamp shows the following statuses: Green The headphones are switched on and the batteries are full. Red The headphones are switched on and the batteries are low. Unlit The headphones are switched off or the batteries are either low or are not inserted. X 8 To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones and adjust the size Only for the headphones for the Rear Seat Entertainment System*. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 67 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction Basic functions i Information about the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 62). Switching COMAND on/off X i If you switch off COMAND, playback of the current audio or video source will also be switched off. You cannot switch off COMAND while making a call* via COMAND. i If you have connected wired headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume by pressing buttons C on the remote control (Y page 65). X To select the screen: slide switch ; to L (left-hand screen) or R (right-hand screen). Wired headphones Press the u button. Sound X To switch on/off: press the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel. The sound from the respective audio or video source is switched on or muted. i When the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the audio or video source, the audio output is automatically activated. You will still hear traffic announcements and navigation system announcements*, even if the sound is muted. : Socket for wired headphones ; V jack for video signal = L jack for audio signal, left ? R jack for audio signal, right You can connect an additional set of wired headphones to each rear-compartment screen. The socket is designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms. * optional Muting traffic and navigation announcements* X RDS: press and hold the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel until the TA display switches off. X Navigation announcements: during an announcement, press the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel. i The announcements remain switched off even if you start a new route guidance or if COMAND is switched off and on with the u button. They will be switched on again under the following conditions: if you switch COMAND off by removing the key from the ignition lock and then switch the ignition back on after more than 3 minutes. Z COMAND of the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow. X To switch the headphones on/off: press button ?. To preserve the batteries, the headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an infrared signal for approximately three minutes. X To set the volume: turn volume control : until the desired volume is set. 67 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 68 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 68 Adjusting the volume Adjusting the sound settings COMAND You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. You can reach the respective sound menu via the submenu in which you wish to make the settings. Example: Audio Q Radio Q Sound Adjusting the treble or bass X X To adjust: turn thumbwheel :. Select Sound Q Treble or Bass. The previously selected setting is indicated by an empty bar. or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. Volume of traffic and navigation announcements* You can adjust the volume of traffic and navigation announcements independently of the volume of the audio source. X Turn thumbwheel : during a traffic or navigation announcement. or X During a traffic announcement or navigation announcement, press the W or X button on the multi-function steering wheel. Adjusting the volume for telephone calls* You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode during a telephone call. X Turn thumbwheel : during a telephone call. or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel during a telephone call. : Last setting made ; Current setting To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired treble and bass levels are set. X To save the setting: press W. The setting is stored and you exit the menu. X To exit the menu without saving: press the % back button. X Adjusting the balance or fader settings With the Balance function, you can control whether the sound is louder on the driver’s or front-passenger side. With the Fade function, you can control whether the sound is louder in the front or the rear of the vehicle. X Select Sound Q Balance/fader. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 69 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 69 medium. Due to the design of the passenger compartment, an optimum audio experience cannot be guaranteed for all passengers. Setting surround sound Select Sound Q 3D sound. COMAND X : Current setting To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or XVY until balance and fader are set as desired. X To save the setting: press W. The setting is stored and you exit the menu. X To exit the menu without saving: press the % back button. X Surround sound* If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound system, you can choose between the settings LOGIC7® on and LOGIC7® off. harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound is available for the following operating modes: RAudio DVD* (MLP, DTS, PCM and Dolby Digital audio formats) RVideo DVD (PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital audio formats) RAudio CD RMP3 RRadio RAUX i Some DVDs contain both stereo and multi-channel audio formats. For this reason, it may be necessary to set the audio format (Y page 88) and (Y page 96). i If you select LOGIC7® off, playback of all permissible formats is as stored on the * optional : Current setting To select a setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To save the setting: press W. The setting is stored and you exit the menu. X To exit the menu without saving: press the % back button or slide XVY. X i Please bear the following in mind: RFor the optimum audio experience for all passengers when LOGIC7® is switched on, the balance and fade should be set to the centre of the passenger compartment. RYou will achieve the best sound results by playing high-quality audio and video DVDs. RMP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s. RSurround-sound playback does not work for mono signal sources, such as the medium waveband in radio mode. RIf the radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, you should switch off LOGIC7® because it may otherwise switch auto- Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 70 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 70 matically between stereo and mono and therefore distort the sound temporarily. ROn some stereo recordings, the sound characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback. COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:16:57; WK Switching an audio/video source on or off If you load a CD or DVD, the audio/video source is automatically activated. Active audio source To switch off: select Audio Q Audio off. The audio source is switched off; Audio off appears in the display. X To switch on: select Audio, then select the desired audio source. or X Load a CD/DVD (Y page 83) or SD card (Y page 84). X Active video source To switch off: select Video Q Video off. The video source is switched off; Video off appears in the display. X To switch on: select Video, then select the desired video source. or X Insert a DVD (Y page 83). X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 71 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 71 Operation Each of the main functions, Navi*, Audio, Telephone*, Video and Vehicle, has a basic menu consisting of menu items or functions. Example: the Video main function includes these menu items: TV*, DVD video, Aux* and the Video off function. Navi* Audio Telephone* Video Vehicle Mode Radio Telephone on TV* Multicontour seat*/lumbar support setting Map orientation Disc Telephone off video DVD Rear window blind* Special destination symbols on the map Memory card AUX* EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature Video off Exterior lighting delayed switchoff time Text information MUSIC REGISon the map TER* Topographical map Media Interface* Interior lighting delayed switchoff time Town view USB Ambient lighting* Motorway information Rear Autom. mirror folding Automatic read- AUX* ing aloud of traffic reports Locator lighting Volume limiter Autom. locking Map version Audio off Interior motion sensor* Tow-away protection* Boot lid opening limiter * optional Z COMAND Menu overview Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 72 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 72 COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:16:58; WK Calling up the basic menu Horizontal menus Example: basic audio menu Example: entering a navigation destination* The basic menu for a main function can be called up as follows: X To navigate within the menu: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To select a menu item: press W. X To exit a menu without making a selection: slide ZVÆ in the opposite direction to the direction of the list. To move to the upper bar: slide ZV. To select the main function: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X X Vertical menus or X Press the % button. Character entry Example: station list X To navigate within the menu: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To select a menu item: press W. X To exit a menu without making a selection: slide XVY in the opposite direction to the direction of the list. or X Press the % button. Example: entering a navigation destination* To select a character: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X X To delete individual characters: select F on the lower bar and press it. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 73 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction X To delete an entire word or number: select F on the lower bar and press it until the entire word or number has been deleted. X To exit character entry: press Back on the lowest bar. Back button Press the % button. X To switch to the list: slide ZV. COMAND or X or X Select ! on the second lowest bar. X To accept the first entry: press and hold W until you exit character entry. COMAND completes the entry as soon as it can be clearly identified. If this is the case, the view does not switch to the list. Selecting a list item To go up to the next menu: briefly press the : button. COMAND changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To switch to the basic menu: press and hold back button :. COMAND changes to the basic menu of the current operating mode. X Adjusting the display Swivelling You can swivel the COMAND display to the left or right9. Example: list of towns in navigation mode* : Symbol for more selection options X X 9 To select a line: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. To confirm your selection: press W. List entries with the G symbol offer additional options for selection, e.g. if there are several towns with the same name in the selected country. Confirming one of these list entries will take you to a further subselection. : To swivel the display to the left ; To swivel the display to the right Not with SPLITVIEW*. * optional 73 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 74 Version: 2.11.7.7 Introduction 74 Setting the brightness remote control and the special infrared headphones for the front passenger. Please bear the following in mind: COMAND RVolume adjustment on the headphones for the front-passenger side can only be carried out on the headphones. Before putting on the headphones, make certain that the volume has not been set too high. RYou : Brightness of the instrument cluster light- ing ; Brightness of the COMAND display X To brighten or dim: turn : or ; to the right or to the left. i If Night View Assist Plus* is activated, only the brightness of the multi-function display is adjusted with control :. Display design When the default settings are selected, the display automatically switches between day design and night design. You can change these settings using COMAND (Y page 170). SPLITVIEW* SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use different COMAND functions on the frontpassenger side and on the driver's side. Depending on the viewing angle of the display (from the driver's seat or from the frontpassenger seat), you will see two different displays. For example, the "Navi" function can be used from the driver's side while the "Video" function is used on the front-passenger side. To operate COMAND from the frontpassenger side with SPLITVIEW, use the can only use media from the driver's and front-passenger sides separately if the media are from different sources. Example: on the driver's side, an audio CD is being played on the DVD changer*. This means that on the front-passenger side, the DVD changer* cannot be used to play a different medium, for instance a video DVD. However, other media can be used at the same time on the front-passenger side, including radio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER*, Media Interface*, USB or AUX*. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, you can both carry out the respective settings. RThere must be intervisibility between the headphones and the display so that COMAND can optimally transmit music and speech via the infrared signal on the frontpassenger's headphones. For this reason, please also observe that the headphones have left and right sides, and use them correctly. ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio, TV* and video, may be used separately with SPLITVIEW. RThe multi-function steering wheel can only used for functions which relate to the driver's side. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 75 Version: 2.11.7.7 Radio i If COMAND has already been switched Switching SPLITVIEW* on/off To switch on: select Vehicle Q SPLIT‐ VIEW on. SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to SPLIT‐ VIEW off. X To switch off: select Vehicle Q SPLIT‐ VIEW off. Display ; switches to SPLITVIEW on. X Radio Menu overview Presets Info* FM (MW, LW, SW) Sound Station information DAB* Treble FM Bass Frequency input MW Balance/fader Frequency fix (FM only) SW Surround sound* Station fix (DAB* only) LW Station list (in Autostore FM waveband and DAB only*) Storing a station Station presets TA * optional Z COMAND on, you can also use the remote control to switch SPLITVIEW on and off (Y page 65). The SPLITVIEW screen remains on for approximately 30 minutes after the key has been turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. After this time or after the key has been removed, the settings on the front-passenger side are saved for approximately 30 minutes longer. After this period, reactivation on the frontpassenger side means that the settings from the driver's side will be used. Radio 75 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 76 Version: 2.11.7.7 Radio 76 Radio Presets FM (MW, LW, SW) Info* Sound COMAND Active source to rear compartment* Rear compartment off* Switching to radio mode X Select AudioQRadio. D Preset options E Radio options or X Press the R function button once or twice. The radio display appears once the system has switched to radio mode. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband. The number of times you have to press the function button depends on the operating mode currently selected. Switching wavebands You can switch the radio between the FM, MW, LW, SW and DAB wavebands*. X Audio Q Radio Q Waveband display =. X Select the desired waveband. You will hear the last station on the selected waveband. i In the MW, LW and SW wavebands, COMAND shows only the station frequency. Selecting a station You can select stations from the station list or by manually entering the frequency. Example: radio operation : Frequency of the selected station Selecting from the station list i The station list is only available in the FM waveband and in DAB* radio mode. It contains all the stations that can currently be received, and is sorted alphabetically. For stations without a programme service, the list shows the frequency instead of the name. ; Sound settings = To show/switch waveband ? Name of the selected station A Radio text transmitted from the station B Preset position of the selected station C Artist and track X Slide XVY or turn cVd when the main area is selected. or * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:16:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 77 Version: 2.11.7.7 Radio Select Audio Q Radio Q Radio Q Station list. or X Press and hold the 9 or : button on the multi-function steering wheel. Selecting using the station search function To move to the next frequency: slide XVY. X To set the frequency: press W. COMAND tunes in to the frequency entered. X i If you enter a frequency in the medium waveband which is outside the frequency range, COMAND tunes in to the next lower frequency. i The station search function is only available in the MW, LW and SW wavebands. X Slide XVY or turn cVd when the main area is selected. Station search scans up or down and stops at the next station found. or X Press and hold the 9 or : button on the multi-function steering wheel. Selecting via the station presets X Storing a station Twenty stations can be stored in each waveband. If station fix or frequency fix has been set, these functions are saved when the station is saved. Storing manually X Select Audio Q Radio Q Memory. or or Press W when the main area is selected. The preset menu appears. The # dot in front of a preset position indicates that the currently selected channel is stored there. X Select the preset position and briefly press W. You can also select the station using the digits on the telephone keypad (Y page 114) or the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel: X Briefly press the 9 or : button on the multi-function steering wheel. X X Select Audio Q Radio Q Radio Q Save station. Press W when the main area is selected. or X Select Audio Q Radio Q Memory. A station preset display appears. The # dot in front of a preset position indicates that the currently selected channel is stored there. Selecting by entering the frequency manually Select AudioQ Radio Q Radio Q Frequency input. X To select a higher or lower number: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X i You can only tune in to currently permitted frequencies. Z COMAND X 77 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 78 Version: 2.11.7.7 Radio 78 COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:16:59; WK Storing the station to the selected preset position If you have called up the station preset display using Save station: X Press W briefly. In the other two cases: X Press and hold W until you hear a tone. The station is stored. Storing using Autostore i This function automatically stores chan- nels which can be received in order of their reception quality. Any stations stored manually in the preset memory will be lost if COMAND finds 20 stations. If COMAND finds fewer than 20 stations, for example 9, then the stations stored in preset positions 1 - 9 will be lost. X X quality and RDS data. COMAND stores the data and constantly updates it. The listening receiver is therefore able to switch instantaneously to an alternative frequency with a better signal. The Frequency fix function prevents COMAND from switching between the alternative frequencies of a station. This is useful, for example, when there is a noticeable time offset between the frequencies or if there is interference on a frequency. X To switch on or off: select Audio Q Radio Q Radio. The tick next to Frequency fix indicates that this function is activated. Press W when the main area is selected. Select Autostore. or X Select Audio Q Radio Q Memory Q Autostore. or X Select Audio Q Radio Q Radio Q Save station Q Autostore. COMAND searches for stations with adequate reception. The available stations are automatically stored in the preset positions. RDS frequency diversity COMAND is equipped with an RDS frequency diversity system in the FM waveband. The system consists of a listening receiver and a monitoring receiver. i The frequency diversity system only functions for stations which transmit RDS data. The monitoring receiver constantly scans the FM waveband and collects data from all the stations which can be received, e.g. reception X Select Frequency fix. The function is switched on or off depending on the previous status. RDS Many FM stations transmit traffic announcements (TA). You can switch announcements on and off or interrupt a current announcement. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:00; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 79 Version: 2.11.7.7 DAB* X Select Audio Q Radio Q Radio Q TA. The tick next to TA indicates that this function is activated. or Press and hold the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel until the TA display switches on or off. You have switched the function on or off. If the function is switched on, you will see the TA symbol in the status bar. Once traffic announcements have been switched on, COMAND selects an RDS station. The traffic announcements are played from: X Rthe currently selected FM station Ran RDS station from the programme service of the currently selected FM station Rthe RDS station with the best reception quality When traffic announcements are switched on, a traffic announcement will interrupt the audio signal from the currently activated audio or video source. i Telephone conversations and navigation announcements are not interrupted. A display message appears in the display in all audio operating modes. Interrupting a traffic announcement X During a traffic announcement, briefly press the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel. COMAND switches back to the audio source that was selected before the announcement. Subsequent announcements will interrupt the audio source again. 10 Only Switching off RDS X Press and hold the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel until the TA display switches off. DAB* DAB radio mode i Information about the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 62). DAB10 (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on one single frequency. Digital radio stations can be transmitted nationally, regionally or locally. Digital stations are selected and saved in the same way as analogue stations. The following section therefore lists only those features specific to DAB. Some stations only transmit programmes at certain times. If you have selected a station that is subsequently removed from the ensemble, it will no longer be received. You will continue to receive the other programmes in the ensemble. Select either a different programme or a different ensemble. Switching to DAB radio mode X Select Audio Q RadioQ DAB. for certain countries. * optional Z COMAND Switching announcements on/off 79 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 80 03. Mar 2009 15:17:00; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 80 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 Select Audio Q Radio Q DAB Q Radio Q Sub-programmes. The names of the main and sub-programmes appear, and you hear the corresponding information. X To select a sub-programme: turn cVd or slide ZVÆ. COMAND X Station fix : Name of the selected station ; Frequency of the selected station = Frequency of the next station ? To search for an ensemble A Number of the stored station B Text information of the selected station C Memory functions D Radio functions Searching for an ensemble An ensemble consists of multiple radio programmes. Every ensemble is transmitted in a certain area (national, regional or local) in the same way as a traditional AM/FM radio station. X Select << or >> in DAB radio display ?. COMAND searches upwards or downwards for ensembles. You will see a message to this effect. You will see the available stations of the next ensemble found. Subprogram Some digital radio stations transmit additional sub-programmes. These include, for example, information on events taking place in a certain region or regional news. The "Station fix" function prevents an automatic switchover between FM and DAB. "Station fix" also prevents automatic switching between various DAB stations. X To switch on or off: select Audio Q Radio Q DABQ Radio. The tick next to Station fix indicates that this function is activated. Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 Safety notes G Risk of injury COMAND and the CD/DVD drive on the rear bench seat are Class 1 laser products. You must not open the casing. There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation if you open the casing or if the casing is faulty or damaged. COMAND and the CD/DVD drive on the rear bench seat do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, all maintenance work must be carried out by qualified aftersales technicians. G Risk of accident Inserting or ejecting discs while driving may distract you from the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Only insert or eject a disc when the vehicle is stationary. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 81 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 Notes on MP3 mode Track and file names Permissible file systems When you create a disc with music files, you can assign names to the tracks and folders. COMAND uses these names accordingly for the display. Empty folders or folders which contain data other than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by COMAND. If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root directory itself, the root directory will also be treated as a folder. COMAND will then show the name of the root directory as the folder name. You must observe the following when assigning track names: RISO9660/Joliet Rtitle Permissible discs RCD-R and CD-RW RDVD+R RDVD-R RSD and DVD+RW and DVD-RW cards RUSB sticks RiPod® RMP3 RUDF players for CDs for DVDs RFAT16 or FAT32 for storage media Multisession CDs For multisession CDs, the content of the first session determines how COMAND will process the CD. If the first session contains data in audio CD format, for example, and the second session contains MP3 tracks, COMAND will treat the CD as a conventional audio CD. This means that it is not possible to access the MP3 tracks. If the first session contains MP3 tracks, for example, and the second session contains data in audio CD format, COMAND will treat the CD as an MP3 disc. This means that it is not possible to access the audio CD tracks. File structure of a disc When you create a disc with music files, the tracks can be organised in folders. A disc can contain a maximum of 4,000 tracks. The disc may contain no more than eight directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level will not be recognised by the system. 11 MPEG ter. names must have at least one charac- Rtitle names must have the extension "mp3" or "wma". Rthere must be a full stop between the track name and the extension. example of a correct track name: Track1.mp3. Permissible formats COMAND supports the following formats: RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)11 RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio (WMA) V2, V7, V8 or V9 without copy protection Bit and sample rates MP3 COMAND supports MP3 files of the following types: Rfixed and variable bit rates of 32 kbit/s up to 320 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 24 kHz to 48 kHz Layer 3 audio coding technology under licence from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. * optional 81 Z COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:00; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 82 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 82 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 WMA COMAND supports WMA files of the following types: Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to 384 kbit/s Rsampling COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:00; WK rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND does not support WMA files of the following types: RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files Rvariable bit rate Rlossless settings RWMA R5.1 Pro Surround i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz. Lower rates cause a noticeable deterioration in quality. This is especially the case if you have activated a surround sound function*. Notes on copyright MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or playback are generally subject to copyright protection in accordance with the applicable international and national regulations. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these. If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your own compositions and recordings, or if the copyright holder has granted you permission, these restrictions do not apply. Notes on CDs and DVDs i Discs with copy protection are not compatible with the audio CD standard and it may therefore not be possible for COMAND to play them. There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of discs, disc-writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. There may be playback problems if you play CDs that you have copied yourself with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. i On many audio DVDs, the last track does not contain any music and COMAND switches to the next disc. This behaviour is system-related and is not a malfunction. ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs as they could peel off and damage COMAND. Stickers can also cause the disc to bend, which can result in read errors and disc recognition problems. COMAND is designed to hold discs which comply with the EN 60908 standard. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage COMAND. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. ROnly hold discs by the edge. RHandle errors. discs carefully to prevent reading RAvoid getting scratches, fingerprints and dust on discs. RClean discs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Do not wipe them with a circular motion, but only in straight lines from the centre outwards. RTo label discs, only use a pen designed for such a purpose. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:00; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 83 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 RPlace discs back in their cases after use. RProtect discs from heat and direct sunlight. 83 DVD changer* The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with six trays. Inserting and ejecting CDs/DVDs COMAND If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. If neither side is printed, the side to be played should face downwards. Single DVD drive Magazine tray status =: RIndicator lamp off: magazine tray is empty. RIndicator lamp constantly lit: magazine tray is loaded. To load a single magazine tray: press respective button =. X Remove any CD/DVD which may be in slot :. X Wait until the indicator lamp for button = which you pressed flashes quickly. X Insert the CD/DVD to be loaded into slot :. If the CD/DVD has been inserted properly and if it is a permissible type, the last CD/ DVD loaded will be played. X To load: press button ;. Remove any CD/DVD which may be in slot :. X Insert the CD/DVD to be loaded into slot :. If the CD/DVD has been inserted properly and if it is a permissible type, it will be drawn in and played. X To eject: press button ;. X Remove the CD/DVD from slot :. If the CD/DVD is not removed from slot :, it will be automatically drawn in again after a short while and replayed. X X * optional To load all six magazine trays: press button ;. The DVD changer checks the load status of all magazine trays and switches to the first empty tray. X Wait until the indicator lamp for the respective button flashes quickly. X Insert a disc into slot :. The DVD changer switches to the next empty magazine tray. X Repeat the last two steps until all trays are loaded. If the CD/DVD has been inserted properly and if it is a permissible type, the last CD/ DVD loaded will be played. X Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 84 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 84 i If you remove one disc while playing another disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Playback continues once the disc has been removed. To remove a disc: press respective button =. X Remove the CD/DVD from slot :. If the CD/DVD is not removed from slot :, it will be automatically drawn in again after a short while and replayed. X To remove all discs: press button ?. The DVD changer ejects the CD/DVD from the tray currently in use. X Remove the CD/DVD from slot :. The DVD changer switches to the next loaded magazine tray and ejects the CD/DVD. X Repeat the last step until the magazine is empty. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:01; WK To load: insert the CD/DVD to be loaded into slot :. X To play: select the Disc menu. X Loading and removing SD cards i Not all SD memory cards are designed for the temperatures which may be reached in the vehicle. Due to the wide range of SD cards available on the market, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee playback for all brands of SD memory card. CD/DVD drive (rear bench seat)* To load an SD card: press the SD card into slot :. The tapered side must point towards the right. If the SD card contains MP3 tracks, COMAND will play them back. X To remove the SD card: press the SD card into slot : as far as it will go and then release it again. X Pull out the card. X X X To remove: press button ;. Remove any CD/DVD which may be in slot :. If the CD/DVD is not removed from slot :, it will be automatically drawn in again after a short while and replayed. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:01; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 85 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 85 CD or DVD-A* or MP3 II/¯ ¯/M M (Audio DVD mode* only). Search* Media Sound Normal track sequence Pauses playbackII Current track list Media selection Treble Random media Stops playback ¯ Folder Bass Random track Restarts playlists (MP3 mode back M only) Keyword search Balance/fader TA Playlists Surround sound* Gracenote Media Database* (audio CD only) Artists Active source to rear compartment* Albums Rear compartment off* Tracks Genres Composers Year Switching to audio CD, audio DVD* or MP3 mode X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 83) or SD card (Y page 84). or X Select Audio Q Media, then select Disc, Memory card, Music Register, Media interface, USB... i The R function button takes you directly to the previously set disc mode (audio CD, audio DVD*, MP3 CD or video DVD). The number of times you have to press the function button depends on the previously set mode. or X Press the R function button once or twice. * optional Z COMAND Menu overview Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 86 03. Mar 2009 15:17:01; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 86 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 Example display in audio CD mode D Current playback option E Media selection F Music search G Stop function H Pause function COMAND I Audio DVD mode Example display in MP3 mode : Type of data medium ; Track number = Disc number ? Disc name (only if stored on the disc) A Track name (only if stored on the disc) B Track time C Visual time and track display D Sound settings E Current playback option F Media selection G Music search : Disc type ; Disc number = File or track name (ID3 tags) ? Disc or directory name H CD functions A Current playback option Example display in audio DVD mode* C Visual time and track display B Track time D Sound settings E Media selection F Music search G Artist (ID3 tags) H MP3 functions CD/DVD/MP3 functions Stop function : Disc type ; Track name i This function is only available in audio DVD mode*. = Disc number ? Disc name (only if stored on the disc) A Track time B Visual time and track display C Sound settings * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:01; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 87 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 Pause function Audio CD, audio DVD* and MP3 mode X To pause playback: briefly press the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel. X To continue playback: briefly press the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel again. Selecting a track Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards/back: slide XVY or turn cVd. or X Press the 9 or : button on the multifunction steering wheel. i Skipping forward skips to the next track. Skipping backwards skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has been playing for more than eight seconds. If the track has been playing for less than eight seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track. If you have switched on the Random tracks playback option, the order of the tracks is random. Audio DVD mode* To pause playback: select Audio Q Media Q DVD-A Q «. The « display changes to M. X To continue playback: select Audio Q Audio Q DVD-A Q M. The M display changes to «. X Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media Select Audio Q Media. Select CD or DVD-A or MP3. X In audio CD, audio DVD* and MP3 mode: select Media. or X X Only in audio CD and audio DVD* mode: press W when the main area is selected. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium. X Select a medium. X Selecting a track from the track list Select Audio Q Media. Select CD or DVD-A or MP3. X Select Track. or X Only in MP3 mode: press W when the main area is selected. The track list appears. The # dot indicates the current track. X Select a track. X X i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks in alphabetical order. Fast forward/rewind X X Select the main area. Slide and hold XVY until the desired position has been reached. Music search* You can use the following selection criteria to search music: RCurrent track list RFolder * optional Z COMAND To stop playback: select Audio Q Media Q DVD-A Q(twice) ±. X To restart playback: select Audio Q Media Q DVD-A Q M. Playback starts from the start of the DVD. X 87 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 88 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 88 RKeyword search RPlaylist RArtists RAlbums RTracks COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:02; WK If this is the case, COMAND will display the available data such as artist, album and track name in the relevant displays and lists. If COMAND accesses the Gracenote® Media Database when reading an audio CD, you see the following information: RGenres RComposers RYear X Select Audio Q Search. The selection criteria list appears. Gracenote® Media Database* i This function is only available in audio CD mode and during operation with the installed hard disk. There is a version of Gracenote®'s music identification technology (Emeryville, California, USA) on the hard disk. You will recognise this by the logo which can be seen in the bottom right-hand corner of certain audio displays. Adjusting the audio format i You can only set the audio format in audio DVD mode*. The number of audio formats available depends on the DVD. X Select Audio Q Media Q DVD-A Q Group. i The Group menu item cannot be selected if only one audio format is stored on the DVD. Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND uses the information contained therein to display the artist, album and track name. If the audio CD does not contain any CD text information, COMAND can use the Gracenote® Media Database to recognise unknown audio titles when running in audio CD mode. The prerequisites for this are that the relevant information be stored in the Gracenote® Media Database and that the "Read CD database" function is activated. The list of available audio formats appears. The # dot indicates the format currently selected. X To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To select the setting: press W. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:02; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 89 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 nect and in the "Operating with Media Interface*" section. Playback options The following options are available to you: track sequence: you will hear the tracks in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). RRandom media: you will hear the tracks in random order (e.g. tracks 3, 8, 5 etc.). i For operation of the external audio source, please see the corresponding operating instructions. Audio/video AUX at the rear seat* COMAND RNormal RRandom track list (only in MP3 mode): you will hear the tracks in the active folder and any subfolders in a random order. To select an option: select Audio. Select CD or DVD-A or MP3. The options list appears. A # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal track sequence, you will see a corresponding display in the main area. X X i The Normal track sequence option is automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off. Audio/video AUX* : V video signal jack ; R right-hand audio signal jack = L left-hand audio signal jack To connect external audio equipment: insert both plug connectors into jacks ; and =. X To connect external video equipment: insert the plug connector into jack :. X Audio/video AUX* at the head restraint You will find connections for external audio/ video sources (AUX): Rin the glove compartment12 (COMAND) Ron the CD/DVD drive* at the rear seat Rat the head restraints* If COMAND is equipped with Media Interface*, the connection is made using the audio cable set provided. The audio cable set replaces the AUX audio connection. i You can find more information on the Internet at www.mercedes-benz.com/con- 12 Please : Socket for corded headphones ; V video signal jack consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information. * optional 89 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 90 Version: 2.11.7.7 Audio CD/audio DVD* and MP3 90 = L left-hand audio signal jack ? R right-hand audio signal jack To connect external audio equipment: insert both plug connectors into jacks = and ?. X To connect external video equipment: insert the plug connector into jack ;. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:03; WK Switching to audio AUX mode (Rear Seat Entertainment System*) To select a main function: select AUX. Press the ! button on the remote control. X Select Source. X Select the desired source. X X Switching to audio AUX mode (COMAND) Select Audio Q Audio Q Aux. The audio AUX menu appears. You will hear the external audio source medium if it is connected and switched to playback. You can set the following in audio AUX mode: X Rvolume (Y Rbalance Rtreble page 68) and fader (Y page 68) and bass (Y page 68) Rsurround sound* (Y page 69) Switching to video AUX mode (Rear Seat Entertainment System*) To select a main function: select AUX. Press the ! button on the remote control. X Select Source. X Select the desired source. X To switch from full screen to the menu system: press the ! button on the remote control. X X Picture settings: select AUX. A list appears. X Proceed as described in the "Picture settings" section (Y page 101). X Switching to video AUX mode* (COMAND) X Select VideoQAux. The video AUX menu appears. You will hear and see the content of the external video source if this is connected and switched to playback. i Please see the corresponding operating instructions for how to operate the external video source. You can set the following in video AUX mode: RBrightness, (Y page 95) RPicture format (Y page 95) RVolume (Y RBalance RTreble Contrast and Colour page 68) and Fader (Y page 68) and Bass (Y page 68) RSurround sound* (Y page 69) Rear compartment* COMAND and the Rear Seat Entertainment System* are virtually independent of each other when operated at the same time. However, there can be a conflict in some menus if the two systems are used by several users. These conflicts can occur between the two rear screens as well as between COMAND and the Rear Seat Entertainment System*. CD / DVD drive If the CD / DVD drive is being used for both screens simultaneously, selecting certain menus or settings on one of the screens also affects the other screen. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:03; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 91 Version: 2.11.7.7 Video DVD functions Rchanging playback options Rselecting a track Rusing the play, pause and stop functions Rscanning or skipping forwards and back Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating within it Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera Rcalling up interactive DVD content angle The following functions affect only one screen: Radjusting audio, video and screen settings Rswitching between full-screen, the menu system and the navigation menu TV mode* The same TV channel is shown on all screens. If the channel is changed on one of the rear screens or on COMAND, it will be changed on all screens. Switching between main functions tings memory is reset to the original state for both screens. Simultaneous use of COMAND and the Rear Seat Entertainment System* Transferring audio output from the Rear Seat Entertainment System to the front passenger You can switch the audio output from the CD/ DVD drive in the Rear Seat Entertainment System* to the front passenger's headphones. The volume is adjusted on the headphones. If the "Disc" main function is running on one of the rear screens, the audio output is transmitted to COMAND. If the "Disc" main function is not running on either of the rear screens, no audio output is transmitted to COMAND. X Select Active source from rear in COMAND. Transferring audio output from COMAND to the Rear Seat Entertainment System X X Select Audio QRear in COMAND. Switch to COMAND in the rear compartment. When you exit a main function, the current setting is stored. If you call up this main function again later, there are two possibilities: Video DVD functions RThe main function is already running on the Automatic picture shutoff other screen. RThe main function is not running on the other screen. In the first case, the main function appears as it is already on the other screen. In the second case, the setting appears on the screen as it was when you last exited the main function. Loading and removing CD/DVDs When you load or eject a CD / DVD, this is only displayed on the screen where the main function Disc is selected. The current set* optional The picture automatically switches off on the driver's side if the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 6 km/h when in video DVD mode. The following message appears in the display: As soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, the picture switches back on again. Notes about handling DVDs There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, disc writing Z COMAND The following functions affect both screens: 91 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 92 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 92 Version: 2.11.7.7 Video DVD functions software and writers available. This variety means that Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs, COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:03; WK as they could peel off and damage COMAND. Stickers can also cause the disc to bend, which can result in read errors and disc recognition problems. COMAND is designed to hold discs which comply with the EN 60908 standard. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage COMAND. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. ROnly hold discs by the edge. RHandle errors. discs carefully to prevent reading RAvoid getting scratches, fingerprints and dust on discs. RClean discs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Do not wipe them with a circular motion, but only in straight lines from the centre outwards. RTo label discs, only use a pen designed for such a purpose. RPlace discs back in their cases after use. RProtect discs from heat and direct sunlight. DVD playback conditions It is possible to buy video DVDs which do not conform to the current standard. Such DVDs may have picture, sound or other playback problems. COMAND can play back video DVDs produced according to the following standards: Rregion RPAL code 2 or region code 0 or NTSC TV standard You will generally find the relevant details either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case. COMAND is set to region code 2 at the factory. This setting can be changed a maximum of five times by a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. This will allow you to play video DVDs with a different region code, provided that they are produced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC TV standard. Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions will be temporarily blocked or may not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions or actions, you will see the K symbol in the display. Inserting and ejecting DVDs X Proceed as described in the "Inserting CDs and DVDs" section (Y page 83). Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:03; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 93 Version: 2.11.7.7 Video DVD functions 93 DVD-V II/M M ¯ Changer (for DVD changer* only) Sound DVD functions Pauses playback II Stops playback ¯ Media selection Treble Brightness Continues playback M Bass Contrast Balance/fader Colour Surround sound* 16:9 optimised 4:3 Widescreen Active source to rear compartment Rear compartment off Switching to video DVD mode X Insert a DVD. or X Select Video Q DVD-Video. or Hiding or showing the control menu To show: slide ZVÆ. X To hide: slide ZVÆ. or X Wait for approximately eight seconds. X Press the R function button once or twice. The number of times you have to press the R function button depends on the operating mode currently selected. The function button takes you directly to the previously set disc mode (audio CD, audio DVD*, MP3 CD or video DVD). X * optional Z COMAND Overview of the video DVD menu Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:04; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 94 Version: 2.11.7.7 Video DVD functions 94 Fast forward or rewind COMAND X In full-screen mode or when the control menu is activated: slide and hold XVY until the desired position has been reached. Selecting DVD media Select Video Q DVD-Video. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select Media. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium. X Select a medium. COMAND changes the medium. X X Control menu displayed : Disc type ; Current track = Current scene ? Track time A To show the menu system Hiding/showing the menu system To show: press W. X To hide: press W when the main area is selected. X Menu system displayed : Video DVD options Stop function Select Video Q DVD-Video. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X To interrupt playback: select ¯. The II display changes to M. X To resume playback: select M. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. X To stop playback: select ¯ again while playback is interrupted. or X Select ¯ twice in quick succession during playback. X To restart playback: select M. Playback restarts from the beginning. X X ; Pause function = Stop function ? Full-screen function A Media selection B Sound settings Pause function X X Select Video Q DVD-Video. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:04; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 95 Version: 2.11.7.7 Video DVD functions Selecting a scene/chapter X To skip forwards/back: slide XVY or turn cVd. or X Press the 9 or : on the multi-function steering wheel. Selecting a film/track i This function is only available if the DVD is divided into several films/tracks. Select Video Q DVD-Video. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select DVD-V Q DVD functions Q Title selection. A menu appears. X Select a film/track. X X Picture settings Adjusting the brightness, contrast or colour Select Video Q DVD-Video. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select DVD-V Q Brightness or Con‐ trast or Colour. X To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X X Changing the picture format Select Video Q DVD-Video. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select DVD-V. The DVD-V menu appears. The # dot in front of the 16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Wide‐ screen menu item indicates the format currently set. X To change the format: slide ÆVÆ or turn cVd until the desired format is selected. X To save the setting: press W. X DVD menu The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. Calling up the DVD menu Select Video Q DVD-Video. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select DVD-V Q DVD functions Q Menu. The DVD menu appears. X X Selecting menu items in the DVD menu Slide ZVÆ or XVY. X To confirm your selection: press W. The menu appears. X Z COMAND To pause playback: select II. The II display changes to M. X To resume playback: select M. X 95 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 96 Version: 2.11.7.7 Video DVD functions 96 X To confirm the selection again: choose Select. COMAND implements the action represented by the selected menu item in the DVD menu. i Depending on the DVD, the Play menu COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:04; WK item may not function at all or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. Stopping a film or skipping to the beginning or end of a scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. The menu appears. i Depending on the DVD, the Go up menu item or the back button may not function in general or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. Going back to the movie X Press the % button repeatedly until you see the film. or X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu. or X X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. Select Back (to the movie) from the menu. i Depending on the DVD, the Back (to the movie) menu item or the back button may not have a function. Setting the language and audio format To stop a film: select Stop : from the menu. X To skip to the end of a scene: select F ; from the menu. X To skip to the beginning of a scene: select = E from the menu. X i Depending on the DVD, the ; and = menu items may not function at all or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Press the % button. or X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu. or Select any menu item from the DVD menu. X Select Go up from the menu. X This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the DVD menu language, the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is determined by the DVD content. It is possible that the settings may also be accessed in the DVD menu (Y page 95). X Select Video Q DVD-Video. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select DVD-V Q DVD functions. X Select Menu language or Audio lan‐ guage. Both of these will call up a menu. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected language. X To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:04; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 97 Version: 2.11.7.7 TV* X X To save the setting: press W. To exit the menu: slide XVY. 97 digital TV channels conforming to the DVB-T standard13. These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of the DVD. It is possible that the settings may also be accessed in the DVD menu (Y page 95). X Select Video Q DVD-Video. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 94). X Select DVD-V Q DVD functions. X Select Subtitles or Camera angle. Both of these will call up a menu. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the current setting. X To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. Interactive content DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD. X To select an action: slide ZVÆ or XVY. X To trigger an action: press W. If the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 6 km/h, the picture and teletext in TV mode on the driver's side automatically switch off. The following message appears in the display: In order not to distract the driver, the picture is faded out while the vehicle is in motion. As soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, the picture switches back on again. Switching off the picture and sound The constantly changing reception conditions while the vehicle is in motion can interrupt the signal. If the reception is too poor, COMAND may switch off the sound and freeze or hide the picture. In this case, you will see the respective symbol in the display. TV menu overview The following menus are available: RTV Q Station, Save station, Channel input, Brightness, Contrast, Colour, Auto, 16:9 optimised, 4:3, Widescreen, Channel fix, TV standard, Audio 1, Audio 2 RMemory Q Autostore, Channel preset list RInfo Q Information on current programme (digital stations only) RTeletext Q Switch on teletext RSound Q Trebles, basses, balance/fader, surround sound* TV* General notes The TV tuner is designed to receive analogue terrestrial TV channels (all standards) and 13 DVB-T Switching to TV mode X Select Video Q TV. may not be available in some countries, or may not be available in all areas. * optional Z COMAND Automatic picture shutoff Subtitles and camera angle Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:05; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 98 Version: 2.11.7.7 TV* 98 Hiding or showing the control menu X X To show: slide ZVÆ. To hide: slide ZVÆ. or Wait for approximately eight seconds. COMAND X Menu system displayed : Main area ; Sound settings = To switch on teletext ? Information on the current programme Control menu displayed : Selected TV channel (only for digital TV channels) A Channel preset list B TV options ; Current programme (digital TV receiver only) = Next station ? Current programme on the next TV chan- nel in the list (digital TV receiver only) A To show the menu system B Current programme on the previous TV channel in the list (digital TV receiver only) C Previous TV channel in the list Hiding/showing the menu system To show: press W. X To hide: press W when the main area is selected. X Selecting TV channels Selecting channels from the control menu If the menu system is hidden (Y page 98), slide XVY or turn cVd. The navigation menu appears and COMAND skips to the previous or next channel in the channel list. You can also select the station using the 9 or : button on the multi-function steering wheel. X To make a selection from the list of all channels: press and hold the 9 or : button. X To make a selection from the list of stored channels: briefly press the 9 or : button. X Selecting channels via the channel presets X X Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:05; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 99 Version: 2.11.7.7 TV* The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel. A number in front of the list entry indicates the preset position in the channel preset memory. X Selecting channels from the channel list As soon as the vehicle or COMAND is in operation, the background reception function of the TV tuner lists the channels that can currently be received in the channel list. The channel list contains the following information, if it is transmitted and reception is adequate: Rthe names of the channels that can be received Rthe names of the current programmes (dig- ital channels only) Rtime information for the current programmes (digital channels only) Rpreview of the following programmes (digital channels only) i The background reception function Selecting channels by entering the channel and programme number i Several programmes can be transmitted on one channel with digital TV. You can therefore enter a channel and the desired programme on this channel. Only one programme can be sent on a channel with analogue TV. The programme entry function therefore has no effect. Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV Q Channel entry. X Select a number to enter the channel or programme. X To select a higher or lower number: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To select the next number: slide XVY. X To confirm the entry: press W. X X i The TV tuner always sets the channel and the programme that you have entered. Therefore, you can also set channels and programmes that cannot currently be received. requires a certain amount of time to update this information. COMAND can only display the information if the TV channels are transmitting it and if the reception conditions are adequate. Select Video Q TV. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV Q Channel list. The station list appears. It is sorted alphabetically and contains: X Ranalogue TV channels (all standards) Rdigital TV channels (DVB-T standard) Rdigital radio stations (DVB-T standard) * optional Storing TV channels There are twenty preset positions. Storing channels manually Calling up the preset memory display and selecting a preset X X Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). Z COMAND Select TV Q Presets. The channel preset list appears. The # dot in front of a preset position indicates that the currently selected channel is stored there. X Select the channel preset and briefly press W. 99 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 100 Version: 2.11.7.7 TV* 100 X Select TV Q Save channel. or Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select Info. If the service is provided by the current TV channel, you will see a field containing information about the programme. X X Select Presets. Both of these will bring up a selection list. The # dot in front of a preset position indicates that the currently selected channel is stored there. X To select a preset position: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:05; WK Storing the channel to the selected preset position X If you have called up the channel preset display via the Save channel menu item, press W briefly. or X If you have called up the channel preset display via the Presets menu item, press and hold W until a tone sounds. The channel is stored. i It may take a few seconds for the information to appear. X To scroll the display: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. Displaying the current programme or programme preview i This function is only available on digital TV channels. Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV Q Channel list. The channel list appears. It shows the current programme on the digital TV channels which have adequate reception. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel. X X Storing using Autostore This function automatically stores channels which can be received in order of their reception quality. Any channels stored manually in the preset memory will be lost. X Select Video Q TV. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select Presets Q Autostore. or X Select TV Q Save channel Q Autos‐ tore. COMAND searches for channels. The available channels are automatically stored in the preset positions. : TV channel ; To display the programme preview = Current programme Information about the current programme i This function is only available on digital TV channels. ? Graphic display of the elapsed pro- gramme time X To display the programme preview: select Display programme preview. The channel list indicates the next programme on the channels in the list. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:06; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 101 Version: 2.11.7.7 TV* 101 To change the format: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired format is selected. X To save the format: press W. X : TV channel ; To display the current programme = Next programme ? Start and end times of the programme To display the current programme: select Display current programme. X To close the display: slide XVY. X Picture settings Brightness, contrast or colour Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV Q Brightness or Contrast or Colour. X To change the setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X X Changing the picture format Select Video Q TV. Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV. The TV menu appears. The # dot in front of the Auto, 16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Widescreen menu item indicates the format currently set. If you have switched Auto off, you can only switch between the 16:9 and 4:3 formats. X X * optional Fixing the frequency The TV tuner may automatically switch to an alternative channel with the same programme content but better reception, depending on reception quality. You can use Channel fix to prevent this channel switching. This is useful, for example, when there is a noticeable time offset between the frequencies or if there is interference on a frequency. X Select Video Q TV. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV Q Channel fix. You have switched the function on or off. A tick appears next to Channel fix when the function is switched on. You will also see the FIX display in the main area. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. Setting the reception region The correct reception region setting ensures that analogue TV channels can be received with the usual quality and functionality. COMAND is set to the correct reception region at the factory. If you are driving your vehicle in a different country or region, you should set COMAND accordingly. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can help you to select the correct reception region if necessary. X Select Video Q TV. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X Select TV Q TV standard. The reception region list appears. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected country. Z COMAND Basic TV settings Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 102 Version: 2.11.7.7 MUSIC REGISTER* 102 To select the reception region: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired region is selected. X To save the selection: press W. A message appears to inform you that if the wrong country is set, correct reception will not be possible. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, COMAND will switch to the country setting you have selected. If you select No, the country list will appear again. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:06; WK Teletext Switching teletext on or off i Teletext can only be received if there is no interference in the picture reception. The teletext function receives all teletext pages, with the exception of subpages, for the channel currently set and saves them in the system memory. When you set a different channel, the memory is cleared and refilled. Select Video Q TV. X Display the menu system if necessary (Y page 98). X X X To switch on: select Teletext. To switch off: press the % back button. Selecting a teletext page To enter a page number directly: select a number button. X To select a higher or lower number: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X Dynamic teletext page A dynamic teletext page consists of several subpages. The display automatically changes to the next page after a certain time. MUSIC REGISTER* i This function is available if COMAND is equipped with an integrated hard disk. You can store music files in MP3 or WMA format in the MUSIC REGISTER. The memory has a capacity of approximately 7 GB. ! Retain the original music files in a secure location. An error in COMAND might result in the loss of the music files stored in the MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. Menu overview MUSIC REGISTER Search Media Sound Normal track sequence Search functions Media selection via media list Treble Random media Bass Random track list Balance/fader Copying music files Surround sound* Deleting all music files Memory space info * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:06; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 103 Version: 2.11.7.7 MUSIC REGISTER* MUSIC REGISTER Search Media 103 Sound Displaying title information TA (traffic announcement) COMAND Active source to rear compartment* Rear compartment off* Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER From another main mode Select Audio. The system changes to the last active audio mode. X Select Audio again. The Audio menu appears. X X Select MUSIC REGISTER. i If Music Register was the last mode, you only need to select Audio. From audio mode X Select Audio. The Audio menu appears. Select MUSIC REGISTER. MUSIC REGISTER is loaded. The MUSIC REGISTER display appears. There are no music files: You see a message to this effect. X You first need to copy music files to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 103). There are music files: You hear the first track in the first folder, or playback begins at the last point listened to. X Example display: MUSIC REGISTER : Type of data medium: MUSIC REGISTER ; Track number = Track name ? Track time A Visual time and track display B Current playback settings (no symbol for "Normal track sequence") C Sound settings D Media selection E Current folder F Search functions G Data carrier position in the media list H To call up the MUSIC REGISTER menu Copying music data to the MUSIC REGISTER You can copy music files from discs in the DVD changer* or the single DVD drive, or * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:06; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 104 Version: 2.11.7.7 MUSIC REGISTER* 104 from the memory card, as long as they are in MP3 and/or WMA format. Starting the copying process i While copying, several functions will not be available. If this is ever the case, you will see a message to this effect. COMAND Selecting a data carrier X Select MUSIC REGISTERQCopy music files. The media list appears. A data carrier from which files can be copied is selected automatically. : To copy from a memory card ; To copy to the MUSIC REGISTER = Memory requirement; see "Calling up memory space info" (Y page 105) ? To start the copying process A Name of the data carrier from which data is being copied and storage location B To cancel copying of music files C Data carrier position in the media list Select Start. Copying begins. The progress bar indicates the status of the copying procedure. X To exit without copying music files: select Back. X To select the destination folder: scroll up or down and select the respective folder. Once copying is complete, you hear the first track on the album copied. The MUSIC REGISTER display appears. Now you can copy more music files to the MUSIC REGISTER. X : Data carrier selected X To select a data carrier: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd and confirm with W. The data carrier is loaded. Selecting music files Select All music files. This function copies all music files on the selected data carrier. The symbol in front of All music files is filled in. X Select Next. The copying menu appears. X ! Under no circumstances should you remove the memory card while you are copying data from it. This will generate unusable data in the MUSIC REGISTER. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:07; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 105 Version: 2.11.7.7 MUSIC REGISTER* Roccupied Rcontent 105 memory (folders, tracks) You can view the MUSIC REGISTER contents, modify data and delete it. Calling up the MUSIC REGISTER : Progress bar i It may take some time for the music to be copied, depending on the amount of data. The time required may vary depending on the data source. If there is not enough memory space, you will see a message to this effect. X X Select Rename/delete files. or X Press W when the display/selection window is active. You see the contents of the current folder. To cancel copying: select Cancel. Music files up until the point of cancellation are stored in the MUSIC REGISTER. Deleting all music files This function deletes all music files from the MUSIC REGISTER. ! The deletion procedure may take several minutes. In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND during this time. X Select MUSIC REGISTERQDelete all music files. A prompt appears, asking whether the entry should be deleted. Calling up memory space info X Select MUSIC REGISTERQMemory info. You see a window with details about: Rstorage capacity Ravailable * optional memory : Folder selection symbol ; Icon for music file = Current folder X To select one folder higher: select the U symbol. The display changes to the next folder up. Changing the folder/track name Select Rename/delete files. To select a folder/track: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X Select Options Q Change. X Enter a name for the folder/track in the entry line. X To store changes: select ¬. X X Z COMAND Folder functions Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 106 Version: 2.11.7.7 Media Interface* mode 106 Deleting folders/tracks Media Interface* mode Select Rename/delete files. X To select a folder/track: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X Select Options Q Delete. A query appears. Information on operating with Media Interface X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:07; WK Playback options Connection options i Stow the equipment in a secure location. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz connecting cables. The following options are available to you: You can connect the following data carriers to COMAND via the Media Interface: RNormal RiPod®14 track sequence You will hear the tracks in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). RRandom media The tracks in the currently active medium are played in random order. RRandom track list The tracks in the currently active track list are played in random order. To select options: switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 103). X Select MUSIC REGISTER. The options list appears. A # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option. The option is switched on. For all options except "Normal track sequence", you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. See example of display (Y page 103), item B. X i The "Normal track sequence" option is automatically selected when you change the medium you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off. RUSB devices For more details and a comprehensive list of supported devices, please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or visit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect and proceed as described under "Media Interface". Supported iPod® variants The following are examples of supported iPod® variants: RiPod® mini RiPod® nano RiPod® classic RiPod® touch Supported USB devices The following USB devices are supported: RUSB sticks (flash memory) RUSB hard drives (1-inch, 1.8-inch and 2.5inch drives) with a starting/continuous current of up to 800 mA (a separate power supply may be necessary) Rcertain MP3 players i The Media Interface supports USB stor- age media of USB Device Subclass 6. Information concerning USB Device Subclass 6 14 iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:07; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 107 Version: 2.11.7.7 Media Interface* mode i Never leave external devices in the vehi- cle as extreme temperatures (e.g. if subjected to direct sunlight or at extremely low outside temperatures) may prevent them from functioning correctly (see separate operating instructions of the respective device). Mercedes-Benz does not take responsibility for any damage to external devices. Supported data formats (USB devices) The following data types are supported: RMP3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) RWMA: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) Notes on USB devices RAvoid storing data other than music data on the USB device so that the start-up time is not extended unnecessarily. RUp to eight directory levels with up to 1,000 tracks are supported. RDo not use a USB extension cable or adapter. These may impair functionality. RA background search of the USB device is performed and any playlists found are provided in a separate category in addition to the folders. Initialisation of larger USB mass storage devices containing a high number of files can take up to several minutes. i Files protected with DRM (Digital Rights Management) are not supported by the Media Interface. Connecting external devices Device-specific adapter cables are needed to connect external equipment to the Media Interface. These cables are included in the Media Interface scope of delivery. You will find the connection sockets in the glove compartment. Never connect more than one device at a time. You will otherwise not be able to play back from the external device. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information. 15 Not : Socket for 3.5-mm phone jack, e.g. for MP3 players ; iPod socket, to connect an iPod® = USB socket for connecting a USB device ? Example of device (iPod®) Connect the external equipment using connection :, ; or =. COMAND activates the device15. If you remove a device, the No device con‐ nected message appears. X i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should not be simultaneously operated via the Media Interface and the remote control (e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) as this may produce unpredictable results. i Connecting an iPod or MP3 player which has been excessively discharged can result in an extended initialisation period. for AUX devices. * optional Z COMAND is available from the equipment manufacturer. 107 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:08; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 108 Version: 2.11.7.7 Media Interface* mode 108 i Error messages appear while the device is being activated if: RCOMAND does not support the device connected. X Confirm your entry with W. COMAND activates the connected device. You will see a message to this effect. The basic display then appears. connected device consumes too much power. COMAND Rthe Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty. Where necessary, consult a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Switching to Media Interface operation i In extreme cases, starting up individual functions can take up to several minutes, depending on the external device and its content (e.g. video podcasts). Only use the original software to store data on your iPod® and MP3 player. Otherwise, some or all functions may not be available. From another main mode X Press the R function button. COMAND switches on the previous disc operating mode. i If you previously selected operation with Media Interface, it will now be switched on. X Select Media. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium being played. i If no device is connected, you will see the Media Interface entry instead of a device name. If COMAND does not support the device connected, the Device incompatible message appears. The device is shown as Not available in the media list. If two devices are connected, you will see this message: Please make sure that only one device is connected. Example display: iPod mode : Type of data medium ; Track number = Track name ? Visual time display A Track time B Visual track display C Current playback settings (no icon for "Normal track sequence") D Sound settings E Media list F Album name (if supplied) G Categories, playlists and/or folders H Artist (if supplied) I Playback options i Type of data medium : connected is indicated by the corresponding icon for iPod®, MP3 player or USB mass storage device. i If the device connected does not contain any playable tracks, a message appears to this effect. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:08; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 109 Version: 2.11.7.7 Media Interface* mode Connect an external device (Y page 107). COMAND activates the device. The basic display then appears. X or Selecting music files i COMAND displays the data stored on the iPod®, MP3 player or USB mass storage device according to the filing structure used in the respective medium. Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: slide XVY or turn cVd. or Press the 9 or : button on the multifunction steering wheel. i Skipping forward skips to the next track. Skipping backwards skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has been playing for more than eight seconds. If the track has been playing for less than eight seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track. If you have selected a playback option other than Normal track sequence, the track sequence is random. Selecting using the number keypad X X If desired, enter further digits. X To confirm your entry: press W. or X Select Audio Q Media Interface. X X X To make an entry: press the U button. An input menu appears. The number of characters available for input depends on the number of stored tracks. To enter a track number: press a number key, such as q. The digit is entered in the first position in the input line. i COMAND will ignore and not display an invalid digit. * optional Press and hold the number key for the last number of the desired track number. The selected track is played. Fast forward/rewind X If the display/selection window is active: slide XVY and hold until you reach the desired position. i On an iPod®, the fast rewind function can only be used within the currently playing track. Selecting a category/playlist/folder iPod® and selected MP3 players You can select tracks for an iPod® and MP3 player according to categories and folders. Categories can include: RCurrent track list RPlaylists RArtists RAlbums RTracks RPodcasts RGenres RComposers RAudiobooks i Some playback categories contain the All entry. When this entry has been selected, the entire content of the category selected will be played. USB devices For USB mass storage devices, you can select folders and also playlists (if available). When playing back from playlists, COMAND can Z COMAND From audio mode 109 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 110 Version: 2.11.7.7 Media Interface* mode 110 COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:08; WK also display the respective album and artist name (metadata), if these have been uploaded to the system. Playlists are indicated in the display by a special icon. When you open the playlist, the corresponding tracks are opened and playback begins when you select a track. For USB mass storage devices, you can choose to display the metadata contained in the tags of the encoded music data, or to display the file and directory names during playback. X To display album and artist name: select Media Interface QDisplay Meta‐ data. X To select a category/folder: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd and confirm with W. You will see the content of the selected category or selected folder. i If the data still has to be read from the connected device, you will see the Please wait... message. X If necessary, repeat this operating step until the tracks in the desired folder/album appear. Selecting a category and opening a folder X To open a category list/folder: press W when the display/selection window is active. or X Select Music. You will see the available categories or the folder content (e.g. other folders). i The Music menu item is not available until the device has been activated. Example of display: current track list : Icon for next folder up ; Current category = Track icon ? Current track X To select a track: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd and confirm with W. The track is played. X To select one folder higher: select U and confirm. i The U icon is always listed right at the top of the folder in question. Example of display: category list : Device icon and device name, or the cat- egory selected ; Selectable categories * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:08; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 111 Version: 2.11.7.7 Media Interface* mode X Select a category or folder. Press W for longer than two seconds. The content of the category or folder selected is played in accordance with the playback option (Y page 111) selected. Alphabetical track selection iPod® and MP3 player i This function is available for alphabetically sorted categories and folders. X Select a category, e.g. Artists. The available artists appear. X Press the corresponding number key once or repeatedly to select the initial letter of the desired artist. For example, to select an artist whose name begins with "C", press the l number key three times. You see the available letters at the bottom edge of the display. i If there is no entry beginning with the letter entered, the last entry beginning with the previous letter is shown at the top of the list. Selecting an active partition (for USB mass storage devices only) You can select this function for USB mass storage devices when the storage device is partitioned. Up to four partitions (primary or logical and FAT-formatted) are supported. i The Windows formatting program supports FAT partitions of up to 32 GB as standard. X Playback options The following options are available to you: RNormal track sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. sorted by number or by title). RRandom tracks All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. i For an iPod® and MP3 player, the quality of the search results is highly dependent on the version and language variant of the software (e.g. iTunes® version) used to populate the device. RRandom categories or Random folder (in the case of USB devices when Folder has been selected): The tracks in the currently active category or folder, including any sub-folders, are played in random order. USB mass storage devices i This function is available for alphabeti- cally sorted directories. This function is not available for playlists, for example. X In a directory, press the appropriate number key once or several times to select the first letter of the artist's name (e.g. for an * optional Select Media Interface Q Select active partition. X To select a playback option: select Media Interface in the basic display. The options list appears. A # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option. Z COMAND artist beginning with the letter "C", press number key l three times). You see the available letters at the bottom edge of the display. If the directory only contains folders, COMAND searches for folders. Playing the content of a category or folder X 111 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 112 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 112 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* Telephone* Safety notes G Risk of accident COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:08; WK Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so when the traffic situation allows. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and, thereby, jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you must only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate, reflection-free, exterior aerial. G Risk of accident For reasons of safety, only use hands-free mode if you use the telephone when driving. If you use hands-free mode to make a call, you must continue to drive carefully, close all the windows and prevent any disruptive noises. If your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony*, you can buy brackets* for specific mobile phones at your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and have them installed in the armrest. Your mobile phone battery* is charged in the bracket and a connection is made to the vehicle's aerial. With a suitable mobile telephone, the following functions are available when using convenience telephony*: Rhands-free Rphone Rtext system book message (SMS) i If your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony*, you can also connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone to COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface. You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones and about connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with COMAND from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet (www.mercedes-benz.com). Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in motion A call may be disconnected if: General notes Bluetooth® interface and convenience telephony* COMAND offers you dual-level telephone functions. The basic set-up offers you Bluetooth® interface telephony when used with a Bluetooth®capable mobile phone. With suitable mobile phones, the Bluetooth® interface can be used for the following functions: Rhands-free Rphone system book Rthere is insufficient GSM network coverage in certain areas. Ryou move from one GSM transmitter/ receiver area (GSM cell) into another and no channels are free. Operating options You can operate the phone with the following devices: Rmobile phone keypad RCOMAND/telephone RCOMAND keypad controller Rmulti-function steering wheel * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:09; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 113 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* Rrear-compartment handset* Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions and illustrations in this section refer to COMAND and the telephone keypad. This also means that to carry out the functions described here, you must always be in the "Telephone" menu. The fastest way to access the "Telephone" menu is to press the S function button. Operation using LINGUATRONIC* and handsets in the rear compartment* is described in the respective separate operating instructions. The telephone automatically tries to log into a network. If no network is available, you will not be able to make a "112" emergency call. If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Service message will appear for a short while. RIf you remove the ignition key from the igni- tion lock during an active conversation in hands-free mode, the conversation may be continued for up to 30 minutes. At this point, it will be interrupted. You can prevent this as follows: Bluetooth® interface telephony: switch the mobile phone to "Private mode" before switching off COMAND; see mobile phone operating instructions. X Convenience telephony*: remove the phone from its bracket before switching off COMAND*. X Display of telephone numbers and names COMAND can display the telephone number and the name of the caller, e.g. for an incoming call and also in other menus or displays. For the telephone number to be displayed, the caller must send their telephone number. This is also the case for name displays. For this, the telephone number and the name of the caller must be stored in the phone book. Function restrictions You will not be able to use the telephone in the following situations: Rwhen the mobile phone is not switched on the "Bluetooth®" function on COMAND or, when telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface, on the mobile phone, is switched off Rwhen Rwhen using convenience telephony* and the mobile phone is not yet connected to the bracket* X Connect the mobile phone (Y page 119). Rwhen the mobile phone is not yet connected to a network * optional If you wish to switch off COMAND during an active conversation in hands-free mode, the following message will appear: "You cannot switch off COMAND until the phone call has been completed." "999" or "112" emergency call The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to make a "112" emergency call: Rthe mobile phone must be switched on. Ra network must be available. Ra valid SIM card must be in the phone (not necessary in all mobile phone networks). If you cannot make an emergency call, you must arrange rescue measures yourself. The "112" emergency call number is a public service. Any misuse is punishable by law. Mercedes-Benz Contact Mercedes-Benz Contact can help you whenever you have questions relating to your vehicle or when you need help in the event of a breakdown. Z COMAND RLinguatronic* 113 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 114 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 114 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* The function will allow you to place a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. All important vehicle data is transferred in order to ensure optimum support. The following data is transmitted: Rthe vehicle identification number COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:09; WK Rthe mileage Rthe vehicle's location You can make use of this function with an operational mobile phone connected to COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface or convenience telephony*. ! Please note: Mercedes-Benz Contact is a service provided by Mercedes-Benz. In emergencies, it is vital that you first contact the standard national emergency services number. i Currently (as at June 2009) this service is available in the following European countries: RBelgium RGermany RFrance RUnited You will find additional information on Mercedes Benz Contact in your Service Booklet. Switching the telephone on/off You can only switch the telephone on and off16 if convenience telephony* is activated. X To switch on: insert the mobile phone into the bracket when COMAND is switched on. or X Switch on the mobile phone – see mobile phone operating instructions. or X Select Telephone Q Telephone on. X To switch off: select Telephone Q Telephone off. or X Switch off the mobile phone – see mobile phone operating instructions. Telephone keypad Using the telephone keypad, you can: Kingdom RIreland REnter digits and special characters RReject, accept, connect and end calls RItaly RLuxembourg RNetherlands RAustria RPoland RSwitzerland RSlovakia RSpain RCzech Republic RHungary 16 This X X To enter characters: lift cover ;. Enter the characters using the buttons on telephone keypad :. function is only available if the mobile phone bracket supports it. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 115 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* i To select the * character, press the à button once. To select the + character, briefly press the à button twice. To delete individual characters: press the $ button. X To delete an entire word or number: press and hold the $ button until the entire word or number has been deleted. X Using the telephone via the Bluetooth® interface Bluetooth® technology is the standard for short-range wireless data transmission of up to approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth® can be used to exchange vCards or make calls using a headset or handset, for example. If your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony* and you would like to make calls using the Bluetooth® interface, be sure that your mobile phone is neither in the mobile phone bracket* nor connected to it*. This may result in a malfunction, depending on the type of mobile phone. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® X Select Vehicle Q System Q Blue‐ tooth Q Bluetooth activated. Mobile phone requirements For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones and about connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to COMAND from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet (www.mercedes-benz.com). To avoid malfunctions, the mobile phone's rechargeable battery must always be sufficiently charged. In preparation for telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface you should check the following items on your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions): RHands-Free Profile The mobile phone must support HandsFree Profile 1.0 or above. i Certain displays (e.g. the field strength display or the mobile phone network provider) appear depending on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile. RBluetooth® visibility On certain mobile phones, the device itself must be made "visible" for other devices, as well as activating the Bluetooth® function. RBluetooth® A tick appears when Bluetooth® is activated. * optional 115 device name Every Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth® device name. This device name is freely definable, but can be identical for all devices from the same manufacturer. It is a good idea to choose a personalised name by which you can identify your mobile phone clearly. Z COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:09; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:10; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 116 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 116 Connecting a mobile phone X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN, if necessary – see the mobile phone operating instructions. Activate the Bluetooth® functionality on the mobile phone – see the mobile phone operating instructions. Bluetooth® is activated on COMAND as standard. When the "Bluetooth®" function is switched off on COMAND, the following message appears: Bluetooth not activated in system settings. Switch on Bluetooth® manually on COMAND (Y page 115). COMAND X Registering (authorising) the mobile phone Before you use your mobile phone with COMAND for the first time, you must register (authorise) it. You can register more than one mobile phone. A connection is always established to the most recently connected mobile phone within range. If no connection can be made to the most recently connected mobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone which was connected before that one. If you authorise a new mobile phone, it will be automatically connected17. X Select Data/connectionsQBlue‐ tooth telephonesQ Update. COMAND looks for Bluetooth® devices within range and adds them to the Bluetooth® phone list. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth® devices within range and on the mobile phone characteristics (Hands-Free-Profile version, any "visibility" requirements). 17 This Example of display: Bluetooth® telephones list : Currently connected # and authorised mobile phone L ; Mobile phone not within range but previ- ously authorised (L symbol appears in grey) = Newly detected mobile phone in range, not yet authorised i If the Bluetooth® telephone list is already full, you will be asked to de-authorise a Bluetooth® device (Y page 118). If COMAND does not find your mobile phone, external authorisation (Y page 117) is necessary. X To authorise: select not yet authorised mobile phone = in the Bluetooth® telephones list and select OptionsQAuthorise. The passcode entry menu (detection, code) appears. function is available if it is supported by the mobile phone. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:10; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 117 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* Passcode input in COMAND You can enter the passcode in COMAND with the digits in the menu bar or with the telephone keypad. X Input via the menu bar: use the COMAND controller to highlight digits; confirm the selection. or X Input via the telephone keypad: press the respective buttons on the keypad. X To confirm: select ¬ in the menu bar. or X Select the z or ; button on the telephone keypad. X To delete the input: select F from the menu bar and press W. or X Select $ on the telephone keypad. Passcode input on the keypad If the Bluetooth® connection is successful, you will be prompted by the mobile phone to enter the passcode – see mobile phone operating instructions. X Enter the same passcode on the mobile phone that you entered in COMAND. i After entering the passcode, you may also need to enter a confirmation in your mobile phone. Check the display of your mobile phone. If the Authorisation procedure unsuc‐ cessful message appears on the COMAND display, you have either exceeded the allowed time or you have not * optional entered the passcode correctly. Repeat the procedure. The mobile phone is connected to COMAND (authorised). You can now phone using the COMAND hands-free system. External authorisation If COMAND does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. In this case, you can test if your mobile phone can find COMAND. COMAND's Bluetooth® device name is MB Bluetooth. X Select Data/connectionsQBlue‐ tooth telephones. X Go to Update and select Options QExternal authorisation. Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile phone – see mobile phone operating instructions. X Select MB Bluetooth on the mobile phone. X Input the passcode in COMAND when requested to and then enter it on the mobile phone (Y page 117). X Displaying details There is a display showing the details for each mobile phone in the Bluetooth® telephones list. X Select Data/connectionsQBlue‐ tooth telephones. X Select the mobile phone from the list and select Options QDetails. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth® name RBluetooth® address Ravailability Z COMAND The passcode is any one to sixteen-digit number combination which you can determine yourself. You must enter the same number combination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth® device to be authorised; see the Bluetooth® device operating instructions. It is a good idea to enter a passcode with at least four digits to ensure a secure Bluetooth® connection. 117 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 118 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 118 Rauthorisation RBluetooth® book) X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:10; WK class (e.g. telephone, note- To close the display showing the details: slide XVY. De-registering (de-authorising) a mobile phone Select Data/connectionsQBlue‐ tooth telephones. X Select the mobile phone from the list and select Options QDe-authorise. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to revoke authorisation for this device. X Select Yes. X mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the Bluetooth® telephones list (Y page 116). Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) If the mobile phone is ready for use, the following display appears: i Before reauthorising the mobile phone, also delete the MB Bluetooth device names from the Bluetooth® list on the mobile phone. Connecting another mobile phone If you have authorised several mobile phones, you can switch between the individual phones. i You can only switch to another authorised Example of display: telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) : Display of mobile phone network pro; = mobile phone if no phone call is active. ? Select Data/connectionsQBlue‐ tooth telephones. X Select the mobile phone from the Bluetooth® telephones list. X Confirm your selection. If the selected mobile phone is within Bluetooth® range and Bluetooth® is activated, a search is started and the phone is connected. Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connected A X 18 This B C vider18 Signal strength of mobile phone network Ä18 Receiver symbol ¡ (active) or ¢ (not active) To display COMAND phone book To display call lists Input speller with characters for entering telephone number Bluetooth® name of the currently connected mobile phone Bars ; display the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all the bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If all bars are empty, there is very poor or no reception at all. function is only visible if it is supported by the mobile phone. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:10; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 119 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 119 Data/connections Call lists Bluetooth® telephones Address book Importing contacts Deleting contacts Incoming calls Calls made Convenience telephony* Using a mobile phone For convenience telephony with COMAND, you require a mobile phone bracket* and a suitable mobile phone. For information on inserting the mobile phone bracket* into the armrest fixture, see the separate assembly instructions for the mobile phone bracket. X For information on switching the mobile phone on manually, see the separate mobile phone operating instructions. X Example Insert the mobile phone in the direction of the arrow into connector contact ;. X Let the mobile phone snap into place in the direction of arrow : in bracket =. X Connecting a mobile phone If the Bluetooth® interface is being used for telephony: switch to the "Telephone" menu, e.g. by pressing S. X Select TelephoneQData/connec‐ tionsQBluetooth tele‐ phonesQConvenience telephony. X Telephone basic menu for convenience telephony When the mobile phone is in the mobile phone bracket* and operational, the following display is shown: Example display: telephone basic menu, convenience telephony : Received text message (SMS) symbol 0 ; Mobile phone network provider = Signal strength of mobile phone network Ä ? Receiver symbol ¡ (active) or ¢ (not active) A To display COMAND phone book B To display call lists * optional Z COMAND Menu overview Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 120 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 120 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* C SMS menu D Input speller for entering telephone num- ber E Convenience telephony display COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:10; WK Bars = display the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all the bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If all bars are empty, there is very poor or no reception at all. Receiver symbol ? shows whether or not a call is in progress or is being currently connected. The 0 symbol is displayed if you have an unread text message. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message. The ú mail symbol is displayed when the text message memory is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one text message. The text message menu is available if this function is supported by the convenience telephone and bracket*. The text message inbox is not available until all text messages have been downloaded from the convenience telephone. The Text message menu is not displayed during telephone calls using the Bluetooth® interface. Menu overview Data/connections Text message (SMS) Call lists Bluetooth telephones Address book Importing contacts Deleting contacts Inbox New Drafts Outbox Incoming calls Dialled calls Changing between Bluetooth® and convenience telephony* If your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony*, you can switch between telephony types. If you want to use another mobile phone, you will first need to connect it (Y page 116). Switching telephony type during operation During operation, you can switch from one telephony type to another by connecting another mobile phone or by making a selection from the list. Switching telephony type when switching on By default, COMAND performs the following actions when it is switched on: Mobile phone is inserted in mobile phone bracket* COMAND starts convenience telephony*. If no mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket*, the following message appears: Telephone not inserted. This is followed by a prompt asking you whether you wish to switch to Bluetooth® telephony. If you confirm by selecting Yes, the Ready for Bluetooth telephony... message will appear. COMAND will search for the two mobile phones last connected via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile phones is found, the telephone basic menu for Bluetooth® telephony (Y page 118) * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:11; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 121 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* No mobile phone is inserted in mobile phone bracket* COMAND starts telephony via the Bluetooth® interface and searches for the last two mobile phones to have been connected via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile phones is found, the telephone basic menu for Bluetooth® telephony (Y page 118) appears. If neither of the two mobile phones is found, the Ready for Bluetooth telephony... message remains on the display. You now have to register your mobile phone (Y page 116). i The Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phone remains active until the next time COMAND is switched off if you do not connect a different mobile phone via the phone list. Select Options Q Reception volume or Transmission volume. i The Reception volume and Transmis‐ sion volume options only appear when the selected mobile phone is authorised. COMAND appears. If neither of the two mobile phones is found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐ ephony... message remains on the display. You now have to register your mobile phone (Y page 116). If there is a mobile phone in the bracket*, the telephone basic menu for convenience telephony* (Y page 119) appears. X To set the volume on the scale: slide ZVÆ and press W. Using the telephone Incoming call Reception and transmission volume The following information is valid for Bluetooth® interface telephony and convenience telephony*. Incorrect reception and transmission volume settings may result in serious impairment of speech quality. You can therefore optimise the settings. Find out about the optimum setting for your mobile phone from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at www.mercedes-benz.com. X Select Data/connectionsQBlue‐ tooth telephones. X Once the desired mobile phone has been selected: * optional 121 X To accept: select Accept. or X Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad or the multi-function steering wheel. or X Accept via LINGUATRONIC* – see separate operating instructions for LINGUATRONIC*. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 122 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 122 X To reject: select Reject. X or Press the ~ button on the telephone keypad or the multi-function steering wheel. Once you have accepted the call, you can conduct your telephone call using the handsfree system. The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 68). For more information, see the "Functions during a single call connection" section (Y page 123). The following information on an incoming call appears in the display: Rthe phone number X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:11; WK Rthe name and phone number if the entry is stored in the address book RCall from Unknown if the telephone number is withheld i You can also accept a call when COMAND is showing a display of a different main function. The display switches to the telephone display after you accept the call. After the call is finished, you see the display of the previous main application again. Outgoing call X Enter the phone number on the telephone keypad. or X Use the COMAND controller to select digits via the telephone basic menu. To delete an entire phone number:press and hold $ on the telephone keypad until the number is deleted. or Select r from the telephone basic menu and press and hold W until the phone number is deleted. X To place a call: press the 6 button on the telephone keypad or on the multi-function steering wheel or select the 6 button from the telephone basic menu. X Redialling X Change to the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad. or X Select SEND from the telephone basic menu and press W. The list of dialled numbers appears. The most recently dialled number is at the top. X To select and place a call: slide ZVÆ and use W to select an entry, or press the 6 button on the COMAND control unit. Calling voicemail19 You can only call voicemail if the voicemail number on the SIM card is stored under the 4 button on your mobile phone. X Press and hold the 4 button on the telephone keypad. or Use LINGUATRONIC* to enter digits or to select names from the phone book – see separate operating instructions. X To delete individual digits: briefly press $ on the telephone keypad. or X Select r from the telephone basic menu and briefly press W. X 19 This function is only available if it is supported by the mobile phone network provider. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:11; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 123 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* Dial the respective number to listen to your answering machine, for example. X Select DTMF from the telephone basic menu during a conversation. COMAND Functions available during a single call connection 123 Telephone operation with a single call : Person you are calling ; Receiver symbol: here 6 indicating an : To transmit individual characters using = ; To transmit a phone book entry as a char- ? A B active phone connection NEW to call other parties20 To switch the microphone for the handsfree system on/off To send DTMF tones21 To end a call Switching the microphone for the handsfree system on/off This function is also available during an active phone call. X To switch off: select Mike off from the telephone basic menu. If the microphone is switched off, the display shows the Q symbol and the The microphone is off message appears for a short period. X To switch on: select Mike on from the telephone basic menu. The Q symbol goes out. You will briefly see the The microphone is on message. DTMF tone transmission21 Answering machines or other devices can be controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query functions. 20 This 21 Not the input speller acter string X To send individual characters: select the desired number buttons using input speller :. Every character selected will be transmitted immediately. You can, for example, store the phone number of the answering machine in the phone book. You can then search for the answering machine phone number in the phone book. Select Name. Select the desired phone book entry. The entry is immediately sent as a character string. X To return to the call display: select B on the COMAND display. X X i DTMF tones can also be transmitted using LINGUATRONIC*; see the separate operating instructions. Ending an active call X Press the ~ button on the telephone keypad or on the multi-function steering function is only available if the telephone supports HFP1.5 and above. available for all mobile phones. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 124 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 124 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* wheel or select ~ from the telephone basic menu. Call waiting, toggling and conference connections with several persons22, 23 COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:12; WK You can be called by more than one person (call waiting) while you are making a telephone call. In the same way, you can call another party while already on the phone with someone. You can either toggle between these two conversations or interconnect them to create a conference call. You can simultaneously switch back and forth between two parties or conduct a conference call with up to five others. Toggling24 If you are on the telephone and you receive another call, the call waiting display will appear. You also hear an acoustic signal. X To reject: select Reject. or X Press the ~ button on the telephone keypad or the multi-function steering wheel. X To accept: select Accept. or X Accept via LINGUATRONIC* – see separate operating instructions. or X Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad or on the multi-function steering wheel. This will put the active call on hold. You now have two calls. The call you have just accepted is active. i If your mobile phone does not support active is cancelled as soon as the second call is accepted. Calling additional parties You can call a second person while on the phone with someone else. This action puts the previous call on hold. X Select NEW from the telephone basic menu and press W. or X Select SEND on the telephone keypad. X Enter the phone number manually (Y page 122) or using the phone book (Y page 128). Switching between two parties (toggling) If you have added another party to your previously active call, the telephone menu then looks like this: : Active party ; Party on hold X To switch to the other party: use the COMAND controller to select ;. or X Select SEND on the telephone keypad. or X Press the SEND button on the multi-function steering wheel. HFP 1.5 or above, then the call which was 22 These functions are only available if they are supported by the mobile phone network provider. functions are only available if the mobile phone supports HFP 1.5 and above. 24 This function is only available if Toggling has been activated on the mobile phone. 23 These * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:12; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 125 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* available to you which are described in the "Functions during a single call connection" section (Y page 123). Text messages (SMS)* (convenience telephony*) COMAND Interconnection to create a conference You can interconnect calls which are active and those which are on hold. This permits several parties to hear one another and speak with one another. Text message (SMS) functions The following text message functions are available: Rreceiving Rreading Rwriting : Active party ; Party on hold = To interconnect parties by creating a con- ference connection X To interconnect parties by creating a conference connection: use the COMAND controller to select Confer‐ ence =. Switching between the hands-free system and the mobile phone (convenience telephony*) During a call, you can also switch between the mobile phone and the hands-free system. From the hands-free system to the mobile phone X Take the mobile phone out of the bracket*. The No telephone inserted message appears in the COMAND display. Subsequent operation is only possible using the mobile phone. text messages text messages text messages Rmanaging text messages The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to use the functions: Rthe mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone bracket* and is switched on. Rthe PIN has been entered. When the mobile phone is connected, the 200 most recent text messages which are currently stored on the phone are loaded to the COMAND's text message (SMS) inbox and displayed. This may take a few minutes. When the mobile phone is connected to COMAND via the bracket*, newly received text messages will be displayed in COMAND's text message inbox. An audible signal can also be heard and the / symbol appears. Text message (SMS) menu X Call up SMS from the telephone basic menu. The text message menu appears. From the mobile phone to hands-free mode X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket*. Once the call has been transferred to hands-free mode, all the functions will be * optional 125 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 126 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 126 COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:12; WK : New text message (0 symbol for unread text message) ; Number of text messages in the inbox folder = Outbox ? Drafts A To write a new text message B Text message inbox Text message inbox X Select Inbox. The sender display shows the sender of the messages. If the sender is stored in the COMAND phone book, the name is displayed. Otherwise, the telephone number appears. The text display shows the first few words of the text message. X To switch to text display: select Options Q Display text. X To switch to sender display: select Options Q Display sender. Displaying details COMAND can also show a shortened sender display in full. X Select the desired text message from the text message inbox. X Select Options Q Details. The detailed view appears. X To close the detailed view: slide XVY. Reading a text message Select the desired text message from the text message inbox. X Press W. X To scroll through the display or to select telephone numbers in the text: slide ZVÆ. The display scrolls up or down line by line, or skips to the next or previous telephone number and automatically highlights it. X To return to the list: slide XVY. X : Text preview or sender of the selected text message (SMS) ; Reception date and time of the selected text message = Highlighted text message/symbol 0 for unread text message ? Text messages already read Switching the display You can switch between displaying the sender of the text message (SMS) and text display. Listening to a text message* You can set the language (Y page 172) and the speed of the read-aloud function* (Y page 169). X Select and open the desired text message from the text message inbox. X Press W and select Read aloud. X To end reading aloud: press W and select End reading aloud. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:13; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 127 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 127 Writing a new text message Select New from the "SMS" menu. COMAND X Entering the message : Input speller Entering the recipient : Recipient of the new text message ; To enter a telephone number using the address book = Input speller To enter the text message recipient from the phone book: select ; using the COMAND controller. X Select the desired recipient from the phone book (Y page 129). X To enter the recipient's phone number manually: use the COMAND controller to select the desired digits with input speller =. or X Use the telephone keypad to enter the desired digits. X i You can also respond directly to a text message; the recipient will then be automatically accepted. To do so, simply select OptionsQReply in the text message inbox. * optional ; Text field for the text message = To select or create text modules ? To insert a line break A To switch between uppercase and lower- case letters B To switch between numbers and letters C To change the language of the characters D To delete characters Use input speller : to enter the desired text into text field ;. X Select ok. The text message is sent. X Managing text messages Calling a text message sender X Select the desired text message. X Press W and select Call. Storing a text message sender in the address book X Select the desired text message from the text message inbox. X Press W and select Save number Q New entry or Add telephone number. X Add the telephone number to the address book (Y page 129). Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 128 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 128 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* Deleting a text message25 X Select the desired text message from the text message inbox. X Select Options Q Delete. A deletion prompt appears. X Select Yes. COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:13; WK using the mobile phone bracket* (convenience telephony*) is activated. Importing contacts manually Using the phone book and address book The COMAND phone book is an extract of those entries from the address book which contain at least one telephone number. In addition, the first entry is "MB Contact", which can be used to place a call to the Mercedes-Benz Hotline. The address book organises and stores entries which are entered from different sources (mobile phone, SD memory card, Bluetooth® import, COMAND phone book, navigation). You can use these entries to make telephone calls, for navigation and for writing (text messages). Importing contacts automatically If basic telephony is activated via the Bluetooth® interface or convenience telephony* using the mobile phone bracket*, contacts (phone book entries) are automatically imported from the respective mobile phone to the COMAND phone book. Depending on the mobile phone, this process may take some time. Depending on the mobile phone used, only the phone book entries in the mobile phone or these entries and the phone book entries in the SIM card are imported. Automatically imported contacts (phone book entries) in COMAND can be identified by the d/0 symbol. These entries are only available in COMAND when telephony via the Bluetooth® interface (basic telephony) or 25 This i Manually imported contacts are always available. Automatically imported contacts are available only when basic telephony via the Bluetooth® interface or convenience telephony* using the mobile phone bracket* is activated. You can import existing data manually: Rfrom the memory card the Bluetooth® interface (e.g. Bluetooth® telephone, Bluetooth® PC) Rvia To import data: load the memory card or activate Bluetooth® in COMAND (Y page 115) and on the Bluetooth® telephone or PC (see operating instructions of the respective mobile phone/PC). X Select Data/connectionsQImport contactsQFrom Memory card. X Select Add or Overwrite. X To cancel data import: press W. or X Press the % button. If the data has been imported, the Import procedure successful message is displayed. If the COMAND phone book memory is full, this message appears in the display: Mem‐ X function is not supported by all mobile phones. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:13; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 129 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* i If you switch over to another main func- tion (e.g. navigation) while importing data, the import will be cancelled. If you switch to another function while importing vCards from the memory card, the import will not be cancelled. Calling up contacts/details You can call up contacts with the list or by using the input speller. Calling up contacts from a list Phone book: select Name. Address book: select Data/connections Q Address book. X To switch from the input speller to the list: press ZV until the input speller is hidden. or X Select ¬. X To call up a contact: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd and push W. X X Calling up contacts using the input speller Phone book: select Name. Address book: select Data/connections Q Address book. X To switch from the list to the input speller: select Back from the list. or X Press the % button. X To select characters: slide ZVÆ or XVY and press W. Repeat this procedure until COMAND automatically switches over to the list. You determine the first letter of the entry you are looking for with the first character you enter. If there are similar entries, the next character which is different will be displayed and offered for selection. X X Phone book/address book basic display : List ¤ Entry with navigable data* \ Entry with voice tag – see separate operating instructions for LINGUATRONIC* ¥ Address book entry d Mobile phone entry 0 SIM card entry ® Bluetooth® entry ¯ Memory card entry G Entry with multiple phone numbers ; Two-line speller B To change the language of the characters p To select the character set F To delete your selection ¬ To confirm your selection % Back * optional i You can also use the telephone number pad to enter characters. Displaying contact details Select Options Q Details. The detailed view appears. X To return to the list: slide XVY until the list is highlighted. X Creating new contacts/changing contacts i In certain countries, this function is not available if the vehicle is travelling at more than approximately 5 km/h. As soon as the Z COMAND ory full. Contacts could not be completely imported. 129 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:14; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 130 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 130 vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, the function is available again. i You can enter address data directly in the COMAND address book. If you store telephone numbers in the phone book, these are saved in the address book. If you store a navigation destination*, COMAND creates an address book entry which includes the complete navigable address data. X X Call up the contact (Y page 129).26 Select OptionsQNew entry or Change. The input menu with data fields appears. F To delete your selection ¬ To confirm your selection ? Preset phone category Enter the respective data in the data fields. To enter data in the data field: select the respective characters from input speller =. X To move the cursor in the data field: select the respective characters from input speller =. X To change data fields: slide ZV until the input speller is hidden. X Slide ZVÆ and push W. or X Press Æ in the input speller. X To cancel data entry:select Back. If one of the data fields contains data, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to store the entry. X To store data entry: select ¬. The entry is created in the phone book and in the address book. X X Deleting contacts : Cursor ; Data field = Two-line speller B To select the language p To select the character set */E To select uppercase and lowercase letters % Back 26 Only X To select a contact: select Data/connec‐ tions Q Delete contacts. You can select and delete the following types of contact here: RInternal contacts RImported from the memory card available with the "Change contact" function. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:14; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 131 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* RDelete via Bluetooth all To confirm your selection: press W. A prompt appears asking whether the data should be deleted. X Select Yes. X i Automatically imported contacts cannot Search for an address book entry using the ¤ symbol. X Display the details about an entry and highlight the address data field. X X i You may only select Navigate if the address data field contains complete, navigable data. This is indicated by the ¤ symbol. be deleted (Y page 128). Calling a number stored in an entry Using the phone book Select Name. X Call up the contact (Y page 129). X Contact with multiple phone numbers (with G symbol): turn cVd and press W. or X Press SEND on the telephone keypad. X Contact with one telephone number (without G symbol): press W. or X Press SEND on the telephone keypad. X Using the address book Select Data/connections. Open Address book. X Call up the contact (Y page 129). X Press the W button. X Turn cVd and press W. or X Press SEND on the telephone keypad. X X Starting route guidance to an entry* i You can use this function once you have stored a destination in the destination memory (Y page 167). COMAND also stores the destination with the complete navigable address data in the address book. * optional Select OptionsQNavigateQStart. Voice tags* i Voice tags are entered via LINGUA- TRONIC* – see the separate operating instructions for LINGUATRONIC* Adding or changing a voice tag i You can add one voice tag per address book entry. Search for an address book entry with or without a voice tag (¦ symbol). X Select Options Q Voice tag Q Add or Change. The subsequent operation is voice-controlled. LINGUATRONIC* guides you through the menus. X Deleting a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag. X Select Options QVoice tag Q Delete. A deletion prompt appears. Listening to a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag. X Select Options Q Voice tag Q Lis‐ ten. You will hear the voice tag. Z COMAND RImported 131 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 132 Version: 2.11.7.7 Telephone* 132 Using call lists COMAND displays lists of calls received (including missed calls) and made during phone operation. i The respective menu item can only be COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:15; WK selected if calls have already been made or received in COMAND or if the call lists have been imported from the telephone. Selecting an entry from the call list Press the S function button. X Select Call lists. A menu appears. X To select a list entry: slide ZVÆ. To dial a phone number: press the 6 button. Incoming calls which you could not or did not want to answer are marked with a symbol in front of the name or phone number. X X Saving a list entry For an incoming call from a person who is not in the address book, COMAND displays the phone number in the call list. You can save this entry. The entry will then appear in the call list as the phone number (not used yet) or as the name (already used). Storing as a new entry in the address book X Open a call list. X Select the list entry. X Select OptionsQSave number. X Select New entry to create a new entry. X X X Select Incoming calls or Calls dial‐ led. The corresponding list appears. Example display: list of calls made : To close the list ; Telephone number/name if known Select a number category, e.g. Home. Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile. Number category Display (telephone and address book) Not classified No symbol Home 6 Work \ Telephone category Display (telephone and address book) Not classified No symbol Mobile ¢ Car ^ Landline tele‐ phone number ¬ Preferred O = Options (e.g. save) * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:15; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 133 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) in a number and telephone category, the ; icon will appear in the display. X Select Next (save). An input menu appears with data fields. The data field for the telephone number is filled in automatically. : Data fields for surname, first name and company ; Number category = Telephone category ? Data field for telephone number (filled in Select Next (save). The search menu for address book entries appears. X Search for the desired entry (Y page 129). X Once the search is completed, confirm the selection. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer than five numbers assigned to the entry you are searching for in the selected number category. You will see a message to this effect. If five numbers are stored for the entry you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. X Select Yes or No. X Confirm your selection. If you select Yes, a selection list with the five existing numbers is displayed. X Select the number to be overwritten. COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data. X automatically) A Two-line speller Navigation system* (introduction) For the following steps, follow the instructions as described in the "Add new contact" section (Y page 129): Rswitching the data field Safety notes X Rentering data Rdeleting an entry Rcancelling Rstoring an entry an entry Adding to an existing entry in the address book X Open a call list. X Select the list entry. X Select OptionsQSave number. X Select Add to add an entry. Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile. X * optional G Risk of accident For safety reasons, only enter a new destination when the vehicle is stationary. COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and give way signs Rparking Rlane or stopping restrictions narrowing Rother tions road and traffic controls and regula- For this reason, you must always observe the respective road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic controls and regulations always have priority Z COMAND i If you have not entered the phone number 133 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 134 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 134 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) over the navigation announcements generated by the system. General notes COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:15; WK Operational readiness of the navigation system In vehicles for certain countries, the navigation system is not operational immediately after delivery because the map software is not pre-installed there. If this is the case, you will see the following message when you switch to navigation mode: The map software must be installed. Please insert the DVD containing the map software. X To install software: (Y page 141). i Do not cancel the installation process. If you cancel the installation process, the navigation system will not be operational. GPS reception Amongst other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels, in multi-storey car parks or due to snow on the GPS aerial. Remove any snow from the GPS aerial. The GPS aerial is on the roof at the rear. Route guidance after vehicle transportation or exiting a multi-storey car park COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the vehicle has been transported, e.g.: Rby ferry Rby motorail Rafter towing COMAND may also have to redetermine the vehicle's position after exiting a multi-storey car park. Positioning takes place automatically even when COMAND is switched off. The duration will vary from one situation to another. Route guidance may be restricted as follows during vehicle positioning: Rnavigation announcements, route guidance displays and displayed street names are not consistent with the actual location of the vehicle. RCOMAND does not generate navigation announcements. Rinstead of the route guidance display, you see the Street unknown. display and a directional arrow. The directional arrow shows the compass heading to the destination. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with navigation announcements and route guidance displays. Interrupting the journey during route guidance i Interrupting the journey means parking the vehicle and switching off COMAND. Continuing the journey means switching COMAND on again and driving on. The following applies if you interrupt the journey during route guidance and continue the journey later on: RCOMAND resumes route guidance automatically if you continue the journey within 2 hours. RRoute guidance is cancelled if you continue the journey after more than 2 hours. It will be necessary to resume the cancelled route guidance manually. Hard disk errors COMAND has an integrated hard disk on which the map software is stored. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 135 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) If an area of the hard disk has a fault, COMAND can no longer access the map data in this area, for example when calculating a route. The message: Navigation unavailable. Please observe the Owner's Manual. appears. X To delete the message: switch COMAND off and then on again. If you switch the navigation system off/on, it will be operational again until it has to access the faulty area of the hard disk again. The message will then appear again. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Map with route guidance inactive and showing the menu system : Current vehicle position Units of measurement The units of measurement in navigation mode are identical to those displayed in the instrument cluster. The units of measurement may only be changed via the instrument cluster. Input restrictions On vehicles for certain countries, there is a restriction on entering data. The restriction is active above a vehicle speed of about 5 km/h. The restriction is deactivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h. When the restriction is active it is not possible to enter specific items, e.g. a town or street name. You will recognise this because certain menu items cannot be selected. Switching to navigation mode X Press the S function button once or twice. or X Select Navi in the main function bar. The map view is displayed with the menu system either shown or hidden. Map with route guidance inactive and with the menu system hidden : Current vehicle position ; Map orientation (Y page 138) = Map scale (Y page 135) Hiding/showing the menu system To hide: slide ÆVZ. The Full screen menu item appears in the main area of the display. X Press the W button. The menu system is hidden. The map can be seen in the full-screen display. X To show: press W in the full-screen map display. X Adjusting the map scale i It is only possible to adjust the map scale with the menu system hidden (full-screen map display). * optional Z 135 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:16; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 136 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) 136 X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:16; WK Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. : Map scale selected ; Map scale selected on scale bar = Last map scale selected (prior to calling : Crosshair ? Scale bar = Map scale up the scale bar) Storing the current vehicle position as a destination in the list of previous destinations X X Make sure that the menu system is shown. To store: select Position Q Save vehicle position. COMAND stores the current vehicle position as a destination in the list of previous destinations (Y page 169). Moving the map i It is only possible to move the map with the menu system hidden. In certain countries, it is not possible to move the map freely if the vehicle is travelling at more than approximately 5 km/h. As soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, it is possible to move the map freely again. X Slide ZVÆ, XVY or aVb. A crosshair appears on the map. ; Details of the crosshair position i Display ; may be the name of a street, for example, provided the digital map contains the necessary data. If no data is available, display ; shows: Rthe crosshair coordinates if the geocoordinate display is switched on (Y page 139) Rno display if the geo-coordinate display is switched off (Y page 139) Storing the crosshair position as a destination in the list of previous destinations X Show the menu system. X To save: select Position Q Save posi‐ tion. COMAND stores the crosshair position as a destination in the list of previous destinations (Y page 169). Hiding the crosshair X Press the % button. The crosshair disappears and the map is set to the vehicle position. or X Set the map to vehicle or destination position (Y page 137). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:16; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 137 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) If you have moved the map, you can use this function to rapidly return the map to the position of the vehicle or destination. You can only use this function when route guidance is active. To set the map to the vehicle position: select Navi Q Position Q Vehicle position map. X or Press the % button when the crosshair is displayed. X To set the map to the destination position: select Navi Q Position Q Des‐ tination map. X Menu overview Info (only with route guidance active) TMC Route Position + (only with route guidance active) Destination Display information on the current route guidance Calling up RDS-TMC traffic reports RCalling RSaving Calling up the current navigation announcement REntering up the traffic jam function RCalling symbol info RCalling up up route info vehicle position RWhere I? am RCentring the map on the vehicle's position a destination or an intermediate stop RStoring a destination RDestina- tion on the map RIntermedi- ate stop on the map RCompass * optional Z COMAND Centring the map on the vehicle or destination position 137 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:17; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 138 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) 138 Basic settings Map orientation The following settings are possible: RStandard symbols (symbol display determined by the factory settings) RPersonal symbols (you can determine the symbols yourself) COMAND RNo symbols To set: select Navi Q Special desti‐ nation symbols on map. The map display list appears. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Standard symbols or Personal symbols or No symbols. If you select Personal symbols, the list of special destinations appears. X To activate/deactivate the symbol display: select the respective special destination. Depending on their previous status the symbols are switched on/off. If a tick is shown, this indicates that the display is switched on. You can switch on the symbol displays for more than one special destination. X : Map orientation The following display modes are possible: Rnorth orientation: the map view is displayed so that north is always up. Rdirection of travel: the map is displayed so that the heading is always up; the orange point of the symbol points north. Rbird's-eye view: the map is displayed so that the heading is always up, the map projection reproduces the curvature of the earth and the orange point of the symbol points north. R3D map: important buildings in large towns are shown in detail as 3D models. Hills and valleys are displayed in 3D form on the map. The 3D map is country-dependent and is linked to the "Town view" function (Y page 139). To set the map orientation: select Navi Q Map display. The map display list appears. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select North orientation, Direction of travel, Bird's-eye-view or 3-D map. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. i The list shows all symbols that are con- tained on the digital map across all countries. However, not all special destinations are available in all countries. As a result, certain special destination symbols may not be displayed on the map, even if the symbol display is switched on. X Setting special destination symbols You can set the special destinations you wish to have displayed as symbols on the map. Special destinations are, for example, filling stations, hotels, cinemas and restaurants. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. Selecting text information on the map Below the map shown, COMAND can display various items of text information: Rtime of arrival and distance from destination Rcurrent street Rgeo-coordinates Rnone * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:17; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 139 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) To display: select Navi Q Text infor‐ mation on map. The selection list appears. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Arrival time/Distance. This will switch the display for arrival time and distance to destination on or off, depending on the previous setting. X Current street You can set whether COMAND displays the street you are currently driving on at the bottom of the map. X To display: select Navi Q Text infor‐ mation on map. The selection list appears. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Current street. This will either show or hide the current street, depending on the previous setting. Geo-coordinates : Height above sea level ; Geo-coordinate display = Number of GPS satellites from which a signal can be received nates of the crosshair or other data on the crosshair position, e.g. a street name. The digital map must contain the relevant data in order for this other data to be displayed. i If there is no crosshair on the map view, displays :, ; and = are visible. Display ; shows the geo-coordinates of the current vehicle position. To switch the geo-coordinate display on or off: select Navi Q Text informa‐ tion on the map. The selection list appears. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Geo-coordinates. The geo-coordinate display is switched on or off, depending on the previous status. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. X Topographical map You can have the map displayed as a topographical map. Differing heights in the terrain can then be identified though colour gradations. Colour gradations are available starting at a scale of 10 km. X Select Navi. X Tick the Topographical map menu item. Town view If you have set the map orientation as a 3D map (Y page 138), a large number of towns can be displayed as 3D town views. i There must be sufficient GPS reception for displays :, ; and = to be shown. Height display : may vary from the actual value, because the navigation system uses the GPS signal for the calculation. Display options with geo-coordinate display switched on If the crosshair is displayed on the map view (map has been moved manually), only display = is visible. It shows either the geo-coordi* optional Z COMAND Arrival time and distance to destination 139 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:17; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 140 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) 140 The current setting is indicated by a # dot. To make a setting: select Fastest route or Dynamic route or Short route. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. X COMAND i COMAND calculates a new route if you change the route type setting with route guidance active. If you change the route type setting when route guidance is inactive, COMAND uses the new setting for the next route guidance. : Hills ; Buildings = Important buildings X X Select Navi. Tick the Town view menu item. Selecting the route type You can select the following route types: route: COMAND calculates a route with the shortest possible (minimised) journey time. Setting route options This function allows you to set the following options for route guidance: RAvoid motorways RAvoid toll roads RAvoid routes requiring special toll sticker RFastest RDynamic route: same route type as Fast‐ est route. However, COMAND also takes into consideration any RDS-TMC traffic announcements27 that are received for route guidance. Thus, the navigation system is able to guide you around a traffic jam, for example. If a quicker route is determined due to a received RDS-TMC traffic announcement, the navigation system changes the route. If possible, it will bypass blockages. RShort route: COMAND calculates a route with the shortest possible (minimised) distance regarding distance and driving time. X Select Navi Q Mode: The mode list appears. 27 RDS-TMC RAvoid tunnels RAvoid ferries RAvoid motorail trains Select Navi Q Mode: The mode list appears. The selected option is indicated by a O tick. It is possible to select more than one option. X To activate or deactivate an option: select the desired option. The option is selected or deselected, depending on the previous status. X To exit the menu: slide XVY. COMAND will verify whether it can implement the options if you have selected them with route guidance active. If it can, COMAND calculates a new route while implementing the options selected. If it X and Dynamic route are not available in all countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:17; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 141 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) Displaying information on the currently used map version X Select Navi Q Map version. Notes on handling DVDs ROnly Installing the map software The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conventional road maps. Optimum route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most upto-date map software. Information about new map software versions can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can install new map software, which may consist of one of more DVDs (depending on the scope), yourself. The installation process can take between 10 and 120 minutes, depending on the scope of the map software. If the radio is switched on before you start the installation process, you can still adjust the volume. You can also use COMAND to operate the automatic airconditioning system and to cancel the process. Other functions are not operational. If possible, carry out the installation process when the vehicle is stationary. The DVD read speed is higher when the vehicle is stationary than when it is in motion, so less time is required. If the starter battery is not sufficiently charged, COMAND may end the process automatically, in order to protect the battery. Therefore, let the engine idle during the installation process. G Risk of poisoning Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. * optional hold DVDs by the edge. RHandle errors. DVDs carefully to prevent reading RAvoid getting scratches, fingerprints and dust on DVDs. RUse a commercially-available cleaning cloth to clean discs. Do not wipe them with a circular motion, but only in straight lines from the centre outwards. RPlace DVDs back in their cases after use. RProtect DVDs from heat and direct sunlight. Map software copy protection Map software for COMAND is subject to a charge. The map software has just one activation code which is usable in one vehicle only, and is not transferable. You can obtain the six digit activation code from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you have lost the activation code, or if COMAND does not accept the activation code that you have received, ask at your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Your vehicle is supplied with map software at the factory. Depending on the country, the map software for your region is either preinstalled (Europe/USA), or the map software is provided on a DVD (all other countries). You do not require an activation code for the map software that is provided with your vehicle. If the map software on your vehicle has been installed at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, this also does not necessitate entry of the activation code. Z COMAND cannot, you will see and hear a corresponding message. X Select OK. COMAND calculates a new route. Only those options which can be implemented are considered. 141 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 142 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (introduction) 142 Installation process X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:17; WK Insert the map software DVD into the single DVD drive (Y page 83) or the DVD changer* (Y page 83). COMAND checks the DVD and shows a corresponding message in the display. The map software is not compatible with the navigation system You will see a message that the installation of the map software is not possible. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Insert a DVD which is compatible with the vehicle’s navigation system. The map software is not compatible with the current system software You will see a message that the system software and the map software are not compatible. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Have the system software updated at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The map software cannot be installed until the system software has been updated. Map software compatible with the navigation system and the current system software COMAND checks whether the map data on the DVD is already installed. Map data is already installed You will see a message that the map data is already installed and a prompt will appear asking you whether you wish to continue with the installation. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the existing map data is overwritten. If you select No, COMAND automatically ejects the DVD and the installation of the map software is cancelled. X Take the DVD out of the slot. Map data is not yet installed To compare the map software DVD and the map software currently installed on COMAND, the status of the versions is displayed. Subsequently a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to continue with the map software installation. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the map data is installed. If you select No, COMAND automatically ejects the DVD and the installation of the map software is cancelled. X Take the DVD out of the slot. If an activation code is required for the map software, a prompt appears in the display requesting the code to be entered. Enter the activation code and confirm the entry with !. The map software is installed. If you enter an incorrect activation code, the prompt to enter the activation code appears again. If the activation code is entered incorrectly three times, the prompt asking you to enter the activation code appears after a time delay. The time delay increases every time the activation code is entered incorrectly, from five minutes up to a maximum of five hours. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 143 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) Installing the map data Just before the copying process starts, COMAND restarts the system. While the installation is running, you will see a message to this effect and a progress bar. X To cancel an installation process on the single DVD drive: press the eject button. X Take the DVD out of the slot. ROverheating To cancel an installation process on the DVD changer: press the corresponding magazine tray button. X Take the DVD out of the slot. RIf X i If you interrupt the installation process, the navigation system will not be operational. You can continue an interrupted installation process at a later date. Installation process with multi DVD map data: once the content of the first DVD has been installed, a message appears prompting you to insert the second DVD. Follow the instructions on the display. X To allow the installation process to run to the end without cancelling: take no further action. When the installation process is successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. The installation process is complete. When the installation process is successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. If the installation process cannot be successfully completed, this may be due to the following: X RDVD X X Clean the DVD (Y page 141). Restart the map software installation process. due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle interior. X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down. X Restart the map software installation process. the measures listed above do not solve the problem: X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Navigation system* (entering a destination) Introduction to entering destinations The following destination input options are available: Rentering a destination by address Rentering a destination from the destination memory Rentering a destination from the list of last destinations Rentering a destination using the map Rentering an intermediate stop Rentering a special destination Entering a destination by address i In certain countries, it is not possible to enter an address if the vehicle is travelling at more than approximately 5 km/h. As soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, the function is available again. dirty or scratched * optional 143 Z COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:18; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 144 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) 144 When entering an address as the destination, you have the following options: Renter the country, town and street. Renter the country, town and centre. Renter the country, town, street and house number. COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:18; WK Renter the country, town, street and junc- Renter the country, town and street. tion. Calling up the address input menu X Select Navi Q Destination Q Address input. The address input menu appears. It shows the country in which the most recent destination address was entered. Select Country in the address input menu. The country list appears. X Select the desired country. The address input menu appears again. The country selected is automatically entered. X Entering the town i You can only enter towns that are stored on the digital map. Entering a town will delete a previously entered postcode. X Select Town in the address input menu. The list of towns appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on how many towns are available for the country selected. List of towns with the input speller If this list appears, input speller B is activated automatically. Menu items in the address input menu Depending on the sequence in which you enter the address and on the data status of the digital map, some menu items may not be available. Example: after selecting the country, the No., Centre, Junction, Save and Start menu items are not yet available. : List entry that most closely matches the current input string ; Character entered by the user = Characters automatically added by the system ? Characters not currently available for selection Selecting the country A Characters currently available for selec- i You can only select countries that are B Input speller stored on the digital map. tion C List of towns D Currently selected character * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:18; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 145 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) the characters that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the data contained on the digital map. During the character selection procedure described below, list entry : always shows a town that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible characters = to those already entered by user ;. X To select a character: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the character selection: press W. X To delete individual characters: select F on the lower bar and press W. X To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the address input menu appears again. COMAND has automatically accepted the first list entry and entered it in the address input menu. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller B disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one town. The list of towns is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. X or X X i It is also possible to change manually to the list of towns without the input speller at any time during character input. * optional To change manually to the list of towns without the input speller: slide ZV. Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. Selecting the current town The "Town" entry is always empty at first because of the "Street destination" (Y page 151) option in the "Address" menu. You may select the last town name entered by selecting the last destination from Desti‐ nation Q From last destinations and pressing Change. Inputting Cyrillic characters In Russia, you may choose between Cyrillic and Latin characters to input destinations. In order to do this, you must have installed the map software for Russia. X To switch between Latin and Cyrillic fonts: select the p symbol from the input speller menu. Entering a postcode i Entering a postcode will delete a previ- ously entered town name. You can only enter postcodes that are stored on the digital map. X Select Postcode in the address input menu. The postcode list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on how many postcodes are available for the country selected. Z COMAND i With input speller B, you can only select 145 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 146 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) 146 Postcode list with the input speller COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:18; WK : List entry that most closely matches the current input string ; Digits entered by the user = Digits automatically added by the system ? Input speller A Digits not currently available for selection B Digits currently available for selection C Currently selected digit D Postcode list If this list appears, input speller ? is activated automatically. i With input speller ?, you can only select the numbers that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the data contained on the digital map. To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the address input menu appears again. COMAND has automatically accepted the first list entry and entered it in the address input menu. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller ? disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one postcode. The list of postcodes is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. It is also possible to change manually to the postcode list without the input speller at any time during digit input. X To change manually to the postcode list without the input speller: slide ZV. or X Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. X During the digit selection procedure described below, list entry : always shows a postcode that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible digits = to those already entered by user ;. Entering a street name To select a digit: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the digit selection: press W. X To delete individual digits: select F on the lower bar and press W. X X i Entering the name of a street will delete a previously entered centre name. You can only enter streets that are stored on the digital map. Select Street in the address input menu. The street list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on how many street names are available for the town selected. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:18; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 147 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) : List entry that most closely matches the current input string ; Characters entered by the user = Characters automatically added by the system ? Characters not currently available for selection A Characters currently available for selec- tion B Input speller C List of street names D Currently selected character If this list appears, input speller B is activated automatically. i With input speller B, you can only select the characters that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the data contained on the digital map. During the character selection procedure described below, list entry : always shows a street that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible characters = to those already entered by user ;. To select a character: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the character selection: press W. X To delete individual characters: select F on the lower bar and press W. X * optional To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the address input menu appears again. COMAND has automatically accepted the first list entry and entered it in the address input menu. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller B disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one street. The list of streets is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. X i It is also possible to change manually to the list of streets without the input speller at any time during character input. X To change manually to the list of towns without the input speller: slide ZV. or X Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. Entering a centre i You can only enter centres that are stored on the digital map. X Select Centre in the address input menu. The centre list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on how many centres are available in the town selected. Z COMAND Street name list with the input speller 147 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 148 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) 148 Centre list with input speller COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:19; WK : List entry that most closely matches the current input string ; Character entered by the user = Characters automatically added by the system ? Characters not currently available for selection A Characters currently available for selec- tion B Input speller C Centre list D Currently selected character If this list appears, input speller B is activated automatically. i With input speller B, you can only select the characters that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the data contained on the digital map. During the character selection procedure described below, list entry : always shows the centre that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible characters = to those already entered by user ;. To select a character: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the character selection: press W. X To delete individual characters: select F on the lower bar and press W. X To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the address input menu appears again. COMAND has automatically accepted the first list entry and entered it in the address input menu. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller B disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one centre. The list of centres is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. X i It is also possible to change to the centre list without the input speller manually at any time during character input. X To change manually to the centre list without the input speller: slide ZV. or X Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. Entering the house number i It is not possible to enter a house number until a street has been entered. You can only enter house numbers that are stored on the digital map. The digital map does not contain house numbers for all streets. Select No. in the address input menu. The house number list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on how many house numbers are available in the street selected. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:19; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 149 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) : Digit entered by the user ; Digits automatically added by the system = List entry that most closely matches the current input string ? Input speller A Currently selected number B Digits currently available for selection C Digits not currently available for selection D House number list If this list appears, input speller ? is activated automatically. i With input speller ?, you can only select the digits that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the data contained on the digital map. During the digit selection procedure described below, list entry = always shows a house number that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible digits ; to those already entered by user :. To select a digit: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the digit selection: press W. X To delete individual digits: select F on the lower bar and press W. X To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the address input menu appears again. COMAND has automatically accepted the first list entry and entered it in the address input menu. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller ? disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one house number. The list of house numbers is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. It is also possible to change to the house number list without the input speller manually at any time during number input. X To change manually to the house number list without the input speller: slide ZV. or X Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. X Entering a junction name i You can only enter junctions that are stored on the digital map. X Select Junction in the address input menu. The junction list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on how many junctions are available in the street selected. Junction list with input speller If this list appears, input speller ? is activated automatically. * optional Z COMAND House number list with the input speller 149 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:19; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 150 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) 150 To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the address input menu appears again. COMAND has automatically accepted the first list entry and entered it in the address input menu. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller ? disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one junction. The list of junctions is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. COMAND X : List entry that most closely matches the current input string ; Character entered by the user = Characters automatically added by the system ? Input speller A Characters not currently available for selection B Characters currently available for selec- tion C Currently selected character D Junction list i With input speller ?, you can only select the characters that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the data contained on the digital map. During the character selection procedure described below, list entry : always shows a junction that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible characters = to those already entered by user ;. To select a character: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the character selection: press W. X To delete individual characters: select F on the lower bar and press W. X i It is also possible to change to the junc- tion list without the input speller manually at any time during character input. X To change manually to the junction list without the input speller: slide ZV. or X Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. Ambiguity of town names If several towns share the same name, you can also directly input or select a street name. COMAND then selects the town where the respective street is found. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 151 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) Enter a town as described above (Y page 144). X Select ALL. X Input or select the street name. X Select the appropriate town. X Entering the street before the town You can also enter the street name for an address directly without first entering a town. This is particularly useful if you wish to enter an address with an unusual street name. COMAND then searches automatically for towns with the respective street name. While route calculation is in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Below this, you will see a corresponding message in the display. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins. Route calculation takes a certain amount of time. The time depends on the distance from the destination, for example. COMAND calculates the route using the digital map data. The calculated route may differ from the actual road situation, e.g. due to road works or incomplete map data. Please make sure that you observe the notes about the digital map (Y page 141). Entering a destination from the destination memory X Select or enter the country as described above (Y page 144). X Select or enter the street. X Starting route calculation You cannot start route calculation until all the necessary address data has been entered. X Select Start after you have entered the destination. Route calculation will start if route guidance has not already been activated. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, COMAND will stop route guidance and start route calculation for the new destination. If you select No, COMAND will continue with the active route guidance. * optional Select Navi Q Destination Q From memory. The destination memory list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on the number of entries in the destination memory. i The destination memory always contains an entry named My address. You may wish to assign your home address to this entry, for example (Y page 165). Like any other entry, the My address entry can be selected using the input speller or from a list. Z 151 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:19; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:20; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 152 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) 152 Destination memory list with the input speller i With input speller ?, you can only select i It is also possible to change manually to COMAND If this list appears, input speller ? is activated automatically. To change the character set for the input speller: select C. Depending on the previous setting, you will change to letters with special characters or to numbers with special characters. X To select a character: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm the character selection: press W. X To delete individual characters: select F on the lower bar and press W. X To delete an entire entry: select F on the lower bar and press and hold W until the entire entry has been deleted. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W until the destination list is displayed without the input speller. X To cancel an entry: select Back on the lower bar and press W. or X Press the % button. Input speller ? disappears if COMAND is able to unambiguously assign the characters entered to one destination. The list of destinations is shown without the input speller. Here you can make another selection. : List entry that most closely matches the current input string ; Characters entered by the user = Characters automatically added by the system ? Input speller A Characters currently available for selec- tion B Characters not currently available for selection C Currently selected character D Destination memory list the characters that are currently available. These depend on the current input string and the entries stored in the destination memory. During the character selection procedure described below, list entry : always shows the destination that most closely matches the current input string. COMAND then automatically adds plausible characters = to those already entered by user ;. X the destination memory list without the input speller at any time during character input. X To change manually to the destination list without the input speller: slide ZV. or X Select ! on the second lowest bar and press W. To change the language for the input speller: select B. X Select the desired language. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:20; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 153 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) Destination memory list without the input speller COMAND at more than approximately 5 km/h. As soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 3 km/h, the function is available again. You can enter a destination using the map if the digital map does not contain the address of the destination, but it is within the area of the digital map. Calling up the map X Select Map in the address input menu (Y page 144). or To select a destination: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To cancel the selection: press the % back button. or X Select Back and press W. X X Select Navi Q Destination Q Using map. In both these cases, you will see the map with a crosshair. i The Back menu item is only available if this list has been called up from the list with the input speller. X X To confirm your selection: press W. To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 151). : Crosshair Entering a destination from the list of previous destinations Select Navi Q Destination Q From last destinations. The list of previous destinations appears. The most recent destination is at the top of the list. X Select the desired destination. X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 151). X ; Details of the crosshair position = Map scale selected i Display ; may be the name of a street, for example, provided the digital map contains the necessary data. If no data is available, display ; shows: Rthe geo-coordinates if the geo-coordinate display is switched on (Y page 139). Rno display if the geo-coordinate display is switched off (Y page 139) Entering a destination via the map i In certain countries, it is not possible to enter an address if the vehicle is travelling * optional 153 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 154 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) 154 Moving the map and selecting the destination To move the map: slide ZVÆ, XVY or turn cVd. X To set the map scale: turn cVd. X To select a destination: press W. If the crosshair is located outside the digital map, it is not possible to calculate a route to this destination and you will see the message The destination is located off the map. X Select OK. If the destination is within the limits of the digital map, COMAND attempts to assign the destination to the map. This takes approximately two seconds. If the destination can be assigned, you will see the address of the destination. If not, you will see the display Destination from map. X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 151). X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:20; WK Entering an intermediate stop When route guidance is active, you can enter an intermediate stop. Intermediate stops can be predefined destinations from the following predefined categories: RMercedes-Benz Service RHospital RFilling RCar station park RRestaurant ROther You can select intermediate stops from the route or the vicinity. You can use the intermediate stop function to influence route guidance to the main destination. When you have reached your inter- mediate stop, COMAND automatically calculates the route to the main destination. Entering predefined destinations Select Navi Q Destination Q Stop‐ over. If an intermediate stop has already been entered, you can change this. X To change: select Change stopover. You can now select a category. X To select a category: select a category, e.g. Filling station. COMAND first looks for destinations in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle and near to the vehicle’s route. If there are no destinations available there, COMAND searches for destinations in an area around the vehicle position. If COMAND does not find any destinations, you will see a message to this effect. X Select OK. You can select a different category. If COMAND finds destinations, you will see a list of the destinations and details of how far away they are in the right-hand side of the display. It can take a few seconds for the information about the distance to the destinations to be displayed. The left-hand part of the display shows the destinations on the map. The destination marked in the list is highlighted in the map. X To select a destination: select the desired destination from the list. The address of the destination appears. X To start route calculation: select Start, see also (Y page 151). X Entering another destination as an intermediate stop Select Navi Q Destination Q Stop‐ over. X To enter: select Other. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:20; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 155 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (entering a destination) RAddress X entry RFrom memory RFrom last destinations RFrom special destinations Select a menu item. Subsequent destination input may differ, depending on your selection: X Select Navi Q Destination Q Stop‐ over Q Delete stopover. COMAND deletes the intermediate stop and calculates the route to the main destination. Displaying intermediate stop map X Enter an intermediate stop (Y page 154). RAddress X input selected: Enter a destination by address (Y page 143). RFrom memory selected: X Enter a destination from the destination memory (Y page 151). RFrom X last destinations selected: Enter a destination from the list of previous destinations (Y page 153). RFrom POIs selected: X Enter a special destination (Y page 156). X To start route calculation: select Start after entering the destination. Changing an intermediate stop If an intermediate stop has already been entered, you can change this. X Select Navi Q Destination Q Stop‐ over Q Change stopover. X Enter another destination as an intermediate stop. Select the intermediate stop. Select Position X Select Stopover map. X X Making phone calls from intermediate stop destinations or special destinations This function is only available if a mobile phone is connected to COMAND. X Enter an intermediate stop (Y page 154). X Select the intermediate stop. X Select Call. Deleting the intermediate stop If an intermediate stop has already been entered, you can delete it. * optional Z COMAND You can select: 155 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:20; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 156 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) 156 Navigation system* (entering special destinations) Entering a special destination in the vicinity of the current position COMAND X Select Destination Q From POIs Q Current position in map view with the menu system displayed (Y page 135). The special destination list appears. Special destinations in the vicinity of the current position are displayed. Entering a special destination in the vicinity of a town Select Destination Q From POIs Q Other town in map view with the menu system displayed (Y page 135). X Select the country if necessary (Y page 144). X To enter a town: select Town. The town input menu appears. X Proceed as described in the "Entering a town" section (Y page 144). X Entering a special destination in the vicinity of the selected destination This function gives you quick access to special destinations which are in the vicinity of the destination you have selected. X In map view with the menu system displayed (Y page 135), select Destination Q From Special destinations Q Near destination. The special destination list appears. Special destinations in the vicinity of the destination are displayed. Entering a special destination by name This function can be used to enter special destinations by either entering or selecting the name of the destination in COMAND. X In map view with the map system displayed (Y page 135), select Destination Q From Special destinations Q Search by name Q All Special des‐ tinations. You can also search for special destinations by name in a specific location or in the vicinity of your current destination. X In map view with the map system displayed (Y page 135) , select Destination Q From Special destinations Q Search by name Q Current position or Other town. Entering a special destination by phone number This function can be used to enter special destinations by either entering or selecting a phone number for the special destination in COMAND. X In map view with the menu system displayed (Y page 135), select Destination Q From POIs Q By phone number. Telephone numbers of special destinations in the navigation database appear. The telephone numbers are displayed with the country code but without the zero prefixes. Navigation system* (route guidance) Change of direction Changes of direction have three phases: RPreparation phase RAnnouncement RChange phase of direction phase * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:21; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 157 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) 157 Preparation phase COMAND COMAND prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced with the Prepare to turn left message. The display is not split and shows the map over the full width. : Next road ; Change of direction (turn left here) = Graphical representation of the distance to the change of direction ? Point at which the change of direction : Point at which the change of direction A takes place (light blue dot) ; Current vehicle position: the triangle points in the vehicle’s direction of travel = Route (highlighted in blue) B Announcement phase D COMAND announces the imminent change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced 200 metres before the change of direction with the Please take the second turn‐ ing left message. The display is now split into two sectors. In the left half, you see the normal map view. In the right half, there is either an enlarged view of the area surrounding the junction (crossing zoom) or simply a symbol for the next change of direction. The following example illustration shows the crossing zoom in the right half. C takes place (light blue dot, shown in both the left and right displays) Distance to the next change of direction Current vehicle position: the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel (shown in both the left and right displays) Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both the left and right displays) Road you are currently driving along or GSM co-ordinates if the GSM co-ordinates display is switched on (Y page 139) i The filled-in section of visual display for distance = gets shorter the nearer you get to the announced change of direction. Change of direction phase COMAND announces the imminent change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced 40 metres before the change of direction with the Now turn left message. The display is also split into two halves, as for the announcement phase. i Once the change of direction is comple- ted, COMAND automatically switches back to the non-split screen. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 158 03. Mar 2009 15:17:21; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 158 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) D Possible lane E Recommended lane COMAND displays lane recommendations C, D and E based on the next two changes of direction. COMAND i The instrument cluster also displays lane recommendations. Only the recommended lanes are displayed in the instrument cluster. : Visual representation of the distance to the next change of direction ; Distance to the next change of direction Explanation of the lane recommendations RRecommended Lane recommendations On multi-lane roads, COMAND can display lane recommendations for the next change of direction. The relevant data must be available on the digital map. This is currently the case for numerous selected main urban and extraurban roads. lane E: in this lane, you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. RPossible lane D: in this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane. RLane not recommended C: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Lane recommendations display During the change of direction, there may be additional lanes which are displayed differently: Display : Current vehicle position: the triangle indi- cates the direction of travel ; Point of the next change of direction = Information on direction, junction, exit number etc. Meaning With lower boundary Lane added due line (lane C) to the change of direction Without lower boun- Lane leads past dary line (lanes D change of direction or E) ? Next change of direction: turn off to the left here A Visual representation of the distance to the next change of direction The colours used in the lane recommendation display vary depending on whether day or night design is switched on: B Distance to the next change of direction C Lane not recommended * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:22; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 159 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) Day design 159 Night design Possible lane D = light blue Possible lane D = dark blue Lane not recommended C = grey Lane not recommended C = grey Example of a display without a change of direction COMAND Recommended lane Recommended lane E = dark blue E = light blue : Destination on the map ; Chequered flag For certain special destinations (airports or motorway intersections), you will see Area of dest. reached in addition to chequered flag ;. Off-road and off-map Route guidance to an off-road destination : O Main destination ; P Intermediate stop (only if an inter- mediate stop has been entered) = Route (highlighted in blue) ? Current vehicle position: the triangle indi- cates the vehicle’s direction of travel A Map orientation B Map scale Destination or area of destination reached COMAND can also guide you to destinations which are not stored on the map. These are off-road destinations. You can enter these, for example, by entering the destination using the map. In these cases, COMAND guides you for as long as possible on roads known to the system. The section of the route from the last known point on the map to the off-road destination is indicated with a dashed line. It simply shows the direction to the off-road destination without taking account of any obstacles in the way. When you reach your destination, you will see the following display, and route guidance is automatically ended: * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 160 03. Mar 2009 15:17:22; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 160 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) COMAND will see the Off map message and an arrow. The arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination. The route is highlighted blue from the nearest road known to the system. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way. Off-road position during route guidance : Current vehicle position: the triangle indi- cates the vehicle’s direction of travel ; Off-road section of the route = Off-road destination Shortly before you reach the last known point on the map, you will see the message Area of dest. reached and an arrow. The directional arrow shows the compass heading to the destination. Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination The vehicle is in an off-road position if the digital map does not contain any information regarding the vehicle position. COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination even from such a location. The requirement for this is that the vehicle position is within the area covered by the digital map. At the start of route guidance, you will see the Off road message and an arrow. The arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination. The route is highlighted blue from the nearest road known to the system. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way. Route guidance from an off-map location to a destination If the vehicle position is outside the area covered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in an off-map location. COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination even from such a location. At the start of route guidance, you Due to road construction work, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle position on the digital map and thus considers the vehicle to be in an off-road position. The Off road message and an arrow indicating the compass heading to the destination appear in the display. As soon as the system can assign the vehicle position to the map again, route guidance continues in the usual way. Navigation announcements i Audible navigation announcements are muted during a telephone call. If you have missed an announcement, you can call up the current announcement at any time. X To call up a current announcement: select Navi Q +. or X Press the h programmable button if the button has been programmed with this function (Y page 172). X To switch off navigation announcements: press and hold the 8 button on the multi-function steering wheel. i The announcements remain switched off even if you start a new route guidance or if COMAND is switched off and on with the u button. The announcements are automatically switched back on if you switch COMAND off by removing the key * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:22; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 161 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) 161 from the ignition lock and then switch the ignition back on after more than 3 minutes. To switch navigation announcements back on manually: select Navi Q +. X To adjust the volume of the announcements: adjust the volume during an automatic announcement (Y page 68). or X Call up an announcement manually using Navi Q + and adjust the volume (Y page 68). Interrupting route guidance Make sure that the menu system is shown in the map display (Y page 135) X Select Destination Q Cancel route guidance. X Example display with main destination and intermediate stop : Distance to the intermediate stop ; Estimated time of arrival at the intermedi- ate stop = Estimated remaining driving time to the intermediate stop ? Intermediate stop A Distance to the main destination B Estimated time of arrival at the main des- Continuing interrupted route guidance Make sure that the menu system is shown in the map display (Y page 135). X Select Destination Q Continue route guidance. COMAND calculates the route. X Displaying information X Select Info in map view with the menu system displayed (Y page 135). * optional tination C Estimated remaining driving time to the main destination D Main destination i COMAND uses the time set in COMAND as the basis for calculating the estimated arrival time. For this reason, the clock must be set correctly in COMAND (Y page 170). The calculation of the estimated time of arrival does not additionally take into account whether summer time or standard time is applicable at the destination. If the destination is in a different time zone, time of arrival ; or B is displayed for the time set on the vehicle. The distance to destination, estimated time of arrival and estimated remaining driving time are not shown until the route calculation is complete. Z COMAND X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 162 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (route guidance) 162 Displaying route information COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:23; WK You can use Route info to display an overview and to view information and details about each section of the route. X Select Route Q Route info in map view with the menu system displayed (Y page 135). At the top of the display, you will see information about the highlighted route section, for example the road and the distance to be driven on the road. The highlighted route section is marked in white with a red border on the map. X To view the next or previous route section: select Next or Previous. X To increase or reduce the size of the map: select N or M. X To close the route info: select Back. Where am I? You can view your current position whether or not route guidance has been interrupted. Compass You can display the current compass direction heading in which the front of the vehicle is facing. : Current compass heading ; Geo-coordinates X Select Navi Q Position Q Compass. Displaying motorway information You can use this function to display upcoming motorway exits, filling stations, restaurants and similar types of information. : Current position ; Next junction or exit = Most recent junction or exit ? Current street X Select Navi Q Position Q Where am I?. To display or hide motorway information: select Navi. X Select or deselect Q Motorway infor‐ mation. X Traffic jam function The traffic jam function blocks a section of the route ahead of you. You can set the length * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:23; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 163 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation* route guidance with RDS-TMC Alternative route In addition to the route automatically displayed by COMAND, you can have other routes calculated and displayed. The original route is displayed in light blue; the alternative route appears in dark blue. Select Route Q Alternative route in the map view with the menu system (Y page 135) displayed. X To have alternative routes displayed: select Next. X Select Start. X Navigation* route guidance with RDSTMC Introduction to RDS-TMC An RDS-TMC radio station transmits free-ofcharge RDS-TMC traffic reports in addition to the radio programme. COMAND can receive the RDS-TMC traffic reports and take them into consideration for dynamic route guidance. Thus, for example, the navigation system can guide you around a traffic jam. In Germany, COMAND uses top-quality traffic data provided by T-Systems Traffic for the TMCpro traffic jam warning service. This information is available nationwide and 24 hours a day. In contrast to the public TMC service, TMCpro uses reports from public sources. Moreover, TMCpro utilises exclusive data from its own automated sensor network for monitoring traffic conditions. The traffic announcements which are read over public radio stations (TA) may differ from TMCpro traffic announcements. Dynamic route guidance The Dynamic route is the same type of route as the Fast route. In addition, COMAND takes RDS-TMC traffic announcements that have been received into consideration28 when calculating the route for dynamic route guidance. If a quicker route is determined due to reception of an RDS-TMC traffic announcement, the navigation system changes the route. If possible, it will bypass blockages. 28 Not available in all countries. * optional Z COMAND of the blockage. If possible, COMAND calculates a detour around the blocked section of the route. X Select Route Q Detour in map view with the menu system (Y page 135) displayed. X To set the length of the blockage: select Longer or Shorter repeatedly until the desired length is set. The blocked section is highlighted in red/ white on the map. At the top of the COMAND display, you will see which section of the route is blocked and the length of the blocked section. X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 151). X To delete the blockage: select Navi Q Route Q Detour Q Delete. X Select Back. 163 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:23; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 164 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation* route guidance with RDS-TMC 164 To switch on: set Dynamic route as the route type28. Proceed as described in the "Setting the route type" section (Y page 140). X To switch off: select a different route type. X COMAND i COMAND calculates a new route if you change the route type setting with route guidance active. If you change the route type setting when route guidance is inactive, COMAND uses the new setting for the next route guidance. If TMCpro is received, this is indicated by the TMCpro symbol at the lower right in the display. If a public TMC service is received, the TMC symbol appears at the lower right in the display. If RDS-TMC reception is not possible, no symbol will appear. RDS-TMC displays on the map COMAND can show certain traffic incidents on the map. These displays can be seen on map scales 50 m (0.05 miles) to 50 km (50 miles). X To set the map scale: turn cVd until the desired map scale is set. Turning clockwise enlarges the map, turning anti-clockwise reduces the map. Example display of a traffic jam on the route : Icon concerning an incident on the route: in this example, a traffic jam ; Section of route affected = Current position and direction of travel ? Map scale selected i COMAND uses corresponding sym- bols ; to highlight the entire section of the affected route. Symbols ; are displayed on the side of the carriageway affected by the incident. An overview of the possible symbol displays is shown below. : Traffic jam on the route (symbol has red ; = ? A 28 Not outline) Slow-moving traffic on the route (symbol has red outline) Road closure on the route Traffic jam Slow-moving traffic available in all countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:23; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 165 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (destination memory) Displaying RDS-TMC traffic reports Displaying the report list Select Navi Q TMC. COMAND searches for RDS-TMC stations. If no traffic reports are available, you will see a display to this effect. X To close the list: select OK. If stations are available, COMAND searches for traffic reports. You will see a display to this effect. X To cancel the search: select Cancel. If there are no traffic reports, you will see a display to this effect. X To close the list: select OK. If there are traffic reports, you will see a list. The content of the list varies depending on whether route guidance is active or not. 165 To read a message: select a road, an area or region. X To close the list: slide XVY. X X List when route guidance is not active When route guidance is not active, the list shows all the roads, areas or regions for which reports are available. Traffic symbol information can be used to display all traffic announcements on the map which are visible at the current scale. X Select Navi Q TMC Q Traffic symbol information. X To select between individual reports: select Next or Previous. X To display information on individual reports: select Details. Reading out RDS-TMC traffic reports You can have RDS-TMC traffic reports along the route read aloud automatically. Select Navi. Tick Read out traffic reports auto‐ matically. Traffic reports are only read out once. If you would like to have traffic reports read out again, this can be done as follows: X Select Navi Q TMC Q Read aloud all messages regarding route. X X X : Country designation (only appears if there are reports from different countries) ; Road concerned = Area or region concerned i A report may also relate to an area or region rather than a road, e.g. impaired visibility due to fog. * optional To end reading aloud: select End read‐ ing aloud in the read aloud menu. Navigation system* (destination memory) Own address The destination memory always contains an entry named My address. You may wish to assign your home address to this entry, for example. Z COMAND Traffic symbol information Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 166 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (destination memory) 166 Displaying My address Select Navi Q Destination Q From memory Q My address. The destination memory list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on the number of entries in the destination memory. The input speller is automatically activated in the destination memory list with an input speller. The My address entry is automatically highlighted in the list without an input speller. X Destination memory with input speller: slide ZVÆ repeatedly until the input speller disappears. The My address list entry is automatically highlighted unless you have entered a character using the input speller. X If characters have been entered using the input speller: turn cVd or slide ZV repeatedly until the My address list entry is highlighted. X Press the W button. or X Destination memory list without the input speller: press W If you have already stored your own address information, you will see the menu for starting route guidance using your own address for the address data when you press W, regardless of whether the input speller is displayed or not. X To exit the menu: select Back. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:23; WK Assigning data for the first time/editing My address X Select Navi Q Destination Q From memory. You will see the destination memory list with or without the input speller, depending on the number of entries in the destination memory. The input speller is automatically activated in the destination memory list with the input speller. The My address entry is automatically highlighted in the list without the input speller. X Destination memory with the input speller: slide ZV repeatedly until the input speller disappears. The My address list entry is automatically highlighted unless you have entered a character using the input speller. X If characters have been entered using the input speller: turn cVd or slide ZV repeatedly until the My address list entry is highlighted. X Press the W button. or X Destination memory list without the input speller: press W Subsequent operation depends on whether you enter the address manually or wish to use an address book entry for My address. Entering an address manually X To assign data to My address for the first time: select Save with name. or X To edit My address: select Edit Q Save with name. In both cases, the address input menu appears. X Enter the address. Proceed in the same way as you would enter a destination as described in the "Entering a destination by address" section (Y page 143). X Select Save after you have entered the address. Your address is stored. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:24; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 167 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (destination memory) i The name of the town and of the street in the address book entry must be spelled in the same way as in the destination entry so that the information matches the data on the digital map. The country in the address book can be written as follows so that it matches the data on the digital map: RCountry name spelled in the language of that country Renter a street (Y page 146) Renter a house number (Y page 148) If the data is complete and it matches the digital map data, COMAND stores the entry. Storing a destination in the destination memory This function also stores the destination in the address book. COMAND creates an address book entry that contains the complete, navigable address data. You can then select this entry in the address book and start route guidance to the address from there. After the address has been entered X During route guidance X RCountry name spelled in the language set as the system language RCountry name as an international country abbreviation for vehicles (e.g. D for Germany, E for Spain, F for France, I for Italy, etc.) COMAND stores the entry as My address in the destination memory if the address data is complete and matches the digital map data. If address data is missing or if it does not match the data on the digital map, a message will be displayed informing you that the address is incomplete. X To close the message: select OK. Depending on which data is missing or does not correspond with the digital map data, you must now: X Rselect Renter Select Save after you have entered the address (Y page 143). Select Destination Q Save destina‐ tion during route guidance. You can now select storage options. From the list of previous destinations Select Navi Q Destination Q From last destinations. The list of previous destinations appears. X Select the desired destination. The address of the destination is displayed. X Select Save. You can now select storage options. X a country (Y page 144) a town (Y page 144) * optional Z COMAND Using an address book entry for My address X To assign data to My address for the first time: select Assign address book entry. or X To edit My address: select ChangeQ Assign to address book entry. In both cases, the menu for searching for an address book entry appears. X Select the desired address book entry. Proceed as described in the "Calling up contacts/details" section (Y page 129). 167 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 168 Version: 2.11.7.7 Navigation system* (destination memory) 168 Selecting storage options Saving a destination with no name X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:24; WK Select Save without name. COMAND stores the destination in the destination memory and uses the address as the destination name. or X Select Save as My address. COMAND stores the destination in the destination memory as My address. Storing a destination with a name X X Select Save with name. Select the category desired, e.g. Home. The input menu containing data fields and the input speller appears. : Selected data field with cursor ; Input speller X To enter data: continue as described in the "Creating new contacts/changing contacts" section (Y page 129). Assigning a destination to an address book entry This function assigns the complete, navigable address data to an existing address book entry. You can then select this entry in the address book and start route guidance to the address from there. X Select Assign address book entry. X Select the desired category, e.g. Home. The menu for searching for an address book entry appears. Select the desired address book entry. Proceed as described in the "Calling up contacts" section (Y page 129). COMAND stores the data if the address book entry selected does not yet contain navigable address data. If the selected address book entry already contains navigable address data, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing data. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, COMAND stores the data. X Deleting a destination or your own address from the destination memory Select Navi Q Destination Q From memory. The destination memory list appears either with or without the input speller. Whether or not the input speller is displayed depends on the number of entries in the destination memory. X Select the destination you are looking for. Proceed as described in the "Entering a destination from the destination memory" section (Y page 151). X Select Delete. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the destination. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the destination. X i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned to an address book entry, COMAND will also delete this data from there. If the corresponding address book entry does not contain any further data, such as telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the entire address book entry. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:24; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 169 Version: 2.11.7.7 System General notes COMAND automatically stores the previous destinations for which the route calculation was launched. If the memory is full, COMAND deletes the oldest destination. You can also store one destination from the list of previous destinations in the destination memory. It will be stored there permanently. Deleting a previous destination Select Navi Q Destination Q From last destinations. The list of previous destinations appears. X Select the desired destination. The address of the destination appears. X Select Delete. X System Menu overview Storing a destination permanently in the destination memory X Proceed as described in the "From the list of previous destinations" section (Y page 167) You will not be able to use the system settings in the following menus: RDisplay Q Day design, Night design, Automatic RTime Q Clock, Date, Format, Time zone RLINGUATRONIC* Storing the vehicle position in the list of previous destinations To set the map to the vehicle position: select Navi Q Position Q Vehicle position map. X To save: select Navi Q Position Q Save crosshair position. X Q Help window, New individualisation, Delete individualisation RLanguage Q Language selection RFavourites ble button RReset tings RText button Q Assign programma- Q Reset COMAND to factory set- reader Q Set read-aloud speed RBluetooth® Q Search for Bluetooth® devi- Storing the crosshair position in the list of previous destinations i A crosshair appears on the map if you have moved the map manually. You can store the crosshair position as a destination in the list of previous destinations. ces, activate Bluetooth® RData upload/download Q Copy data to storage medium, import data from storage medium If necessary, display the menu system: press W. X Select PositionQSave crosshair position. X * optional Z COMAND Navigation system* (previous destinations) 169 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 170 Version: 2.11.7.7 System 170 Display settings Switching the display on or off To switch off: select Vehicle Q Dis‐ play off. X To switch back on again: turn cVd, slide ZVÆ, slide XVY or press W. or X Press the u button. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:24; WK Select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q Time. X To select hours or minutes: slide XVY. X To set the value: turn cVd or slide ZVÆ. X To save the setting: press W. X Setting the time zone i The navigation system* requires the correct time zone for destination guidance with time-dependent traffic guidance and for calculating the provisional arrival time. Display design X Select Vehicle Q System Q Display. To set the time zone: select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q Time zone. The country list appears. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the current setting. X Select the country in which you are currently driving. A time zone list may also be displayed, depending on the country selected. X Select the desired time zone. X Select summer time or standard time. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the current setting. X To store the setting and exit the menu: slide XVY. X X Select Day design or Night design or Automatic. i When the Automatic setting is selected, COMAND evaluates the readings from the automatic vehicle light sensor and switches between the display designs automatically. Time settings Setting the time Setting the date Select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q Date. X To select the month or year: slide XVY X To set the value: turn cVd or slide ZVÆ. X To save the setting: press W. X i The navigation system* requires the correct time for destination guidance with time-dependent traffic guidance and for calculating the provisional arrival time. The time can only be set in 30-minute increments. COMAND automatically sets the precise time. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:24; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 171 Version: 2.11.7.7 System Select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q Format. The format list appears. The # dots in front of the list entries indicate the current setting. X To change the format settings: select the desired format. X To store the setting and exit the menu: slide XVY. X Linguatronic* settings Switching the help window on or off Select Vehicle Q System Q Lingua‐ tronic. X Select Help window. You have switched the help window on or off. A tick appears when the help window is switched on. X Individualisation Using voice training, you can fine tune Linguatronic* to your own voice and thus improve voice recognition. The ability of the system to recognise the commands of other users does not deteriorate as a result. Voice training comprises two parts. You train the system to recognise digits in the first part and specific commands in the second part. Starting new individualisation i It is only possible to start individualisation when the vehicle is stationary. After starting the session, the system guides you through the training with spoken instructions. * optional Select Vehicle Q System Q Lingua‐ tronic Q Start new individualisa‐ tion. A prompt appears asking whether you would like further information. X Select Yes or No. If you select No, the first part of individualisation begins. If you select Yes, a message will be shown. X To close the list: select OK. The first part of individualisation begins. At the end of the first part, you will see a prompt asking whether you wish to begin the second part. X Select Yes or No. If you select No, individualisation will be cancelled. The data from the first part is stored automatically. If you select Yes, the second part will begin. Individualisation is completed at the end of the second part. You will see a message to this effect. The data from the second part is stored automatically. X Cancelling the first or second part of individualisation Select Cancel. A prompt appears asking whether you really do wish to cancel. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, individualisation will be cancelled. The data from the part cancelled is not stored. If you select No, the part during which you stopped begins again. X Z COMAND Setting the time/date format 171 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 172 Version: 2.11.7.7 System 172 Deleting existing individualisation data Select Vehicle Q System Q Lingua‐ tronic Q Delete individualisation. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to delete. X Select Yes or No. The individualisation data will either be deleted or not, depending on your selection. function for the driver's and frontpassenger seats on and off. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:25; WK Language settings Select Vehicle Q System Q Lan‐ guage. The language list appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X To change the setting: select the desired language. RDisplay off: you can switch the COMAND display off or on. RTow-away protection*: you can prime or deactivate tow-away protection*. RInterior motion sensor*: you can prime or deactivate the interior motion sensor*. RTow-away protection and interior motion sensor*: you can prime or deactivate tow-away protection and the interior motion sensor*. X Assigning the programmable button (favourites) RRepeat navigation command*: you can have the most recent recommendation by the navigation system* repeated. Select Vehicle Q System Q Favour‐ ite. The list of predefined functions appears. The # dot in front of the list entry indicates the current setting. X To change the setting: turn cVd and select the desired function. X To store the setting and exit the menu: press W. X Reset i You can reset COMAND to the factory : Programmable button You can assign the following predefined functions to the h programmable button: settings. This will delete all personal data (e.g. address book entries, entries in the destination memory* and in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system)*. RDriver's seat massage*: you can switch the massage function for the driver's seat on and off. RFront-passenger seat massage*: you can switch the massage function for the front-passenger seat on and off. RDriver's and front-passenger seat massage*: you can switch the massage * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:25; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 173 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle Opening the "Vehicle" menu from the main area in the centre of the display COMAND Select Vehicle Q System Q Reset. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to reset. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, a prompt will appear again asking whether you really wish to reset. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, COMAND will be reset and restarted. X Vehicle Introduction to the vehicle menu i Information about the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 62). : "Vehicle" menu item ; Main area X In this menu, you can set the following vehicle functions: RMulticontour RRear seat settings* window blind* REASY-ENTRY/EXIT lighting delayed switch-off time RInterior lighting delayed switch-off time RAmbient locking feature motion sensor* RTow-away RBoot folding mirror lighting RAutomatic RInterior Opening from the "Vehicle" menu lighting* RAutomatic RLocator Select Vehicle :. Main area ; is active. You can select individual vehicle functions by sliding XVY or turning cVd. feature RExterior protection* lid opening limiter* You can open the "Vehicle" menu in one of two ways. : "Vehicle" submenu X Select Vehicle Q Vehicle. "Vehicle" submenu : is opened. You can select the individual vehicle functions from this menu by sliding XVY or turning cVd and making your selection with W. In the next section, it is the first procedure that is always described. * optional 173 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 174 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle 174 Retracting/extending the rear window blind* ! Make sure that the rear window blind can move freely. Otherwise, the blind or other objects could be damaged. COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:26; WK Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Automatic mirror fold‐ ing menu: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To switch automatic mirror folding on/ off: press W. X i The rear window blind is switched off at temperatures below -20 †. Setting the easy-entry/exit feature G Risk of injury Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Rear window blind function: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To retract/extend the rear window blind: press W. X Folding in the exterior mirrors automatically In the Automatic mirror folding menu, you can set the exterior mirror so that it automatically folds in when the vehicle is locked. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of entrapment by the steering column, move the steering wheel adjustment lever or press the memory button. If there is a risk of entrapment by the seat, you can also cancel the adjustment procedure by moving the seat adjustment switch. The steering column and driver’s seat* stop moving immediately. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver’s door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY feature and become trapped as a result. You can make a setting in COMAND so that the steering wheel swings upwards and/or the driver's seat moves backwards before you get into the vehicle. You can make the following settings: ROff: the function is switched off. RSteering column: the steering wheel swings upwards. RSteering column and seat*: the steering wheel swings upwards and the driver’s seat moves backwards. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 175 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Easy-entry/exit fea‐ ture: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To select a setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X Setting the delayed switch-off time Interior lighting: you can set whether and for how long you wish the interior lighting to remain on in the dark after you have removed the key from the ignition lock. Exterior light: you can set whether and for how long you want the exterior lighting to remain on in the dark after the doors have been closed. The exterior lighting automatically switches off after the switch-off delay has elapsed. You may select from the following settings: R0 seconds: delayed switch-off is deactivated. Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Interior lighting delayed switch-off/Exterior light‐ ing delayed switch-off menu: slide XVY or turn cVd. A menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X To select a setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. The selected setting is indicated by a # dot. X Setting the ambient lighting* You can make the following settings: RSOLAR (yellow interior lighting) RNEUTRAL RPOLAR (white interior lighting) (blue interior lighting) RBrightness of the interior lighting on a scale of 0 (off) to 5 (bright) R15, 30, 45, 60 seconds: delayed switch-off is activated. i You can reactivate this function by opening a door within one minute. If none of the doors are opened after the key is removed from the ignition lock or if a door is not closed after it has been opened, the exterior lights switch off after 60 seconds. * optional Z 175 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:26; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 176 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle 176 Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Ambient lighting menu: slide XVY or turn cVd. A menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X To select a setting: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. The selected setting is indicated by a # dot. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:27; WK Switching the locator lighting on/off If you switch on the locator lighting, the following come on in the dark after you have unlocked the vehicle using the remote control: Rthe side lamps Rthe tail lamps Rthe licence plate lighting Rthe front foglamps Rthe lamps in the exterior mirror Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Locator lighting function: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To switch the locator lighting off or on: press W. X Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature You can use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking feature. If the automatic locking feature is activated, your vehicle will lock centrally from a speed of approximately 15 km/h. You will find further information about the automatic locking feature in the "Automatic locking feature" section (Y page 190). the locator lighting switches off again when you open the driver’s door. If you do not open the driver’s door, the locator lighting switches off automatically after 40 seconds. Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Automatic locking feature: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To switch the automatic locking feature off/on: press W. X Priming/deactivating the interior motion sensor* i You can assign this function to the programmable button (Y page 172). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:27; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 177 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic air conditioning 177 Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Interior motion sensor function: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To prime/deactivate the interior motion sensor: press W. COMAND Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening limiter* X Priming/deactivating tow-away protection* i You can assign this function to the programmable button (Y page 172). Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Tow-away protection function: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To prime/deactivate tow-away protection: press W. X * optional Select Vehicle. The main area is active. X To select the Boot lid opening lim‐ iter function: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To activate/deactivate the boot lid opening limiter: press W. X Automatic air conditioning Introduction to the automatic air conditioning You can operate the automatic air-conditioning system using COMAND or the buttons on the upper section of the centre console (Y page 277). Several special automatic air conditioning functions can only be adjusted using COMAND. You can access the menu for the automatic air-conditioning system via the air-conditioning function bar. To do so, make certain that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:27; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 178 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic air conditioning 178 Setting the air distribution COMAND You can set the air distribution separately for the driver’s side and for the front-passenger side. X Air-conditioning function bar Q Air distribution, select left ; or right B. Air-conditioning function bar : To set the temperature, left ; To set the air distribution, left = To set the airflow, left ? Air-conditioning main menu (Y page 179) A To set the airflow, right B To set the air distribution, right C To set the temperature, right Setting the temperature You can set the temperature separately for the driver’s and front-passenger side. X Air conditioning function bar Q select temperature, left : or right C. ¯ Directs air through the demister vents P Directs air through the centre and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell vents S Directs air through the centre, side and footwell vents a Directs air through the demister and footwell vents _ Directs air through the demister, centre, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the demister, centre and side air vents W Controls air distribution automatically To change the air distribution: turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X Setting the airflow To change the temperature: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X You can set the airflow separately for the driver’s side and for the front-passenger side. X Air-conditioning function bar Q Airflow, select left = or right A. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:28; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 179 Version: 2.11.7.7 To change the airflow: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X Main menu for the air-conditioning system Using COMAND, you can set additional functions that cannot be called up using the control panel in the centre console. Call up these functions using the air-conditioning menu. Air-conditioning main menu You can: Rswitch cooling with dehumidification on/ off (Æ) Rcontrol (Mono) Radjust Rset the air conditioning centrally the footwell temperature the Airflow for the air vents Roperate the Rear* air conditioning from the front Rset the Auxiliary time heating* departure Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off X To open the air-conditioning main menu: use the COMAND controller to select : on the air-conditioning function bar and press W. The "Air conditioning" submenu opens: * optional 179 COMAND Automatic air conditioning Cooling is operational when the engine is running and cools according to the selected interior temperature for the vehicle. Cooling also dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle and, thereby, prevents the windows from misting up. G Risk of accident If you deactivate the cooling function with air dehumidification, the vehicle will not be cooled in warm weather and the air will not be dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 180 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic air conditioning 180 i Condensation may collect on the under- side of the vehicle when the cooler is operating. Open the air-conditioning main menu via the air-conditioning function bar. X To switch on: select Æ and press W. X To switch off: select Æ and press W. A tick appears. X COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:28; WK Rchange settings for the automatic air-conditioning system on the front-passenger side using COMAND. Rpress a rocker switch to operate the automatic air-conditioning system on the frontpassenger side. Rpress one of the rocker switches on the rear-compartment control panel*. Adjusting the footwell temperature You can use the Footwell temperature function to set the temperature difference between the footwell and the rest of the vehicle interior. i This setting is quite effective in automatic Controlling the air conditioning centrally You can use the Mono function to set all the air-conditioning zones in the vehicle to the same settings. If the Mono function is switched on and you adjust the air conditioning on the driver’s side, these changes will also be made in all the air-conditioning zones. X Open the air-conditioning main menu via the air-conditioning function bar. X Select Mono and press W. A tick appears when the function is selected. The Mono function is automatically switched off if you: mode, especially at low outside temperatures. The greater the value you set, the higher the temperature in the footwell. X Open the air-conditioning main menu via the air-conditioning function bar. X Select Footwell temperature and press W. A scale appears. To change the temperature difference: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 181 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic air conditioning Adjusting the blower settings for the air vents This function allows you to determine the way the air is blown through the air vents in automatic mode. You can select: RFocused RMedium (high blower setting) (standard setting) RDiffuse Switching on operation of the rear-compartment air conditioning from the front X Open the air-conditioning main menu via the air-conditioning function bar. X Select Rear Y and press W. Rear appears in the main menu on the airconditioning function bar. The rear-compartment air conditioning can be controlled from the front. (low blower setting) i This setting is quite effective in automatic mode, especially at high outside temperatures. If the vehicle has become very warm and the automatic air-conditioning system is cooling the interior, the blower settings are briefly suspended. X Open the air-conditioning main menu via the air-conditioning function bar. X Select Airflow and press W. A menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. Air-conditioning function bar for the air-conditioning system in the rear compartment : Temperature in the rear compartment, left ; Air distribution in the rear compartment, left = Airflow in the rear compartment ? Main menu for the rear-compartment air conditioning A Air distribution in the rear compartment, right B Temperature in the rear compartment, right To change the airflow: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X Operating the rear-compartment air conditioning from the front* The rear-compartment air conditioning is operated in the same way as the air conditioning for the driver and front passenger. * optional Main menu for the rear-compartment air conditioning In the main menu for the rear-compartment air conditioning, you can: Rswitch back to operation of the front airconditioning system Rswitch tioning off the rear-compartment air condi- Rswitch automatic mode for the rear-compartment air conditioning on/off Z 181 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:29; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:29; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 182 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic air conditioning 182 To open the air-conditioning main menu: select and press W in the air-conditioning function bar. ing main menu, select Auxiliary heat‐ ing, departure time and press W. COMAND X The current setting is indicated by a # dot. To switch back from operation of the rearcompartment air conditioning from the front: X In the air conditioning main menu, select Front climate control and press W. The air-conditioning function bar shows the air conditioning settings for the driver and front passenger. To switch off the rear-compartment air conditioning: X In the air conditioning main menu, select Rear climate control and press W. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further 5 minutes and then switches off. Selecting a departure time X In the air-conditioning main menu, select Auxiliary heating, departure time and press W. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. To switch on automatic mode for the rearcompartment air conditioning: X In the air conditioning main menu, select Rear automatic and press W. Automatic mode for the rear-compartment air conditioning is switched on. Auxiliary heating* departure time You can use the Auxiliary heating, departure time function to: Renter a departure time at which the vehicle is preheated by the auxiliary heating Rselect a time from the three stored departure times X Select the desired departure time and press W. The yellow indicator lamp lights up on the button for the auxiliary heating on the centre console. A selected departure time is only initiated once and is not repeated daily. Once the departure time has been reached, the system switches back to the No pre-selection option. X To select the auxiliary heating departure time submenu: in the air-condition* optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 183 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats Deselecting a departure time X In the air-conditioning main menu, select Auxiliary heating, departure time and press W. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X The lumbar support in the backrest of the driver's and front-passenger seats can be adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. X To select the seat: press the T function button. The main area of the COMAND display is active. A scale appears. Select No pre-selection and press W. Entering a departure time X In the air-conditioning main menu, select Auxiliary heating, departure time and press W. X Select Set time and press W. To move to the lower menu bar: slide ZVÆ. X To confirm your selection: press W. X i When you press the T function button, the previously adjusted seat is active. To adjust the lumbar support: slide XVY or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To confirm your selection: press W. X To change the hours or minutes: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To switch between hours and minutes: slide XVY. X To store the departure time: press W. X Seats Lumbar support i Information about the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 62). * optional Multicontour seat* i Information about the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 62). The contour of the driver's seat and frontpassenger seat backrests can be individually adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. This is achieved by controlling the pressure in the air chambers in the multicontour seat. The adjustments are made using the COMAND display. Z 183 COMAND 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:29; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 184 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats 184 i When you adjust the multicontour seat, you may hear the air being pumped in or released. You can adjust the following air cushions: COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:30; WK or X Select another main function from the basic menu. Rseat side bolsters Display values Rseat backrest side bolsters Two values are displayed on the setting scale if you adjust the multicontour seat: RRed: this is the set value which you specify when making the adjustment. Rbackrest curvature in the lumbar region Rbackrest curvature in the upper back region Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the T function button. RWhite: this is the current actual value, which is slowly brought into line with the set value. X Selecting the seat You must first select the seat for which you wish to make adjustments. X Press the T function button. The main area is active. X To move to the lower menu bar: slide ZVÆ. X X To select a seat: slide XVY or turn cVd. To confirm your selection: press W. Exiting the menu There are several ways of exiting the menu for the multicontour seat: X Press the T function button again. or X Press any function button. Adjusting the seat side bolsters This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the seat side bolsters. X Select the seat (Y page 184). X To select Seat sides: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. A scale appears. Slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X Adjusting the seat backrest side bolsters This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the seat backrest side bolsters. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:30; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 185 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats 185 Select the seat (Y page 184). To select the Backrest sides: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. A scale appears. X Slide ZVÆ or XVY until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X Slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X Adjusting the backrest curvature in the lumbar region This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest. X Select the seat (Y page 184). X To select Lumbar: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. A crosshair appears. You can make two settings: RVertical: to move the point of greatest lumbar support up or down Adjusting the backrest curvature in the upper back region This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the upper back region of the backrest. X Select the seat (Y page 184). X To select Shoulders: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. A scale appears. RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of sup- port Slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X Resetting adjustments You can reset the seat settings to the factory settings. Z COMAND X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 186 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats 186 Select the seat (Y page 184). Select Reset all settings: slide or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. COMAND 03. Mar 2009 15:17:30; WK Select the seat (Y page 184). To select Massage: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. A list appears. You can select different types of massage function: X X X X Active multicontour seat* The dynamic function of the active multicontour seat automatically adapts the side bolsters of the backrest to your current driving style. X Select the seat (Y page 184). X To select Driv. dyn. seat: slide XVY or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. A scale appears. You can select: R0: Off R1: Level 1 R2: Level 2 R0: Off R1: Slow and gentle R2: Slow and vigorous R3: Fast and gentle R4: Fast and vigorous Slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. The massage function runs for approximately 6 to 20 minutes, depending on the setting. X Slide ZVÆ or turn cVd until the desired setting is reached. X To save the setting: press W. X Massage function (PULSE)* The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 187 Version: 2.11.7.7 187 Opening and closing ......................... Boot .................................................... Key positions .................................... Seats .................................................. Steering wheel .................................. Mirrors ............................................... 188 190 192 193 199 201 Memory functions* ........................... Seat belts ........................................... Lights ................................................. Windscreen wipers ........................... Side windows .................................... Driving and parking .......................... Automatic transmission ................... Instrument cluster ............................ On-board computer .......................... Driving systems ................................ Air conditioning ................................. Sliding sunroof .................................. Loading and stowing ........................ Features ............................................. 202 203 207 214 214 217 221 227 228 243 276 290 294 301 Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:31; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 188 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 188 Version: 2.11.7.7 Opening and closing Opening and closing Key automatically relock after approximately 40 seconds. The key centrally locks/unlocks: KEYLESS GO* Rthe doors Rthe boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's door handles, KEYLESS GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key. The distance to the vehicle's door handle from which you wish to lock or unlock the vehicle must not be greater than 1 m. When starting the engine and whilst driving, KEYLESS GO also checks whether a valid key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact. G Risk of accident Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:32; WK If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. : Battery check lamp To unlock the vehicle: pull the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. If you pull on the handle of the boot lid, only the boot of the vehicle is unlocked. ; & To lock the vehicle i If the vehicle has been parked for a long X = F To unlock the boot lid ? % To unlock the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in COMAND. If you do not open either a door or the boot lid after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will time, the sensor surfaces are deactivated automatically. Pull on the door handle to unlock the door and switch on the ignition once to reactivate the sensors. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 189 Version: 2.11.7.7 Opening and closing You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This could be useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Opening the doors from the inside You can open a door from the inside even if it has been locked, unless the child-proof locks have been activated (Y page 51). Controls Individual settings The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X The KEYLESS GO* function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: pull the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle on the front-passenger door or on the rear doors. X To lock centrally: touch sensor surface : on one of the door handles. X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X Restoring the factory settings X Press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Additional information RConvenience opening (Y page 216) RConvenience closing (Y page 216) Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This feature may be useful if, for example, you wish to unlock the frontpassenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. G Risk of accident Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside – even if it is locked – and thereby endanger themselves and others. ROpening and closing in an emergency (Y page 392) * optional 189 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 190 Version: 2.11.7.7 Boot 190 X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. Power closing (boot lid) X Automatic locking Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:33; WK Lightly push closed the boot lid. The power closing mechanism will pull the boot lid closed completely. The vehicle will lock automatically once you have pulled away. You can switch the automatic locking function on and off using COMAND (Y page 176). Boot i The vehicle is locked automatically when G Risk of poisoning the ignition is switched on and the wheels begin to turn. There is a risk of being locked out when the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a dynamometer. Power closing feature The power closing mechanism pulls the doors* and boot lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the doors and boot lid. If there is a danger of being trapped, pull the door handle on the inside or outside or press on the boot lock. Do not activate the power closing function by tampering with the lock mechanism. You could otherwise injure yourself. G Risk of accident Make sure that the doors and boot lid are always fully closed. Otherwise, a door or the boot lid could open during the journey and endanger yourself or others. Points to remember Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually (Y page 190) Ropened and closed* automatically from outside (Y page 191) Ropened and closed* automatically from inside (Y page 192) Opening and closing manually X To open: press the % button on the key. Power closing (doors)* X Push the door into the first detent position of the lock. The power closing mechanism will pull the door closed completely. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 191 Version: 2.11.7.7 Boot X Pull handle :. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the boot lid. 191 Insert the emergency key element fully into the tailgate lock. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Remove the emergency key element. X Opening the spare wheel bracket You can open the boot lid with the key. G Risk of injury X To close: pull down the tailgate using one of recesses :. Locking the boot separately You can lock the boot separately.29 If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 392). Monitor the boot lid opening and closing procedures to make sure that nobody can become trapped. To halt the opening or closing procedure, press the closing button* in the boot lid again or pull the handle on the outside of the boot lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. Closing the spare wheel bracket You can close the boot lid automatically by using the closing button30 or locking button31. To close: press closing button : in the boot lid. X To close and lock simultaneously: X 29 Not available in all countries. on vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature. 31 Only on vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS GO. 30 Only * optional Z Controls Automatically opening/closing* the vehicle from inside Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:34; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 192 Version: 2.11.7.7 Key positions 192 Press locking button ; in the boot lid. i If you leave a KEYLESS GO key* in the boot, the boot lid will not lock. Key positions Key Controls Automatically opening/closing* the vehicle from inside You can open/close the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Release the boot lid remote operating button to stop the closing procedure. g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i Even if the key is not for the vehicle in question, it will still turn in the ignition lock. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. X To open: press remote operating button for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is closed. KEYLESS GO* If you press the Start/Stop button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal, its function corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 193 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to "key removed". X Position 1: press Start/Stop button : once. It is now possible to switch on the windscreen wipers, for example. X i If you open the driver's door in this position, the power supply is disconnected again. Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. Seats Points to remember G Risk of injury The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could become trapped when adjusting a seat. G Risk of accident i If you press Start/Stop button : in this Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. Removing the Start/Stop button G Risk of injury X position once and the driver's door is open, the power supply is disconnected again. You can remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock and start the vehicle with a key as usual. i You do not need to remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you adjust the seat. Observe the notes concerning the airbag system. Secure children as recommended; see "Children in the vehicle" section. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. i The head restraints in the front seats are X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. 193 fitted with the NECK-PRO system. For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. For design reasons, the rear-compartment head restraints cannot be removed. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. i If you switch from key mode to KEYLESS GO mode, the system requires a two-second recognition period before you can use the Start/Stop button. Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:34; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 194 03. Mar 2009 15:17:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 194 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not engaged Adjusting the seat electrically Rno occupant is detected on the frontpassenger seat Controls Rthe vehicle is stationary When the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock, the front-passenger seat head restraint moves back to the original position if the front-passenger seat belt is engaged or an occupant is detected on the front-passenger seat. 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height i To ensure the largest possible range of seat settings, certain seat adjustment functions will automatically activate other seat adjustment functions. 3 Seat cushion angle 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 6 Backrest angle i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the NECK-PRO head restraints Adjusting front-passenger seat and the electrically adjustable rear seats* are brought into a more favourable position. i Vehicles with memory function*: the settings for the seats can be stored with the memory function* (Y page 202). G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. i The head restraint height is automatically adjusted relative to the seat fore-and-aft adjustment. X Pull or push the bottom of NECK-PRO head restraint 1. Resetting The NECK-PRO head restraints are moved forwards in the event of a rear collision in the direction of travel and have to be reset afterwards (Y page 394). i When the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock, the front-passenger seat head restraint is lowered, if: * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 195 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats G Risk of injury When adjusting a front-passenger seat that is occupied, make sure that it is as far away from the front-passenger airbag as possible. The front passenger could otherwise sustain serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or braking manoeuvre. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when adjusting the seat. The front-passenger seat can be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could become trapped if the seats move. NECK-PRO luxury head restraints* Adjusting G Risk of injury When folding back the side cushions, do not hold the area between the side cushion and the cushion holder. There is a danger of becoming trapped. Controls Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver’s seat* You can use the seat switches on the driver's side to adjust the front-passenger seat. You can adjust side cushions 1 of the NECKPRO luxury head restraints individually. X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull side bolsters 1 into the desired position. X To move forwards and backwards: pull or push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints in the direction of arrow 2. To activate/deactivate: press button 1. If the indicator lamp in button 1 is lit, you can access the following functions for the front-passenger seat: Rseat adjustment X Rseat heating/ventilation* Rmemory function* Resetting During a rear impact in the direction of travel the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints are moved forward and must then be readjusted (Y page 394). Multicontour seat* You can adjust the multi-contour seat using COMAND (Y page 183). Lumbar support You can adjust the lumbar support using COMAND (Y page 183). * optional 195 Active multicontour seat* You can adjust the active multi-contour seat using COMAND (Y page 186). Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 196 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 196 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air pressure in the air chambers (the side cushions of the seat cushion and backrest) of the multi-contour seat* or active multi-contour seat* is increased. Rear seats Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:36; WK Electrically adjustable outer seats in the rear* Adjusting the head restraint angle X Slide button ? to the left or right in the direction of the arrow. Head restraints in the rear compartment G Risk of injury On a seat which is occupied, pull the head restraint up into the upright position. This reduces the risk of injury to the passenger in the event of an accident. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when folding the head restraints up or back. Folding back You can use the button in the centre console to fold the head restraints up or back. Seat cushion angle X Slide button : upwards or downwards in the direction of the arrow. Backrest angle and seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Slide button ; or button A in the direction of the arrow to the left or right. G Risk of injury A seat belt can only offer its intended degree of protection when the backrest is almost vertical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that interfere with the correct routing of the seat belt. Adjust the backrest so that it is as upright as possible. Never travel with the backrest inclined too far backwards. Otherwise, you could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Folding the head restraint up or back X Slide button = upwards or downwards in the direction of the arrow. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. The rear-compartment head restraints are folded back. X Folding into position electrically (outer head restraints)* When a passenger in the rear compartment engages the seat belt, the head restraint of that outer seat folds into position automatically. X Press and hold button : until the head restraints have folded into position. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:37; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 197 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull side bolsters : into the desired position. X To adjust the head restraint angle: hold the head restraint by the upper edge and slide it forwards or back in the direction of arrow ;. X Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the rear* G Risk of injury X Pull the head restraint up until it engages. G Risk of injury Make sure that the head restraints engage fully. Otherwise, the back of the rear passenger's head is not supported in the event of a rear collision. As a result, the passenger could be injured. Adjusting the luxury head restraints* G Risk of injury When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of becoming trapped. You can adjust side bolsters : of the luxury head restraint individually. When adjusting a front-passenger seat that is occupied, make sure that it is as far away from the front-passenger airbag as possible. The front passenger could otherwise sustain serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or braking manoeuvre. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when adjusting the seat. The front-passenger seat can be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could become trapped if the seats move. You can use the override button to disable this function (Y page 51). The button is located in the rear door on the front-passenger side. : To select the front-passenger seat or rear- compartment seat ; Seat height = Head restraint height * optional Z Controls Folding into position manually (centre head restraint) 197 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 198 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seats 198 ? Backrest angle A Seat fore-and-aft adjustment To select the front-passenger seat: press button :. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up. X Adjust the front-passenger seat with buttons ;, =, ? and A. X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:37; WK ! Do not move the front-passenger seat completely to the front if you are transporting luggage in the luggage net in the frontpassenger footwell. This could otherwise damage the luggage. X To select the rear-compartment seat: press button :. The rear-compartment seat is selected again. Multi-contour seat in the rear* You can use the buttons in the centre console to adjust the multi-contour seats for the outer seats in the rear-compartment. Seat backrest side cushions X To narrow: push rocker switch B forwards. X To broaden: pull rocker switch B backwards. Backrest contour X To increase the curvature: push rocker switch A forwards. X To decrease the curvature: pull rocker switch A backwards. Position of the backrest contour X To move up: push rocker switch ? forwards. X To move down: pull rocker switch ? backwards. Gentle massage X To activate: push rocker switch = forwards. X To deactivate: pull rocker switch = backwards. Strong massage X To activate: push rocker switch ; forwards. X To deactivate: pull rocker switch ; backwards. Seat ventilation* Selecting a rear-compartment seat X Slide rocker switch : or C forwards or backwards. The indicator lamp in the selected button lights up briefly. The three blue indicator lamps in the button indicate the ventilation level you have selected. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 199 Version: 2.11.7.7 Steering wheel 199 The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly until the required ventilation level is set. X i If you open the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* using the key (Y page 216), the seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Seat heating* The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Steering wheel Points to remember G Risk of injury The electrically adjustable steering wheel can be adjusted when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle as they could become trapped as the steering wheel is adjusted. G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. Otherwise, you might drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position and be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. i The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. * optional Z Controls X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 200 Version: 2.11.7.7 Steering wheel 200 When you adjust the steering wheel, make sure that: Rthe steering wheel can be reached with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:38; WK Adjusting the steering wheel To switch on or off: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the lever in direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. X i The steering wheel heating is switched off automatically after about 24 minutes. Easy-entry/exit feature The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver's seat* slides back if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door when the key is in the ignition lock or in position 1 i The steering wheel only moves upwards : Fore-and-aft adjustment ; Height adjustment Press the lever in the direction of arrow : or ; until the steering wheel is in the desired position. You can find more information under: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 200) X RStoring settings*(Y page 202) if it has not already reached the upper end stop. The driver's seat only moves backwards if it is not already in the rearmost position. If you insert the key into the ignition with the driver's door* closed, the position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat will be changed to the last selected position. i The adjustment procedure stops when you begin driving. G Risk of injury Steering wheel heating* Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of entrapment by the steering column, move the steering wheel adjustment lever or press the position button of the memory function. If there is a risk of entrapment by the seat, you can also cancel the adjustment procedure by moving the seat adjustment switch. The steering column and driver's seat* stop moving immediately. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 201 Version: 2.11.7.7 Mirrors 201 Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and, thereby, unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY feature and become trapped. The last driving position of the steering wheel or the seat* is saved if: Rthe ignition is switched off Ra memory position* is stored. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature using COMAND (Y page 174). i The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT fea- ture* can only be activated after an accident if the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activated in the on-board computer. When the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering wheel column will move upwards irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle or rescue the occupants. Mirrors Exterior mirrors G Risk of accident Adjusting the exterior mirrors Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 2 for the right-hand exterior mirror or button 4 for the left-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. X Press adjustment button 1 up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirror is set in a way which provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. Vehicles with memory function*: you can find further information in the "Saving settings" section (Y page 202). X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button 3. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. At low outside temperatures the exterior mirrors are heated automatically. If the corresponding function is activated in COMAND (Y page 174): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat- ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and * optional Z Controls or Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 202 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 202 Version: 2.11.7.7 Memory functions* then open the driver's or front-passenger door i The mirrors do not fold out if they were folded in manually. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:39; WK The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting is switched on. G Risk of accident If the incident light from headlamps cannot strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, when the rear window blind* is extended, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then dazzle you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions, and you may, thereby, cause an accident. In this case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually. the contour of the backrest in the lumbar and shoulder regions Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides G Risk of injury The memory function can still be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Otherwise, they could become trapped when moving the seat or the steering wheel. G Risk of accident Only use the memory function on the driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result cause an accident. Memory functions* Storing settings Using the memory button you can store up to three different settings, e. g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the backrest in the lumbar region Ractive multicontour seat*: activated/deac- tivated Rmulticontour seat*: the side bolsters of the seat cushion and the backrest as well as Adjust the seat (Y page 193). On the driver's side, also adjust the steering wheel (Y page 199) and the mirrors (Y page 201). X Press memory button M and press storage position switch 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds until you hear an acknowledgement tone. The settings are stored in the selected storage position. X X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 203 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seat belts X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i If you shift the automatic transmission into another gear, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position. i You can also store the parking position using the memory button M :: i If you release the storage position switch, With the key in position 2 in the ignition lock and with the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustment button ; to set the exterior mirror such that the rear wheel and kerb are visible. X Press memory button M : and one of the arrows on adjustment button ; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The multicontour seat* setting or the lumbar support adjustment are still carried out. X Storing a parking position To make it easier to park, you can set and store the front-passenger side exterior mirror position in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. Setting and storing the parking position Calling up the parking position When the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side is activated, engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 10 km/h X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. X * optional Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button ? for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Seat belts Wearing seat belts Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This Z Controls Calling up a stored setting 203 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 204 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 204 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seat belts reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with the vehicle interior. G Risk of injury Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:39; WK A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances, this could result in severe or even fatal injuries. Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must pass closely over your body and must not be twisted. Therefore, you should avoid wearing bulky clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder belt section must be routed across the middle of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident, and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, they always should be secured in a suitable child restraint system on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting the child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G Risk of injury If the backrest is not almost vertical, the seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G Risk of injury A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or which has been modified no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:40; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 205 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seat belts 205 Seat-belt adjustment* Depending on its specifications, your vehicle may be equipped with a belt adjustment function. The belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: engage the belt tongue in the buckle and then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. Fastening the belt Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 193). X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Route the belt over the centre of the shoulder without twisting it. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Depending on its specifications, the vehicle may be equipped with a belt adjustment function*: the belt adjusts automatically to the upper body shape of the occupants of the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 205). X If necessary, adjust the belt to the appropriate height (Y page 206). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the belt to tighten the belt across your body. X * optional The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the belt sash. The belt should not be held during the adjustment. You can switch the belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 243). Unfastening the belt X Press release button ? and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide :. Belt warning for driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all occupants should fasten their seat belts. It is either lit continuously or flashes. Additionally, there may be a warning tone. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases as soon as the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger already have their seat belt fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine has been started. It Z Controls Ryou Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 206 Version: 2.11.7.7 Seat belts 206 then goes out if both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. i Further information about the 7 seat belt warning lamp (Y page 381). Belt height adjustment Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:41; WK You can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat. Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be routed across the middle of your shoulder. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multi-function display for around 30 seconds if: Ryou set off and have reached a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while driving. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle. You can also cancel the messages immediately (Y page 342). The following messages appear in the multifunction display: R7 No rear seat belt engaged R7 1 rear seat belt engaged R7 2 rear seat belts engaged R7 3 rear seat belts engaged i The status indicator for the rear-compart- ment seat belts is only available for certain countries. To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold release button :. X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Release release button : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. X Rear seat belt status indicator The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator tells you if any of the rear passengers do not have their seat belt fastened. The status indicator also tells you how many of the belt tongues are inserted into the seat belt buckles. Correct driver's seat position Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:41; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 207 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights G Risk of accident Make sure that: Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. Otherwise, you might drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position and be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. X Check whether seat = and the head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 193). Make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's front airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. X arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- ment cluster clearly. X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 203). It should: Rfit Controls G Risk of accident 207 snugly across your body. Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints. Lights Light switch For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, daytime operation of headlamps varies due to legal and voluntary requirements. In these countries, daytime driving lights are automatically switched on when the engine is started. i If you drive in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered, oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps. Have the headlamps changed to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in these countries. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Check whether steering wheel : is adjusted properly (Y page 199). Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:41; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 208 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights 208 Controls Daytime driving lights 1 W Left-hand parking lamp 2 X Right-hand parking lamp 3 $ Lights off/daytime driving lights 4 c Automatic headlamp mode/day- time driving lights 5 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment lighting 6 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps 7 N Foglamps32 8 R Rear foglamp i The exterior lighting (except for side lamps and parking lamps) automatically switches off when you remove the key from the ignition lock or open the driver's door while the ignition is switched off (ignition key in position 0). ! Switch off the side lamps and parking lamp when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. Dipped-beam headlamps Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X To switch on: turn the light switch to L. The T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X You can activate or deactivate "daytime driving lights" using the on-board computer (Y page 241). X To switch on: turn the light switch to $ or c. Engine start: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. Automatic headlamp mode G Risk of accident If the light switch is set to the c position, the light will not come on automatically in foggy conditions. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to L in the dark or in fog. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. G Risk of accident When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch from c to L in good time. Otherwise, the headlamps could switch off temporarily and you could cause an accident. X To switch on: turn the light switch to c. Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamp is switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. Engine start: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights33 or the side lamp and the dippedbeam headlamps are switched on or off automatically. 32 Only vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps without the Intelligent Light System* are equipped with front foglamps. 33 If you have activated the "Daytime driving lights" function in the on-board computer. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:42; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 209 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights Foglamps (bi-xenon headlamps without the Intelligent Light System*) G Risk of accident If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to L before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could endanger yourself and others. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: turn the light switch to L or T. If the light switch is set to c, you cannot switch on the foglamps. X Pull the light switch out to the first detent. The N green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off: press the light switch in as far as it will go. The N green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X On vehicles without foglamps Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: turn the light switch to L. When the light switch is set to c, you cannot switch on the rear foglamp. X Pull the light switch out to the stop. The R yellow indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X To switch off: press the light switch in as far as it will go. The R yellow indicator lamp on the light switch goes out. X Combination switch (turn signals, main-beam headlamps and headlamp flasher) Rear foglamp On vehicles with foglamps Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: turn the light switch to L or T. When the light switch is set to c, you cannot switch on the rear foglamp. X Pull the light switch out to the second stop. The R yellow indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X To switch off: press the light switch in as far as it will go. The R yellow indicator lamp on the light switch goes out. X * optional Turn signals X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp ! or # in the instrument cluster flashes. i If you only wish to indicate a minor change of direction, press the combination switch briefly in the respective direction. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. Z Controls When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. 209 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 210 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights 210 Manual main-beam headlamps Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X To switch on: turn the light switch to L. X Press the combination switch in the direction of arrow :. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:42; WK Adaptive Highbeam Assist* Depending on the road and traffic conditions, the headlamp range control of the dippedbeam headlamps and the main-beam headlamps is controlled using an optical sensor located at the front of the overhead control panel. This reduces the glare to other road users and improves the illumination of the road. There is no sudden change in light intensity during the transition from dipped-beam to main-beam headlamps. G Risk of accident Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vision and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or deactivated: Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rif the area of the windscreen around the optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered up, e.g. by a sticker. The system may not recognise the following road users: RRoad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedestrians RRoad users that have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists RRoad users whose lighting is not clearly visible, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier ROn rare occasions, road users that have lights may be recognised too late or not at all. The automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated, or they may be activated despite road users travelling in front of, or approaching, the vehicle. Thus, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Always observe traffic conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights manually. To activate: activate Adaptive Highbeam Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 242). X Turn the light switch to c. X Press the combination switch in the direction of arrow :. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you are driving faster than 55 km/h and no other road users are recognised, the main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving slower than 45 km/h and other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit, the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster stays on. Adaptive control of the headlamp X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 211 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights range adjustment starts at a speed of approximately 40 km/h. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamp flasher X To switch on: briefly pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. Hazard warning lamps system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Intelligent Light System* The Intelligent Light System is a system which adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. The bi-xenon headlamps offer enhanced functions to improve illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light system, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. Active light system The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. They switch on automatically if an airbag is deployed or if you brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a halt from a speed of more than 70 km/h. X To switch on: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch (Y page 209), only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. To switch off: press button :. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning * optional 211 Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:42; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Controls 212 03. Mar 2009 15:17:43; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 212 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights Cornering light Motorway mode The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road surface in the broad direction you are turning, e.g. making it easier to see in tight corners. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signal or by the steering wheel being turned. Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light function is activated by the steering wheel being turned. Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for 1,000 m. RIf you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h. Motorway mode remains active unless your speed drops speeds below 80 km/h. Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h. Extended range foglamps Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 70 km/h or you switch off the turn signal or move the steering wheel to the straightahead position. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving more slowly than 70 km/h and switch on the rear foglamp. If your speed does not exceed 100 km/h, the extended foglamp function remains active. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:43; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 213 Version: 2.11.7.7 Lights Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or you switch off the rear foglamp. Interior lighting 213 p To switch the reading lamp off = Interior lighting Automatic interior lighting control To switch on/off: press the | button. The OFF indicator lamp goes out/lights up. The interior lighting switches on automatically in darkness, when you unlock the vehicle, open a door or remove the key from the ignition lock. The interior lighting switches off after a delay. You can set the delayed switch-off using COMAND (Y page 175). If the door is left open, the interior lighting goes out after approximately five minutes. Front overhead control panel : p To switch the left-hand reading lamp ; = ? A on/off u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off c To switch the front interior lighting on/off | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off Emergency accident lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off: press the hazard warning lamp button (Y page 211). or X Unlock the vehicle using the key. or X Press the | button (Y page 213). Rear-compartment overhead control panel : Reading lamp ; p To switch the reading lamp and inte- rior lighting on p To switch the reading lamp on Z Controls X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:44; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 214 Version: 2.11.7.7 Side windows 214 Windscreen wipers Side windows Opening and closing the side windows Controls G Risk of injury Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low34 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high35 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î To wipe the wind- screen using washer fluid ! With intermittent wiping with rain sensor: Due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position and therefore the windscreen wiper will wipe more frequently. X 34 Rain 35 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. sensor set to high sensitivity. When opening the side windows, make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame. Keep clear of the side window during the opening procedure. Otherwise, you could be drawn in or trapped between the side window and the door frame by the downwards movement of the window. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or pull it upwards to close the side window again. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a hinged window. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or press it again to open the side window again. G Risk of injury Children may injure themselves if they operate the side windows. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures Rpress the central unlocking switch and thereby override the child-proof locks and open the door Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:44; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 215 Version: 2.11.7.7 Side windows Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle and injure themselves, or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks/override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. i Related topics: Rconvenience opening from the outside (Y page 216) or from the inside (Y page 285) closing from the outside (Y page 216) or from the inside (Y page 285) X i You can continue to operate the side windows when you switch off the engine. This function remains active for five minutes or until one of the front doors is opened. i The switches on the driver's door take precedence over the switches on the other doors. X X the controls in the rear compartment (override feature) (Y page 51) Rautomatic closing of the side windows page 44) (PRE-SAFE®) (Y To open: press the corresponding switch. To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. Rconvenience Rdisabling Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature G Risk of injury Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window is blocked during closing and reopens slightly: X : Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. Immediately after the window blocks, pull on the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window blocks again during closing and reopens slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull on the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Z Controls If children open a door, they could: 215 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 216 Version: 2.11.7.7 Side windows 216 Sun blinds* on the rear side windows To close fully: pull the corresponding switch when the side window is closed. X To open fully: press the corresponding switch. X Convenience opening Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:44; WK You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey. To do this, you can use the key to simultaneously: Ropen the side windows Ropen the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds* Rswitch on the seat ventilation* of the driver's seat i The "Convenience opening" feature can only be operated using the key. sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are in the desired position. Convenience closing When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows Rclose the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* On vehicles with roller sunblinds*, you can then close the roller sunblinds*. G Risk of injury When using the convenience closing feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: Rrelease the & button. Rpress the % button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* and the roller sunblinds* open again. With KEYLESS GO*: Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- dle. Rpull Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the % button. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are in the desired position. X the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* and the roller sunblinds* open. If one of the sunblinds* is closed, the sunblind* will open first. X Press and hold the % button again until the side windows and the sliding/tilting * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:45; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 217 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving and parking Using the key 217 ing/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are closed. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Lock the vehicle with the & button. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are closed. Touch the sensor surface on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds* close. X On vehicles with roller sunblinds*: X Press the & button again until the roller sunblinds* close. Using KEYLESS GO* Driving and parking Starting the engine G Risk of accident Do not put any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that they are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. Otherwise, the objects or floormats could get between the pedals in the event of sudden braking or acceleration. You may then no longer be able to brake, change gear or accelerate as intended. This may result in an accident and injury. G Risk of poisoning Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal X Touch the sensor surface on door handle : until the side windows and the slid- * optional when starting the engine. Z Controls On vehicles with roller sunblinds*: Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:45; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 218 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving and parking 218 Automatic transmission Starting the engine using KEYLESS GO* G Risk of injury Controls Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS GO* key. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the key in the ignition lock. DIRECT SELECT lever P Park position with parking lock N Neutral R Reverse gear D Drive position X Before starting, make sure P is selected. i The engine can also be started when the DIRECT SELECT lever is in position N. Starting the engine using the key To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 192) and release it. The engine starts automatically. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 192). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 192) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Petrol engine: press Start/Stop button : once. The engine starts. X Diesel engine: press Start/Stop button : once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts. X Pulling away ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift into reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:45; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 219 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving and parking tures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. Avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold in order to protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation. i It is only possible to move the DIRECT SELECT lever to the desired position from position P if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 176). Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake is automatically released (Y page 220). G Risk of accident Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. After approximately one second, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. i Once you have taken your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one second. Pull away. Hill start assist will not function if: X Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Rthe DIRECT SELECT lever is in position N. Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. RESP® is malfunctioning. X i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away on uphill gradients. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. Parking G Risk of accident Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot steer the vehicle with the key removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They might release the electric parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. G Risk of fire Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass or petrol. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Z Controls ! AMG vehicles: at low engine tempera- 219 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 220 03. Mar 2009 15:17:46; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 220 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving and parking Rthe parking brake must be applied Rmove the DIRECT SELECT lever into position P and remove the ignition key Rfor steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards kerb Controls Electric parking brake For the parking brake to be released automatically if your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou shift out of P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h. Engaging the electric parking brake manually X Push handle :. The ! red warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. Releasing the electric parking brake manually X Pull handle :. The ! red warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released when the key in the ignition lock is in position 1 or the ignition is switched on using the Start/Stop button. Releasing the electric parking brake automatically The electric parking brake is released automatically when the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running Rthe automatic transmission is in position D or R. Rthe bonnet is closed. Ryour Ryou seat belt is fastened. depress the accelerator pedal. If the automatic transmission is in position R, the boot lid must be closed. Engaging the electric parking brake automatically The electric parking brake of your vehicle is automatically engaged if HOLD (Y page 256) or Distronic Plus* (Y page 246) brakes your vehicle until it is stationary and at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe driver's door is opened and the seat belt is not fastened. Rthe bonnet is released. Rthe boot lid is opened while the automatic transmission is in position R. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. The ! red warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i In addition to the electric parking brake, P may also be engaged automatically. Emergency braking with the electric parking brake The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push the handle of the electric parking brake (Y page 220). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 221 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic transmission i The vehicle is braked as long as the elec- tric parking brake lever is depressed. The longer you apply the electric parking brake handle, the stronger the vehicle is braked. The ! red indicator lamp flashes in the instrument cluster during braking. The Release parking brake message appears in the multi-function display and a warning tone sounds. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Using KEYLESS GO* X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 192). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out (Y page 27). i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N. If you open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P. i The engine can be turned off while the Switching off the engine vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. G Risk of accident If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking will then require significantly greater effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Therefore, do not switch off the engine while you are driving. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position P. Using the key X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock and remove it. The parking lock is activated. i If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N. If you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even when a door is opened. * optional 221 Automatic transmission Notes on the transmission G Risk of accident The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Automatic transmission ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:46; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:46; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 222 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic transmission 222 Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Engaging park position P automatically Controls Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the key and remove the key or switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver’s door. RHOLD (Y page 256) or Distronic Plus* (Y page 246) brake your vehicle until it is stationary and at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - the engine is switched off. DIRECT SELECT lever P Park position with parking lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, N, R, or D appears in the transmission position display (Y page 223). Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of the arrow P. i Depress the brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to disengage park position P and to shift the transmission to neutral position N. If you want to shift from park position P directly to reverse gear R, depress the brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. If you want to shift from park position P directly to drive position D, depress the brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. the driver's door is opened and the seat belt is not fastened. - there is a system malfunction. - the power supply is insufficient. In addition to park position P, the electric parking brake is applied automatically. Shifting to neutral N X Engaging park position P X - Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Engaging drive position D X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. The vehicle switches to the automatic drive program. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 223 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic transmission Changing gears The automatic transmission shifts into individual gears automatically. This automatic gearshifting behaviour is determined by: Rdrive position D (Y page 223) with shift ranges 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 (Y page 224) Transmission positions B Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only select P when your vehicle is stationary. If you switch off the engine using the key and then remove the key or open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission will automatically shift to park position P. If you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to park position P. C Reverse gear Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral Do not shift the automatic transmission to N while you are driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. If you switch off the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to neutral N. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty, only shift the automatic transmission to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Rthe selected drive program (C/S/M) (Y page 225) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 223) Rthe Ra road speed possible shift range restriction Gear indicator The current gear is shown in the multi-function display. : Gear indicator ! If the gear indicator in the multi-function display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired gear is engaged. Ideally, you should select position D and drive program C or S. Do not restrict the shift range. 223 Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:47; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 224 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 224 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic transmission Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:47; WK throttle: late upshifts Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Trailer towing X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 depending on the incline of the uphill or downhill gradient (Y page 224), even if cruise control is activated. Shift ranges In transmission position D, you can use the steering wheel gearshift paddles to restrict or derestrict the shift range for the automatic transmission. The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving, even if the shift range is restricted. Driving situation = The braking effect of the engine can be used in this position 5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads Steering wheel gearshift paddles* and manual drive program* You can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. You can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles in the manual drive program. 4 Rin mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and long downhill stretches Extending the shift range/shifting up X Pull right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The shift range is derestricted. If you are driving in manual drive program M, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift : Left-hand paddle: to shift down ; Right-hand paddle: to shift up range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up, even if the shift range is restricted. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:48; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 225 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic transmission ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. Restricting the shift range/shifting down G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to this gear. If you are driving in manual drive program M, the automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Derestricting the shift range X Pull on the right-hand paddle until the digit for the gear disappears from the multi-function display. or X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Selecting the ideal shift range X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle repeatedly until the optimum gear is reached. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows ideal acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. Program selector button The program selector button influences: Rthe drive program Rthe AIRMATIC (Y page 257) or ABC* (Y page 259) suspension settings Rthe engine management i In order to prevent the engine from overrevving, the automatic transmission does not shift down when the engine speed is too high. You can choose the following drive programs: * optional Z Controls AMG vehicles If you have selected the AMG menu in the onboard computer (Y page 235), UP appears in the instrument cluster, instructing you to shift up. 225 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 226 Version: 2.11.7.7 Automatic transmission 226 C Comfort comfortable, economic driving S Sport sporty driving style M Manual manual gearshifting i Regardless of whether automatic drive Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:48; WK program C or S or manual drive program M is selected, the automatic transmission always switches to the drive program C when you next start the engine. To select a drive program: press program selector switch : repeatedly until the letter (C/S/M) for the desired drive program appears in the multi-function display (Y page 223). Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and suspension settings. X Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves the driving stability of the vehicle on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner, resulting in the vehicle maintaining lower engine speeds and thereby consuming less fuel. Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine and suspension configuration. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. Rthe late shift point of the automatic transmission can lead to higher fuel consumption. Manual drive program ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. You can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles in manual drive program M. As in drive program S, the engine, transmission and suspension settings are dynamic. Manual gearshift program M can be selected by using the program selector button. X To activate: press program selector button : repeatedly until M appears in the multi-function display. The automatic transmission changes to manual drive program M. Automatic gearshifting is deactivated. If the automatic transmission is in position D, you can shift up or down through the gears. The gear currently selected and engaged is shown in the multi-function display (Y page 223). X To deactivate: press program selector button : repeatedly until C or S appears in the multi-function display. or X Restart the engine. The automatic transmission then switches to drive program C. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 227 Version: 2.11.7.7 Instrument cluster Upshifting X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 224). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Vehicles with AMG engines ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. Downshifting G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 225). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i Vehicles without an AMG engine: if you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear at maximum engine speed. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Instrument cluster Points to remember You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 27). G Risk of accident If the instrument cluster or the multi-function display fails, it can no longer show any display messages. You will not then be able to see information about the vehicle status, such as speed, outside temperature, warning and indicator lamps, display messages or the failure of systems. Handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Kickdown G Risk of accident and injury i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. * optional 227 Coolant temperature display The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:48; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 228 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 228 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:48; WK ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. Multifunction steering wheel You can control the multi-function display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Outside temperature display G Risk of accident If the temperature is slightly above freezing, the road may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adjust your driving style, the vehicle may start to skid. For this reason, you should always adjust your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. On-board computer Points to remember The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. : Multi-function display ; 6 ~ Makes/accepts or rejects/ends a call* Calls up redial memory/phone book entry with several telephone numbers. W X Increases/reduces the volume Operates RACETIMER36. 8 Mute = ? Activates voice control*; see separate operating instructions G Risk of accident Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. 36 Only AMG vehicles. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:48; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 229 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer A % Press briefly: Back, switches off voice control*, hides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used. % Press and hold: selects the standard display = ; Selects a menu 9 : Press briefly: Selects a function or scrolls through lists. In the Audio menu, selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. In the Telephone* menu, changes to the phone book or selects a name or a phone number. 9 : Press and hold: In the Audio selects a station from the alphabetical list of stations, starts rapid scrolling through an audio/video disc*. In the Telephone* menu, starts rapid scrolling through the telephone book. Multi-function display To activate the multi-function display: Rswitch on the ignition. Rswitch on the lights. Ropen a door. Values, settings and display messages are shown in the description field in the multifunction display. Controls ? : Menu bar ; Description field a Confirms selections and hides display messages In the Telephone* menu, switches to the phone book and starts dialling. In the Audio menu, stops the station search function at the desired station. * optional 229 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 230 03. Mar 2009 15:17:49; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 230 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer Controls Menus and submenus Function : Trip menu (Y page 230) ; Navi* menu (navigation details) (Y page 232) = Audio menu (Y page 233) ? AMG* menu (Y page 235) A Tel* menu (Y page 237) B Assistance (Y page 239) menu Function C Service menu (Y page 241) RCalls up display messages (Y page 342) RRestarts the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 321) or checks the tyre pressure electronically* (Y page 322) RCalls up when a service is due (Y page 332) RChecks the engine oil level (Y page 314) D Settings menu (Y page 241) The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle. Trip menu i Reset the trip meter or trip computer (Y page 232). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:49; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 231 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Standard display 231 Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than 4 hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 ded. kilometres/miles have been excee- Displaying the range and current fuel consumption* X Press and hold the % button until the Trip menu with total distance : and trip distance ; appear. Press the = or ; button to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance. X Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" The values in the After start trip meter are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the After reset trip meter are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset. X Press the = or ; button to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select After start or After reset. The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. "From start" trip computer (example) : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption The trip computer After Start is reset automatically if: * optional Z Controls The trip computer After reset is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres/miles. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 232 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer 232 Digital speedometer X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:49; WK Press the = or ; button to select the Trip menu. Navigation* menu The multi-function display shows the COMAND navigation instructions in the Navi menu. Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the = or ; button to select the Navi menu. Route guidance inactive X Press the 9 or : button to select digital speedometer :. Resetting Press the = or ; button to select the Trip menu. You can reset the values for the following functions: X Rtrip meter Rtrip computer "From start" Rtrip computer "From reset" Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Vehicle heading display (example) : Vehicle heading ; Current road* Route guidance active No change of direction announced : Distance to destination Resetting the trip meter (example) X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. ; Symbol for "follow the road's course" = Distance to next change of direction ? Current road * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:50; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 233 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer 233 Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation ; New lane during a change of direction : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Symbol for change of direction = Distance to change of direction and visual distance display When a change of direction is announced, you will see visual distance display = next to symbol for change of direction ;. This decreases in size as you approach the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. = Lane recommended for the change of direction Further information on lane recommendations (Y page 158). Navigation status indicators in the multifunction display Display messages are shown in the multifunction display, for example: RO: you have reached the destination. RNew route...: COMAND is calculating the new route. RDirection of dest. Off map or Direc‐ tion of dest. Off road: there is no digital map information for the current vehicle position. RDirection of dest. No route: COMAND cannot calculate a route to the selected destination. Audio menu : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Symbol for change of direction = Distance to change of direction and visual distance display ? Lane recommendation On multiple-lane roads, COMAND can provide a lane recommendation ? for the next change of direction. Lanes may be added during a change of direction. The functions in the Audio menu are used to operate the audio system. Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Activate COMAND and select the desired function (Y page 71). Selecting a radio station You can only change the waveband and store new stations using COMAND. Z Controls : Uninterrupted lane Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 234 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer 234 X Press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. Operating the audio player or audio media X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:50; WK Press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. : Memory slot (only if the channel is stored) ; Station = Waveband To select a stored channel: briefly press the : or 9 button. X To select a station from the alphabetical station list (only possible in the FM and DAB wavebands): press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X To select a station with the station search function (only if COMAND does not receive RDS data): press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X Press a to stop the station search function at the desired station. X i Further information on DAB* radio mode37 (Digital Audio Broadcasting) (Y page 79). CD player display (example) : Current track ; Disc (disc number only for DVD changer*) To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track has been reached. If you press and hold 9 or : rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio players or media support this function. If track information is stored on the medium, the multi-function display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). X Operating the video DVD You can only start video DVD playback in COMAND. 37 Only for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:50; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 235 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer X Press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. 235 not receive channel lists): press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X Press a to stop the station search function at the desired station. : Current scene ; Disc (disc number only for DVD Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the = or ; button to select the AMG menu. changer*) To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or the : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired scene has been reached. X Operating the TV* X Press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. : Memory slot (only if the channel is stored) ; Current channel : Gear indicator ; Upshift instruction = Engine oil temperature ? On-board voltage Shift up instruction ; indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range. Shift up instruction ; blocks other messages in the multi-function display until you have shifted up. When the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. = Function RACETIMER To select a stored channel: briefly press the : or 9 button. X To select a channel from the alphabetical channel list: press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X To select a channel with the channel search function (only if COMAND does You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times. While you have the RACETIMER displayed, you will not be able to adjust the volume using the W and X buttons. X * optional Press the = or ; button to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X Z Controls AMG* menu Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Controls 236 03. Mar 2009 15:17:51; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 236 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer : Seconds indicator : RACETIMER ; RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the W button to start the RACETIMER. X To display the intermediate time: press the X button to show the intermediate time. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X To stop: press the W button to stop the RACETIMER. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press the W button, timing is continued. Storing the lap time and starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. X Press the X button to show the intermediate time during timing. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Press the X button again within five seconds. The displayed intermediate time is stored as a lap time. Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is timed from when the intermediate time is called up. Resetting the current lap X Press the W button to stop the RACETIMER. X Press the X button to reset the lap time to "0". Deleting all laps You cannot delete individual stored laps. X Press the W button to stop the RACETIMER. X Press and hold the X button for a minimum of three seconds. X Press the W button to start the RACETIMER. All laps are deleted. or X Press the W button to stop the RACETIMER. X Press the a button. Reset Race Timer appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:51; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 237 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer Overall evaluation = Top speed during lap This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. ? Lap length 237 A Average lap speed X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket* (Y page 305) or set up a Bluetooth connection to COMAND (Y page 115). : RACETIMER overall evaluation G Risk of accident ; Total time driven Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. = Top speed ? Distance covered A Average speed Lap evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. : Lap ; Lap time * optional Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the mobile phone and COMAND (Y page 114). X Press the = or ; button to select the Telephone menu. Mobile phone on PIN code not yet entered Once you have inserted the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket*, the multi-function display shows the Please enter PIN display message. X Enter the PIN via the mobile phone, Linguatronic* or COMAND. The mobile phone will search for a network. Z Controls Telephone menu* Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 238 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer 238 Mobile phone operational The multi-function display shows the Tele‐ phone ready message or the name of the GSM network provider. If your vehicle is outside the transmission and receiver range, the multi-function display shows the No service message. Accepting a call Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:51; WK If someone calls you while you are in the Telephone menu, a message appears in the multi-function display, for example: Press the 6 button to accept the call. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still accept a call. X Rejecting/ending a call Press the ~ button. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still accept a call. X Dialling a number from the phone book You can use the mobile phone to enter new telephone numbers into the phone book (see COMAND (Y page 128)). If your mobile phone is operational, you can select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. When you insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket or establish a Bluetooth connection to COMAND, COMAND imports the phone book from the mobile phone. This can take some time. While the on-board computer reads in the SIM card: Ryou can dial a telephone number from the redial memory (Calls dialled list). Ryou can dial a telephone number from the telephone book stored in COMAND. Rthe multi-function display shows the Read‐ ing data... display message below the phone book entries. When the multi-function display shows the display message Updating data..., COMAND has finished importing data. The multi-function display then shows all the phone book entries in COMAND and the mobile phone. X Press the = or ; button to select the Telephone menu. X Press the :, 9 or a button to call up the phone book. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name. To scroll rapidly, press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. After passing through eight entries, the rapid scroll speeds up. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If several telephone numbers are stored for one name G: use a or 6 to open the list of stored numbers and press : or 9 to select the desired telephone number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. The number dialled is stored in the redial memory. The telephone number dialled appears in the multi-function display. If the name is Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:51; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 239 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory (Calls dialled list). X Press the = or ; button to select the Telephone menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired phone number or name. To scroll rapidly, press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. Speed Limit Assist* In the Speed Limit Assist function, a detected speed limit is displayed under certain conditions. You can set Speed Limit Assist to display a detected speed limit automatically for five seconds. Other messages in the multi-function display will be faded out for this length of time. When Speed Limit Assist is operational and the message function is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol when the ignition is switched on. Displaying Speed Limit Assist Press = or ; to select the Assis‐ tance menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Limit Assist. X Press the a button. Speed Limit Assist appears in the multifunction display. When a speed limit is detected, this appears in the multi-function display until: X Assistance menu Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. In the Assistance menu you can: Rdisplay Speed Limit Assist* (Y page 239) message function* (Y page 239) the distance display* (Y page 240) Rswitch ESP® on/off (Y page 240) Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake* Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 240) (Y page 240) Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist* (Y page 241) speed limit ceases to apply. Ryou pass city limits. Rthe type of road changes, e.g. motorway or country road. Rthe speed limit is not detected anymore after a certain distance. Ractivate/deactivate the Speed Limit Assist Rshow Rthe Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function Press = or ; to select the Assis‐ tance menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Limit Assist. X Press the a button. Speed Limit Assist appears in the multifunction display. X Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist* (Y page 241) * optional Z Controls stored in the phone book, it is also displayed. 239 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 240 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer 240 Press the : button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. A detected speed limit appears automatically for five seconds. X Showing the distance display* Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:51; WK This function is only available with Distronic Plus*. X Press the = or ; button to select the Assistance menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance display. X Press the a button. The Distronic Plus* distance display appears in the multi-function display. Activating/deactivating ESP® G Risk of accident If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RUnder no circumstances should you deactivate ESP®. RWhen pulling away, only depress the accel- erator pedal as far as is necessary. RAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. The vehicle may otherwise begin to skid. If you drive too fast, ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. Further information about ESP® (Y page 55) X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button to select the Assistance menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. X X Press the a button. To deactivate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. G Risk of accident If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may start to skid then increases in certain situations. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake* This function is only available with Distronic Plus*. X Press the = or ; button to select the Assistance menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press the a button. X To activate or deactivate: press a again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the multi-function display shows the Ä symbol. Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press = or ; to select the Assis‐ tance menu. X Press 9 or : to select the Atten‐ tion Assist menu. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 241 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the À symbol appears in the multi-function display when the ignition is on. X Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist* Press the = or ; button to select the Assistance menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist X Press the a button. X To activate or deactivate: press a again. X Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist* Press = or ; to select the Assis‐ tance menu. X Press 9 or : to select the Lane Keeping Assist menu. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a again. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol appears in the multi-function display when the ignition is on. X Service menu In the Service menu you can: Rcall up display messages (Y page 342) Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 321) or check the tyre pressure electronically* (Y page 322) * optional Rcall 241 up the service due date (Y page 332) Rcheck the engine oil level* (Y page 314) Settings menu Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. In the Settings menu you can: Rswitch the daytime driving lights on/off (Y page 241) Ractivate/deactivate the Intelligent Light System* (Y page 242) Rswitch Adaptive Main-beam Assist* on/off (Y page 242) Rset permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 256) Rshow/hide the additional speedometer (Y page 242) Rselect the units for speed/distance (Y page 242) Ractivate/deactivate tem* (Y page 243) the radar sensor sys- Rswitch belt adjustment* on/off (Y page 243) Switching the daytime driving lights on/off If you set Daytime driving lamps and the light switch is in the $ or c position, the daytime driving lights are switched on automatically when the engine is running. The dipped-beam headlamps switch on automatically in the dark. If you turn the light switch to a different position, the corresponding lights are switched on. X Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Daytime driving lights. Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:51; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 242 Version: 2.11.7.7 On-board computer 242 X X Press the a button. To activate/deactivate: press a again. Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System* Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:52; WK Select Intell. Light System to switch on or switch off the following functions: Rmotorway mode Ractive light function Rcornering light function Rextended range foglamps Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Intell. Light System. X Press the a button. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X Tourist mode This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. If you drive in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered, oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps. If tourist mode is activated, the multi-function display shows the Intell. Light System Inoperative display message in the Intell. Light System function. Motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are deactivated. Have tourist mode activated as near to the border as possible before crossing into these countries. The headlamps are switched to symmetrical dipped beam. When symmetrical beam is activated, the edge of the carriageway is no longer illuminated as wide and high. Note that not all light functions are available when tourist mode is activated. When you again drive on the same side of the road as in the country of registration, have tourist mode deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre, as soon as possible after crossing the border. Switching Adaptive Main-beam Assist* on/off Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 to select Adapt. Main-beam Ass. X Press the a button. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Showing/hiding the additional speedometer The additional speedometer can be shown in the multi-function display. Vehicles with a kilometre speedometer: the additional speedometer has mph units. Vehicles with a miles speedometer: the additional speedometer has km/h units. X Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Dig. speedo. X Press the a button. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Selecting the units for speed/distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether the multi-function display shows km/h or mph in certain cases. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 243 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems can be found in the index under "Radar sensor system". The selected units apply to: analogue speedometer Rthe total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rthe distance values in the navigation system* Rcruise control RSpeedtronic RDistronic Rthe Plus* ASSYST PLUS service interval display The digital speedometer shows alternative speed units (Y page 242). X Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Units. X Press the a button. X To select a different display unit: press a again. The unit switches km/h and mph. Switching belt adjustment* on/off Further information on belt adjustment (Y page 205). X Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Belt adjustment. X Press the a button. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system* ! You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. Further information * optional Vehicles with a navigation system*: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically if you are close to radio telescope facilities. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDistronic RBAS Plus* (Y page 246) PLUS* (Y page 54) RParking Guidance* (Y page 262) RPRE-SAFE® RBlind Controls Rthe 243 Brake* (Y page 57) Spot Assist* (Y page 272) Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Radar sen‐ sor system. X Press the a button. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X Driving systems Overview of driving systems The vehicle's driving systems are described on the following pages: Rcruise control, Distronic Plus* and Speedtronic, which are used to control the speed of the vehicle RHOLD, which makes pulling away easier, particularly on steep uphill gradients RAIRMATIC and Active Body Control* (ABC), which is used to adjust the vehicle’s suspension system R4MATIC* (permanent four-wheel drive), for optimum traction RPARKTRONIC* and Parking Guidance*, which assist you in finding a parking space and in manoeuvring into it Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 244 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 244 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems Rreversing camera*, which assists you when parking RATTENTION ASSIST, which helps you detect tiredness or increasing lapses in concentration RSpeed Limit Assist*, which shows you speed limits that are detected in the multifunction display Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:52; WK RNight View Assist Plus*, which assists you when driving in the dark RBlind Spot Assist*, which assists you when changing lanes RLane Keeping Assist*, which warns you against leaving your lane unintentionally The ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS*, adaptive brake lights, ESP®, EBV, ADAPTIVE BRAKE and PRESAFE® Brake* driving safety systems are described in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 52). Cruise control Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G Risk of accident Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: Cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp lit: Variable Speedtronic is selected. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 245 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 245 Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. X the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed or to call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control and variable Speedtronic B To deactivate cruise control When you switch on cruise control, the stored speed appears in the multi-function display for five seconds and is then indicated in the speedometer by a triangle. The speedometer dial lights up between the set speed and the maximum speed. Selecting cruise control X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes off. Cruise control is selected. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h and ESP® is activated (Y page 55). Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, Z Controls i Cruise control may be unable to maintain Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 246 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 246 cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:52; WK Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. control off message in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Distronic Plus* i Distronic Plus is not available in all countries. Distronic Plus regulates the speed and automatically maintains the distance to the vehicle in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Deactivating cruise control G Risk of accident There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: The brake pedal is retracted when Distronic Plus brakes. Do not restrict the movement of the pedal in any way. RDo not put any objects in the footwell. X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Brake. or Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: X Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou drive at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the automatic transmission to N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise REnsure that floor mats and carpets are fixed securely. RDo not place your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped. You could otherwise cause an accident and injure yourself and others. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 247 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems Distronic Plus is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Distronic Plus does not react to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stationary or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic Distronic Plus may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when Distronic Plus is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, Distronic Plus causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. G Risk of accident Distronic Plus cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. If Distronic does not recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle in front, do not activate Distronic or, if it is already active, deactivate it. This is especially the case: Rbefore Rin corners filter lanes Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving traffic complex driving situations or where the lanes are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motorway Distronic Plus cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, Distronic Plus: Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip when braking or accelerating. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when Distronic Plus is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ! You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. Further information can be found in the index under "Radar sensor system". Vehicles with COMAND and navigation system*: you must deactivate the radar sensor system near radio telescope facilities (Y page 446). If you want Distronic Plus to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated and operational. If no car is driving in front of you, Distronic Plus works like cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, Distronic Plus works in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use Distronic Plus while driving on roads with steep gradients. Rin G Risk of accident Otherwise, Distronic Plus maintains the current speed or accelerates up to the set speed. Distronic Plus brakes your vehicle at a maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum brake force. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient. * optional Z Controls G Risk of accident 247 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 248 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 248 If Distronic Plus detects a risk of collision with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition, the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Brake to avoid a collision. Cruise control lever Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:53; WK With the cruise control lever you can operate Distronic Plus and variable Speedtronic. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes off. Distronic Plus is selected. Activating Distronic Plus, storing the current speed and maintaining it G Risk of accident RLIM The vehicle can be braked when Distronic Plus is activated. For this reason, deactivate Distronic Plus if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). RLIM You can activate Distronic Plus in the following circumstances: indicator lamp off: Distronic Plus is selected. indicator lamp lit: Variable Speedtronic is selected. Rabout two minutes after the engine is star- Rwhen the engine is running ted Rif you do not brake during the journey Rif your vehicle is not secured by the electric parking brake Rif ESP® is activated Rif the automatic transmission is in position Rif the bonnet is closed D : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To adjust the specified distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed or to call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between Distronic Plus and var- iable Speedtronic C To deactivate Distronic Plus Selecting Distronic Plus X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. If it is off, Distronic Plus is already selected. Rif the driver's door is closed and you switch from P to D or your seat belt is fastened. Activating while driving When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you can only activate Distronic Plus if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multi-function display. If the vehicle in front is not shown in the multi-function display and is no longer being detected, because it has changed lanes, for example, Distronic Plus is deactivated and you hear a warning tone. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:53; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 249 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended message appears in the multi-function display. Then, the distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will not be governed. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate Distronic Plus once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. Distronic Plus is selected. i Distronic Plus can only be activated at under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the Distronic Plus distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the thumbwheel on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 250). Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, Distronic Plus operates in the same way as cruise control. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, Distronic Plus causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. If Distronic Plus detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed, but only up to the stored speed. G Risk of accident If you depress the brake, Distronic Plus is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. Distronic Plus then no longer brakes your vehicle. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, its speed and for braking in good time. Stopping G Risk of accident The Distronic Plus braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: RDistronic Plus is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthe system or the power supply is disrupted, e.g. due to battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. G Risk of accident Never get out of the vehicle when Distronic Plus is activated. Z Controls Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down A to the pressure point. Distronic Plus is selected. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. X 249 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 250 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 250 Distronic Plus must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. Distronic Plus does not replace the electric parking brake and must not be used for parking. If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate Distronic Plus and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:53; WK G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. If Distronic Plus detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill about four metres behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the thumbwheel on the cruisecontrol lever. Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. Distronic Plus is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distronic Plus is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Setting the specified minimum distance for Distronic Plus You can set the specified minimum distance for Distronic Plus by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that Distronic Plus keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can read this distance in the multi-function display (Y page 251). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:53; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 251 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 251 If Distronic Plus detects a vehicle in front, the speedometer dial lights up between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed ;. In the Assistance menu (Y page 240) of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display and activate or deactivate PRESAFE® Brake*. To increase: turn thumbwheel ; towards =. Then, Distronic Plus maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn thumbwheel ; towards :. Then, Distronic Plus maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X Display when Distronic Plus is switched off Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 240). When Distronic Plus is deactivated, you will see the following in the multi-function display: X i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Distronic Plus displays in the speedometer : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Distance indicator, displaying current dis- tance to the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front, adjustable A Own vehicle Display when Distronic Plus is switched on When you switch on Distronic Plus, triangle ; shows the stored speed. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Distronic Plus. * optional Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 240). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate Distronic Plus. When Distronic Plus is activated, you will see the following in the multi-function display: X Z Controls Distronic Plus displays in the multifunction display Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:54; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 252 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 252 i Distronic Plus is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate briefly to overtake, Distronic Plus adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Distronic Plus is automatically deactivated if: Controls Ryou : Distronic Plus activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front, adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected Deactivating Distronic Plus engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or the vehicle in front is no longer detected RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the automatic transmission to N, P or R Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility: only vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system* (Y page 446). If Distronic Plus is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds Tips for driving with Distronic Plus There are several ways to deactivate Distronic Plus: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. Distronic Plus is then deactivated. Cornering, entering and exiting a bend Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:54; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 253 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems The ability of Distronic Plus to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or too late. Distronic Plus does not detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles Controls Vehicles travelling on a different line 253 Distronic Plus may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane Distronic Plus does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. For example, if the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, Distronic Plus will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles Distronic Plus has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles Distronic Plus may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating Distronic Plus at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. Speedtronic Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 254 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 254 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:17:54; WK Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: Cruise control or Distronic Plus* is selected. RLIM indicator lamp lit: Variable Speedtronic is selected. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable areas for speed limits, e.g. in built-up Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres (Y page 256) G Risk of accident Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable Speedtronic With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control, Distronic Plus* and variable Speedtronic. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed or to call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control or Dis- tronic Plus* and variable Speedtronic B To deactivate variable Speedtronic Selecting variable Speedtronic X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is selected. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 255 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use Speedtronic when you do not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed higher than the stored limit speed allows. You could, otherwise, cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable Speedtronic: Rusing the cruise control lever X Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X X depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. Vehicles with Distronic Plus*: variable Speedtronic brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. As it does so, the brake pedal is depressed. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. * optional Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. The current speed is stored and shown in the multi-function display. The speedometer dial lights up between the start of the scale and the stored speed. Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or Rby G Risk of injury Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Deactivating variable Speedtronic There are several ways to deactivate variable Speedtronic: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated. Cruise control or Distronic Plus* is selected. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automatically when you depress the accelerator pedal X Z Controls G Risk of accident 255 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 256 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 256 beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. (240 km/h to 160 km/h). Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated with the off setting. X Press a to save the entry. G Risk of accident It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. Controls i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent Speedtronic i Permanent Speedtronic is only available in certain countries. You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres) and the maximum speed. Just before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multi-function display. Permanent Speedtronic remains active, even if variable Speedtronic is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Setting permanent Speedtronic X Press the = or ; button to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select SPEEDTRONIC. X To change this, press a. HOLD HOLD assists the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and HOLD deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Activation conditions You can activate HOLD if: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe automatic transmission is in position R, N or D. If the automatic transmission is in position R, the boot lid must be closed. Activating HOLD Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake. X X X Press the a button again. Press the : or 9 button to set permanent Speedtronic in increments of ten Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 257 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems X Rapidly continue to depress the brake until HOLD : appears in the instrument cluster. HOLD is activated. You can release the brake pedal. i You cannot activate HOLD when Distronic Plus* is activated. i If HOLD is not activated when you depress the brake pedal, wait for a short time and then try again. G Risk of accident The vehicle's brakes are applied when HOLD is activated. For this reason, deactivate HOLD if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Deactivating HOLD HOLD is deactivated if: Ryou depress the accelerator pedal with the transmission in position D or R. Ryou shift the automatic transmission to P. Ryou release the brakes fully and apply them again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD goes out in the instrument cluster. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate Distronic Plus*. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. G Risk of accident Never get out of the vehicle when HOLD is activated. * optional 257 HOLD must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. HOLD does not replace the electric parking brake and must not be used for parking. The HOLD braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: RHOLD is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. G Risk of accident If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate HOLD and secure the vehicle against rolling away. AIRMATIC Vehicle level Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce petrol consumption and improve driving safety. The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set. Depending on the vehicle height that has been set, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 20 mm as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height. Setting the vehicle level manually Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle while lowZ Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:55; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 258 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 258 ering the vehicle when it is stationary. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour Rthe driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com- fort Controls Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. X To select raised level: start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the multi-function display. To select the standard level: start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. i The "Raised level" setting is cancelled at vehicle speeds above 120 km/h or if the speed has been between 80 km/h and 120 km/h for more than approximately three minutes. If you do not drive within this speed range, the raised level remains stored, even when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Suspension tuning The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) automatically controls the calibration of the dampers and springs. Sports tuning The firmer suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e. g. on winding country roads. X If indicator lamp ; is off: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension for a sporty driving style. The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multi-function display. Comfort tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways. X If indicator lamp ; is on: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. You have selected the suspension for a comfortable driving style. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:56; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 259 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 259 The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multi-function display. Active Body Control* (ABC) Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce petrol consumption and improve driving safety. Depending on the vehicle height that has been set, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 15 mm as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height. X ! S 63 AMG, S 65 AMG The vehicle is lowered by about 10 mm when the engine is switched off. When parking, make sure that you stop your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as it is lowered. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Setting the vehicle level manually Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle while lowering the vehicle when it is stationary. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. * optional To select the raised level: start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. X To select the standard level: start the engine. G Risk of injury S 63 AMG, S 65 AMG The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. Therefore, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. Controls Vehicle level If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. i The vehicle level setting remains saved when the vehicle is restarted. Suspension tuning The electronically controlled ABC chassis system is permanently active. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The tuning of the ABC chassis system is controlled at each wheel individually. Ryour Rthe driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com- fort Rthe vehicle load Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 260 03. Mar 2009 15:17:56; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 260 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. G Risk of accident Controls 4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. Raccelerate Sports tuning The firmer suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer firm suspension tuning. X If indicator lamp ; is off: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension for a sporty driving style. The ABC Active Body Control SPORT message appears in the multi-function display. Comfort tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer comfortable handling. X If indicator lamp ; is on: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. You have selected the suspension for a comfortable driving style. The ABC Active Body Control COM‐ FORT message appears in the multi-function display. 4MATIC* (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle when- less when driving. Radapt your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC* G Risk of accident PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It assists you when parking by displaying the distance between your vehicle and an obstacle. It also emits a warning tone when you approach an obstacle. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you switch on the ignition, release the electric parking brake or start the engine and shift the automatic transmission to D, R or N. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:56; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 261 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 261 Controls PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. PARKTRONIC is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated when you shift the automatic transmission to P or engage the electric parking brake and switch off the engine. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Top view Front sensors Centre Approximately 100 cm Corners Approximately 60 cm Rear sensors : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Range of the sensors The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush; otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Centre Approximately 120 cm Corners Approximately 80 cm ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer towbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brake system or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. Minimum distance Side view Centre Approximately 20 cm Corners Approximately 20 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, all warning displays light up and a tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum clearance, it may no longer be shown. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 262 03. Mar 2009 15:17:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 262 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance to the obstacle. When the first red segment lights up, you hear an intermittent warning for about two seconds. From the second red segment, you hear a continuous warning. You have reached the minimum distance. Controls Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC Warning display for front area : Left-hand side of the vehicle ; Right-hand side of the vehicle = Operational readiness symbols The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if the yellow operational readiness symbols = light up. The automatic transmission position determines which warning display is active when the engine is running: Automatic transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R Rear and front areas activated N If electric parking brake is engaged: none If electric parking brake is released: rear and front areas are activated P No areas activated : To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp PARKTRONIC is deactivated if indicator lamp ; is lit. Trailer towing* When you attach a trailer, PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area as soon as you have established an electrical connection between your vehicle and the trailer. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Parking Guidance* Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instruc* optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 263 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems tions when parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 260). G Risk of accident Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. For example, these might be spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Parking Guidance measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. For instance, this may be the case when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space. Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the responsibility for paying attention. If you rely solely on Parking Guidance, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. G Risk of accident Objects located above the height range of Parking Guidance will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Parking Guidance might therefore issue steering instructions too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Parking Guidance in such situations. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. * optional 263 Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat kerbs. Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. RParking spaces which are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer towbars might not be identified properly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC warning messages during the parking procedure (Y page 260). RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle you should not use Parking Guidance. RNever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel* fitted. RMake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions. RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:57; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 264 03. Mar 2009 15:17:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 264 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems Detecting parking spaces A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Parking Controls The following instructions refer to parking in a space on the front-passenger side. To park in a space on the driver's side, mirror the instructions. G Risk of accident Detected parking space : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. At speeds below 30 km/h, you see white parking symbol ; in the instrument cluster as a status indicator. Parking Guidance only shows parking spaces on the passenger side in the default setting. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. If a parking space is detected, parking symbol ; changes to blue. Additionally, an arrow pointing to the right = or left : is shown. Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are closed in at the back Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle PARKTRONIC and Parking Guidance are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Stop the vehicle when the blue parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Engage reverse gear. The multi-function display shows the message: Check surroundings Confirm with OK. X Press a on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm. The display in the instrument cluster switches to Parking Guidance. X Rthat : Green lane ; The white bracket marks the target posi- tion. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 265 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems Depending on the distance, you may have to reverse along the lane towards the parking space. This is also represented by a green lane :. Continue reversing until you hear an acoustic signal. Stop; the parking position has been reached and is marked by white bracket ; with an arrow for the target position. Reversing into a parking space : The lane turns green when the steering wheel is turned in the correct direction. Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a signal. The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. X Steering tips : The red lane indicates the lane you are in Countersteering with the steering wheel in its current position. ; The yellow lane indicates the lane you will reach when you have turned the steering wheel in the required direction. X Turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary until red lane : and yellow lane ; overlap. Lane ; is then marked in green and you hear an acoustic signal. If the parking space is inside the area displayed, the end of the green lane is marked with a white bracket and an arrow showing the target position. : The red lane indicates the lane you are in with the steering wheel in its current position. ; The yellow lane indicates the lane you will reach when you have turned the steering wheel in the required direction. X Turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary until red lane : and yellow lane ; overlap. Lane ; is then marked in green and you hear an acoustic signal. A white arrow and white bracket are shown to indicate the target position. Z Controls X 265 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 266 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 266 Driving to the final position Cancelling Parking Guidance Press the PARKTRONIC button on the dashboard (Y page 260). Parking Guidance is cancelled immediately and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. No message appears in the multi-function display. Parking Guidance is cancelled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol disappears and the Parking Guidance cancelled message appears in the multi-function display. Controls X : The lane turns green when the steering wheel is turned in the correct direction. X Keep the steering wheel turned in that direction and reverse carefully until you have reached the final position. The Parking Guidance finished message appears in the multi-function display and a warning tone sounds. Trailer towing* For vehicles with a trailer coupling, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Parking Guidance. When the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking Guidance ceases to be available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. Reversing camera* Final position Depending on the size of the parking space, you may now be in an angled position in the parking space. If possible, Parking Guidance will guide you as far back as possible towards the rear limit of the parking space. X Manoeuvre, if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 260). The reversing camera is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND display. In addition to the camera function, it assists you by providing guide lines when you are reversing. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 267 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems The reversing camera is located in the handle strip of the boot lid. Rat 267 night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the dis- play may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. : Reversing camera View through the camera The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a mirrored fashion, as in the rear-view mirror. G Risk of accident The reversing camera is only an aid and may display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect manner, or may not even display them at all. The reversing camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. The camera cannot show objects: Rvery near to the rear bumper Rbelow the rear bumper Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle while you are parking. Activating the reversing camera Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display with guide lines. X Rin G Risk of accident You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Rtrailer the area immediately above the boot lid handle G Risk of accident Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or function in a limited manner: Rif the boot lid is open Rin Please note that objects not on ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are. These include: Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind Rthe tow bars tail-end of a lorry Rslanted posts The lines are only guides, not accurate measurements of the distance to an obstacle. Therefore, you should never pass the red line when approaching an obstacle. You could otherwise cause an accident and injure yourself and others. heavy rain, snow or fog Z Controls Rif Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 268 03. Mar 2009 15:17:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 268 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or increasing inattentiveness taking into consideration the following criteria: Rpersonal driving style, e.g. steering charac- teristics Rdriving conditions, e. g. time, driving time Controls ATTENTION ASSIST's functionality is restricted and warnings are delayed or do not appear at all: Red guide line =, approximately 0.25 m, and yellow guide line ;, approximately 1.0 m, show the approximate distance from the rear end of the vehicle. Blue line : depicts the width required for the vehicle. It helps you to position the vehicle at the side of the road, e.g. at the kerb. ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST helps you on long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active at speeds between 80 and 180 km/h. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects tiredness or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests a break. Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. large bumps or potholes Rthere is a strong side wind Ryou have adopted a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or driving with a high rate of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently operating or making a call using COMAND Rin active driving situations, for example, if you are changing lanes or changing the vehicle speed Warning and display messages in the multi-function display G Risk of accident ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react slower. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Always take breaks in good time and regularly, especially during long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Activate ATTENTION ASSIST with the onboard computer (Y page 240). Symbol : appears in the multi-function display. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not warn you until at least 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone and the Attention Assist: Time for a break? message appears in the multi-function display. X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:17:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 269 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems X Ryou switch off the engine. Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Speed Limit Assist* i Speed Limit Assist is not operational in all countries. Speed limits detected by Speed Limit Assist, in conjunction with your navigation system*, are shown in the multi-function display. The display appears when road signs stating the highest permissible speed are detected. Speed Limit Assist detects these signs with a camera at the top of the windscreen. Controls If necessary, take a break. Press a to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects fatigue or increasing inattentiveness, you will see a warning again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts judging your tiredness anew if: X : Speed Limit Assist camera G Risk of accident Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic. Rthe windscreen is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rif the road signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees. Rif the road signs are not sufficiently illuminated. Example : Road signs showing the speed limit ; End of speed limit zone i Sign ; indicating the end of a speed limit zone is detected, but is not shown in the multi-function display. * optional 269 Rif there are ambiguous road signs, for instance near building sites or on multi-lane roads. Road signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 270 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems 270 Multi-function display Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:00; WK : Speed Limit Assist is available and the warning function is switched on in the onboard computer ; Road signs showing the speed limit = Units used in the road sign displayed X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 239). Symbol : appears. When a road sign is detected it appears in multi-function display ; for about five seconds. Other items in the multi-function display are hidden for the time being. or X Display Speed Limit Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 239). When a road sign is detected it appears in multi-function display ;. Road sign ; is generally displayed until: Rthe road sign indicating the end of the speed limit zone is detected. Ryou make a turn. Ryou leave or enter a city or town. Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, secondary road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the road sign being repeated or detected again. Night View Assist Plus* Night View Assist Plus uses infrared as well as the normal headlamps to light up the road. A camera at the top of the windscreen picks up the infrared light and displays it in black and white in the multi-function display. The multi-function display corresponds to a road lit up by main-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognised by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display. G Risk of accident Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed to assist driving and does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. Continue to look through the windscreen instead of relying on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for safety and must drive in accordance with traffic conditions. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe windscreen is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill gradients. Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus display in the multi-function display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the main-beam headlamps because of oncoming traffic. G Risk of accident Night View Assist Plus does not detect objects in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Continue to look through the windscreen when manoeuvring. Make sure that there are * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 271 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems no people or animals in the area in which you are manoeuvring. i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and does not dazzle. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. i The infrared headlamps only switch on when the vehicle is driving at speeds of about 10 km/h. This means that you do not have the full visual range while stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. Multi-function display When you activate Night View Assist Plus, the speed display in the multi-function display changes. The speed display is shown as a bar at the bottom edge of the multi-function display. This line is no longer available for basic menus. You have to deactivate Night View Assist Plus if you wish to change a setting using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. : Night View Assist Plus camera Activating/deactivating You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if: Rthe Rit Pedestrian recognition The Night View Assist Plus recognises pedestrians using typical characteristics, i. e. a silhouette in the shape of a person. key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. is dark. Rthe light switch is in the c or L posi- tion. Rthe automatic transmission is not in position R. : Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognised = Framing ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition A Speed display Pedestrian recognition is activated, if: RNight Ryou X Press rocker switch : up or down. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the multi-function display. 271 View Assist Plus is activated are faster than about 10 km/h Rthe surroundings are dark, e. g. when driving out of town without street lighting. Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:00; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Controls 272 03. Mar 2009 15:18:01; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 272 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ? appears. If a pedestrian is now recognised, they are framed = and thereby highlighted. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windscreen to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians. G Risk of accident Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative, if: Rpedestrians are partially or completely obscured by objects, e. g. by parked vehicles Rthe silhouette in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections Rpedestrians roundings do not contrast with the sur- Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e. g. sitting, squatting or lying i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian recognition. Adjusting the brightness of the multifunction display To make brighter or dimmer: make sure that Night View Assist Plus is activated. X Turn control knob : to the right or left. X Misted up or dirty windscreen If the windscreen in front of the camera is misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. X To demist: check the automatic air-conditioning settings (Y page 284) and fold down the camera cover. X To clean the windscreen on the inside: fold down the camera cover and use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in front of the camera. Blind Spot Assist* Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the area on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you when you change lanes at speeds above 30 km/h. In each case, a warning lamp appears in the exterior mirror as soon as a vehicle is detected in the area monitored. When you switch on the corresponding turn signal prior to changing lanes, you receive an optical and acoustic collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may not detect all vehicles. Blind Spot Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 446). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 273 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems For Blind Spot Assist to help you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Monitoring range of the sensors Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, the system may be unable to distinguish the neighbouring lane from the one beyond it. For this reason, vehicles in the farther lane may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of the lane that is nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system, warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. For example, the radar sensors must not be covered by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, Blind Spot Assist may not work properly. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning. Z 273 Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:01; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 274 03. Mar 2009 15:18:01; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 274 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems Information and warning display recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Controls Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red. If Blind Spot Assist is switched on and the engine is running, indicator lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always issued when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out after reverse gear is engaged. In this event, BlindSpot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h, and the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 243) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 241) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Red warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors are lit. X Start the engine. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors now light up yellow. X Trailer towing* Blind Spot Assist is deactivated when you connect the trailer to your vehicle electrically. The Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears in the multi-function display. Lane Keeping Assist* If you select km/h on the on-board computer in the Display unit Speed-/odometer: function (Y page 242), Lane Keeping Assist is activated from speeds of 60 km/h. If the mph display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at between 35 and 40 mph. If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road, it warns you before before you leave your lane unintentionally. Usually the warning is given when a front wheel passes over a lane * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 275 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving systems marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. G Risk of accident Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. : Lane Keeping Assist camera In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning occurs earlier if: Ryou cut a corner on the outside. road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic. Rthe windscreen is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthere lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe Rthe system recognises solid lane markings, Rthere The warning occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut a corner on the inside. No warning occurs if: Ryou actively steer, brake or depress the accelerator pedal, e.g. when changing lane, overtaking, accelerating or leaving the motorway. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou drive around a very sharp bend. are no lane markings. Rthe Rthe as crossing these often results in a critical situation, e.g. in the case of hard shoulders or crash barriers. 275 distance to the vehicle in front is too short. are ambiguous lane markings on the road, e.g. near roadworks. Rthere are short-term changes to the markings, e.g. filter lanes or motorway exits. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:02; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:02; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 276 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning 276 Activating Lane Keeping Assist interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. The automatic air conditioning is only operational when the engine is running.38 Optimum operation is only achieved when you drive with the side windows and sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* closed. Controls i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 241). Symbol : is shown and lights up brown. When Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use symbol : lights up green. This is the case, if: X RLane Keeping Assist recognises lane border markings on the road surface Ryou are travelling at speeds exceeding 60 km/h or between 35 and 40 mph, depending on the settings in the on-board computer. Air conditioning General notes The automatic air conditioning controls the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle 38 The during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 216). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. G Risk of accident Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation and, as a result, you may cause an accident. "residual heat" function can only be switched on/off if the ignition is switched off. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:02; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 277 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning 277 Overview of air-conditioning system functions Controls Automatic air conditioning Function Function Front control unit D : Controls the air conditioning automatically, left Switches the rear window heating on/off E Sets the airflow, right ; Sets the temperature, left F Sets the temperature, right = Sets the airflow, left G ? Demists the windscreen Controls the air conditioning automatically, right A Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode B Switches the air conditioning on/ off39 Switches the residual heat function on/off39 C 39 On Rear control panel* H Sets the temperature, left I Sets the air distribution, left J Sets the airflow Activates/deactivates auxiliary heating* vehicles without auxiliary heating*, these functions have separate rocker switches. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 278 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 278 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning Function K Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:02; WK Press OFF to deactivate the rearcompartment air conditioning Press AUTO to control the rear-compartment air conditioning automatically Press MAN to control the rear-compartment air conditioning manually L Sets the air distribution, right M Sets the temperature, right i Instructions and recommendations for optimum air conditioning: Ractivate the air conditioning using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch comes on. Rset the temperature to 22 †. Ronly use the "demisting" function briefly, until the windscreen is clear again. Ronly use the "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows could mist up due to a lack of fresh air. Ruse the "residual heat" function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The "residual heat" function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. Activating and deactivating the frontcompartment air conditioning via the front control unit Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the Ç rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To deactivate: press the Ç rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch comes on. X Activating and deactivating the rearcompartment air conditioning via the front control unit* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Activate the Y rear compartment function via COMAND (Y page 181). The rear-compartment air conditioning can be controlled via the front control unit using the Y rear compartment function. X To activate: press the Ç rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To deactivate: press the Ç rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch comes on. X Switching the air conditioning on/off i When the air conditioning is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly, otherwise the windows may mist up. i Activate the air conditioning primarily using the à rocker switch (Y page 279). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:03; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 279 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the K rocker switch up or down and select AUTO. or X Press the K rocker switch up or down and select MAN. X To deactivate: press the K rocker switch up or down and select OFF. X Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off The "cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. G Risk of accident If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling mode. You can activate or deactivate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function via COMAND (Y page 179). Controlling the air conditioning automatically In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the tem- * optional perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic air conditioning will achieve optimal operation if "cooling with air dehumidification" is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. Controlling the front-compartment air conditioning via the front control unit Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch comes on. X To deactivate: press the K rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch goes out. or X Set the air distribution using COMAND (Y page 178). The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch goes out. X Controlling the rear-compartment air conditioning automatically via the front control unit* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Activate the Y rear compartment function via COMAND (Y page 181). The rear-compartment air conditioning can be controlled via the front control unit using the "rear compartment" Y function. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch comes on. X Z Controls Activating and deactivating the rearcompartment air conditioning via the rear control unit* 279 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 280 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning 280 X To deactivate: press the K rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch goes out. You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the left and right sides of the rear compartment and the footwells. Set the air distribution using COMAND (Y page 178). The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch goes out. Setting the front-compartment temperature using the front control unit or X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:03; WK i To return to the standard display, activate the front air conditioning function via COMAND (Y page 181). i The rear-compartment display returns to the standard display automatically after five seconds. Controlling the rear-compartment air conditioning automatically via the rear control unit* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press rocker switch K up or down and select AUTO (Y page 277). X To deactivate: press rocker switch K up or down and select MAN or OFF (Y page 277). X Setting the temperature Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the w rocker switch up or down. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X i You can also use COMAND (Y page 178) to set the temperature. Setting the rear-compartment temperature using the front control unit* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Activate the Y rear compartment function via COMAND (Y page 181). The rear-compartment air conditioning can be controlled via the front control unit using the Y rear compartment function. X To increase/reduce: press the w rocker switch up or down. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X i To return to the standard display, activate the "front air conditioning" function via COMAND (Y page 181). i The rear-compartment display returns to the standard display automatically after five seconds. Automatic air-conditioning zones * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:04; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 281 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning Setting the rear-compartment temperature using the rear control unit* 281 Setting the centre air vents Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press rocker switch H or M up or down (Y page 277). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X i The footwell temperature can be set via COMAND (Y page 180). Adjusting the air vents G Risk of injury Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. Controls Setting the footwell temperature : Fixed centre air vent ; Centre air vent, right = Control for right-hand centre air vent ? Control for left-hand centre air vent A Centre air vent, left X To open/close: turn controls = and ? up or down. Setting the side air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet grille on the bonnet free of blockage, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior. i For draught-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the centre detent position. X To open/close: turn control = up or down. i Demister vent : is never completely shut, even if side air vent ; is shut. Setting the glove compartment air vent The glove compartment can be ventilated when the automatic air-conditioning system is activated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:04; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 282 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning 282 ! At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. i In vehicles without rear-compartment air conditioning*: close the rear-compartment air vents when heating mode is activated, as no warm air flows through the rear-compartment air vents in the basic heating setting. Controls Setting the rear-compartment side air vents To open: turn control : anti-clockwise from position 3 to position 2. X To close: turn control : clockwise from position 2 to position 3. X Setting the rear-compartment air vents : Rear-compartment side air vent ; Control for rear-compartment side air vent X To open/close: turn control ; to the right or to the left. Setting the air distribution : Rear-compartment air vent, left ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Control for right-hand rear-compartment air vent ? Rear-compartment control unit* for auto- matic climate control A Control for left-hand rear-compartment air vent X The air distribution can be set individually for the driver's and front-passenger sides. ¯ directs the airflow through the demister vents P directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents, as well as the footwell air vents a directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents To open/close: turn controls = or A to the right or left. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:04; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 283 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning Setting the air distribution in the front/ rear compartment using COMAND The air distribution can be set using COMAND (Y page 178). Setting the rear-compartment air distribution via the rear control unit* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press rocker switch I or L up or down repeatedly (Y page 277) until the desired air distribution symbol is shown in the display. X Setting the rear-compartment airflow using the front control panel* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Activate the Y rear compartment function via COMAND (Y page 181). The rear-compartment air conditioning can be controlled via the front control panel using the Y rear compartment function. X To increase/reduce: press the K rocker switch up or down. X Setting the rear-compartment airflow using the Rear-compartment control panel* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press rocker switch J up or down (Y page 277). X Demisting the windscreen i You should only select the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. Setting the airflow You can select different airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. You can also use COMAND to set the airflow (Y page 178). Setting the front-compartment airflow using the front control panel Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the K rocker switch up or down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the ¬ rocker switch comes on. The system automatically switches to the following functions: X Rcooling with air dehumidification on Rhigh airflow40 Rhigh temperature40 Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation 40 Depending * optional mode off on the outside temperature. Z Controls _ directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents, as well as the footwell air vents b directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents, as well as the demister vents W adjusts the air distribution automatically 283 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 284 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning 284 X To deactivate: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the ¬ rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:05; WK X Press the w rocker switch up or down. or X Press the K rocker switch up or down. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the "cooling function with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the demisting function. X i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Windows misted up on the outside X Activate the windscreen wipers. Activate the automatic air conditioning. switches off automatically after several minutes. i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the ¤ rocker switch lights up or goes out. X Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. G Risk of accident Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. i You should only select this setting until Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch comes on. Switching the rear window heating on/off i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- X the windscreen is clear again. X matically at high outside temperatures. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. G Risk of accident Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others. i The rear window heating has a high cur- rent draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear, as it only X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch goes out. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 285 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto- X Convenience closing (vehicles without a sliding sunroof*/with a sliding/tilting sunroof*): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* close automatically. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience opening (vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof*): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof* have reached their original position. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. X Convenience opening (vehicles without a sliding sunroof*/with a sliding/tilting sunroof*): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* open automatically. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. matically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5† Convenience opening/closing G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Do not place objects or lean against the side windows when they are being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the g rocker switch again. Press the button for stopping, opening or closing the side windows in the opposite direction as appropriate. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you open or close the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof*. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the g rocker switch again. If necessary, press the switch that stops, opens or closes the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* in the opposite direction. X Convenience closing (vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof*): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof* are closed. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activated. i If you open the side windows or the slid- ing/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Switching the residual heat on/off It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. * optional Z 285 Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:05; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 286 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning 286 i If you activate the "residual heat" function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X To activate: press the Ç rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the Ç rocker switch comes on. X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:05; WK X To deactivate: press the Ç rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the Ç rocker switch goes out. i The residual heat automatically switches off after around 30 minutes or if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe battery voltage drops i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Before activating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the temperature. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when the air conditioning is being controlled manually. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the rocker switch on the centre console. You can use COMAND (Y page 182) or the remote control to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected. X Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation* on/off Notes on the auxiliary heating/ventilation system G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G Risk of fire When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of the vehicle may become very hot, and highly inflammable material such as fuels could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:05; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 287 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console rocker switch 287 The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference Rsolid objects between the remote control and the vehicle remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space i The optimum range can be achieved if you The colours of the indicator lamps on the rocker switch have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation activated Red Auxiliary heating activated Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 182) hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the batteries in the remote control are low. Replace the remote control batteries (Y page 396). Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press & rocker switch : up or down. The red or the blue indicator lamp in & rocker switch : lights up. Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press & rocker switch : up or down. The red or the blue indicator lamp in & rocker switch : goes out. Auxiliary heating remote control : Display Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control = OFF – to deactivate auxiliary heating/ Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ; Y To check the status/set the departure time ventilation ? ON – to activate auxiliary heating/venti- lation A X To check the status/set the departure time Using the remote control, you can: Z Controls Rthe Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 288 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 288 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning Ractivate or deactivate the auxiliary heating/ventilation the status of the auxiliary heating/ ventilation i This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rcheck Rselect Rset Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:06; WK a departure time a departure time Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the ON button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Press the OFF button. The following messages can appear in the display: X Display The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is deactivated. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty (Y page 391). Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is activated. A malfunction has occurred in the auxiliary heating/ventilation. The heating/ventilation function selected by the system is not available. The vehicle battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty (Y page 391). The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty (Y page 391). The heating system has a fault or there is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating is not working. The auxiliary ventilation is still functioning (Y page 391). Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. Meaning Checking the status of the auxiliary heating X Press the X or Y button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is deactivated. A malfunction has occurred in the auxiliary heating/ventilation. The heating/ventilation function selected by the system is not available. The vehicle battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty (Y page 391). The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty (Y page 391). Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 289 Version: 2.11.7.7 Air conditioning The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. Setting a departure time X Press the X or Y button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the X or Y button to set the desired departure time. X Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating a set departure time X Press the X or Y button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the ON button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating a set departure time X Press the X or Y button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press button Y. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the OFF button. The display message OFF appears in the display. Activating/deactivating the heater booster function* The heater booster function helps the engine to reach its operating temperature faster during its warm-up phase, as well as helping to heat the vehicle interior faster. The heater booster function switches on when outside temperatures are low and the coolant temperature is less than 70 †. You can also activate the heater booster manually. i The longer you press the X or Y button, the faster the time changes. * optional 289 Z Controls 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:06; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 290 Version: 2.11.7.7 Sliding sunroof 290 i The fuel tank must be filled up to the reserve fuel level at least. Start the engine. To switch on: briefly press & rocker switch : up or down. Red indicator lamp in & rocker switch : lights up. X To switch off: briefly press & rocker switch : up or down. Red indicator lamp in & rocker switch : goes out. i When the sliding sunroof is open, apart from the normal airflow noises resonance noises may also occur. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. X X Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:06; WK i Related topics: Rconvenience opening from the outside (Y page 216) or from the inside (Y page 285) Rconvenience closing from the outside (Y page 216) or from the inside (Y page 285) Sliding sunroof Rautomatic closing of the sliding sunroof (PRE-SAFE) (Y page 44) General notes G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch and push it briefly in any direction to stop the sliding sunroof. Sliding/tilting sunroof* G Risk of injury Children could injure themselves if they operate the sliding sunroof. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G Risk of injury The glass in the panorama sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. The seals could otherwise be damaged. Overhead control panel : To open ; To close/lower = To raise Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull or push the switch in the corresponding direction. X i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:07; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 291 Version: 2.11.7.7 Sliding sunroof When opened automatically, the sliding/ tilting sunroof opens up to the position in which it was last stopped. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding/tilting sunroof. Once you have closed the sliding/tilting sunroof, you can close the cover by hand. The rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the interior of the vehicle. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature i The sliding/tilting sunroof does not close i The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened if: Rit is raised at the rear. You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof. Rit is blocked. X Immediately after it locks up, pull the switch again to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed with more force. If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during closing again: X Immediately after it locks up, pull the switch again to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Rno rain is falling on the windscreen (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport). Resetting Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof if it does not open smoothly. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X The sliding/tilting sunroof is raised fully at the rear. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. X Make sure that the sliding/tilting sunroof can be opened or closed fully again (Y page 290). X If this is not the case, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rain closing feature* If the ignition key is removed and the vehicle is locked, the sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply * optional Z Controls slightly again if it is obstructed while being closed by the rain closing feature. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. G Risk of injury If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during closing: 291 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:07; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 292 Version: 2.11.7.7 Sliding sunroof 292 arrow ; until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The panorama sliding sunroof is closed with more force. Panorama sliding sunroof* If the panorama sliding sunroof blocks during closing again: Controls X Overhead control panel : To open ; To close/lower = To raise Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull or push the switch in the corresponding direction. X i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature G Risk of injury You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the panorama sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the antientrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the panorama sliding sunroof. If the panorama sliding sunroof blocks during closing: X Immediately after the panorama sliding sunroof blocks, pull the switch again to the point of resistance in the direction of Immediately after the panorama sliding sunroof blocks, pull the switch again to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The panorama sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Rain closing feature* When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear Rit is blocked Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport) * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:08; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 293 Version: 2.11.7.7 Sliding sunroof Roller sunblinds for the panorama sliding sunroof* The roller sunblinds provide protection from the sun. G Risk of injury Operating the rear roller sunblind for the panorama sliding sunroof from the front The switch is on the front overhead control panel. Controls Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you open or close the roller sunblinds. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch and press the opening switch. Operating the front roller sunblind The switch is on the front overhead control panel. To open or close: press switch :. The rear roller sunblind opens or closes fully. X To stop: press switch : again. X i You must first open or close the rear roller sunblind fully before you can move it in the other direction. : To open ; To close = To open i The front roller sunblind can only be Operating the rear roller sunblind for the panorama sliding sunroof from the rear The switch is on the rear door control panel. closed when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull or push the switch in the corresponding direction. X i When you open the roller sunblind in the direction of arrow =, the panorama sliding sunroof is raised at the rear after the opening procedure. * optional 293 X To open/close manually: press or pull switch : to the point of resistance and Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 294 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing 294 hold it until the rear roller sunblind has reached the desired position. X To open/close fully: press or pull switch : briefly beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind Controls 03. Mar 2009 15:18:08; WK Reset the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds do not close smoothly. The switch is on the front overhead control panel. Check whether the panorama sliding sunroof can be opened fully again (Y page 292). X If this is not the case, it will be necessary to reset the panorama sliding sunroof once more. X Resetting the rear sunblind The rear roller sunblind can only be reset using the switch on the rear door control panel. Pull switch : repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed. X Keep the switch pulled for an additional second. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch in the direction of arrow : repeatedly until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. X Keep the switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the switch in the direction of arrow : repeatedly until the front roller sunblind is closed. X Keep the switch pulled for an additional second. X Check whether the front roller sunblind can be fully opened again (Y page 293). X Loading and stowing Stowage compartments G Risk of injury The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange Rhave direction suddenly an accident Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:10; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 295 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing 295 Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be carried in the luggage net. Do not carry hard objects in the ruffled pockets. Objects must not protrude over the top of the ruffled pockets. Glove compartment you will find the following installed in the glove compartment: an audio and video AUX jack, a USB socket or Media Interface*, a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod, USB devices, and a bracket for a remote control*. The glove compartment can be cooled (Y page 281). To open: press button :. X To lock: insert the emergency key element (Y page 392) into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 3. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element (Y page 392) into the lock and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to position 2. X X To open: press marking :. Stowage compartments in the centre console Front stowage compartment To open: push handle : forwards in the direction of the arrow. X To close: briefly press handle : forwards in the direction of the arrow. X Rear stowage compartment Spectacles compartment You can store spectacles in the overhead control panel. * optional Z Controls i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:11; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 296 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing 296 X To open: press marking : at the front. Controls Stowage compartments under the armrest To open: press button :. Folding table ; is released. X Guide folding table ; upwards slowly in the direction of the arrow. Folding table ; engages audibly. X Release folding table ; in the desired position. X To fold in: lift folding table ; and guide it downwards. X Push folding table ; against the seat back until it engages. X Stowage compartment under the rear seat armrest X To open the stowage compartment/ telephone compartment: press button : and fold the armrest to the left or right. i In the stowage compartment there is a partition which can be used to divide up the stowage compartment. Folding table* G Risk of injury Keep the folding table closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident, you could be injured by objects on the table or by the folding table itself. X To open: pull handle : upwards and fold up the armrest. Stowage compartment underneath the rear seat armrest* X To open: press button : and fold up the armrest. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:12; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 297 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing Stowage box between the rear seats (single seats in the rear compartment)* Rbrake sharply Rchange Rare 297 direction suddenly involved in an accident Controls Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, the drinks could spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. Cup holder* in front of the armrest X To open: pull handle : backwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage box in the rear compartment* X To open: press marking ; at the front. i You can remove the cup holder to clean it. Clean the cup holder with clean, lukewarm water only. To remove: slide catch : backwards and pull cup holder upwards. X To insert: insert the cup holder and slide catch : forwards. X X X To open: fold down the rear seat armrest. Pull handle : and fold down cover ;. i It will be easier to open the cover when Cup holder in the rear seat armrest the rear seats are in the basic position. Cup holder G Risk of injury Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:13; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 298 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing 298 X To open: press the front of cup holder :. Unfolding the skibag and loading skis Controls Cup holder in the rear seat armrest* Fold down the rear seat armrest. Turn handle : and pull it upwards in the direction of the arrow. X Fold down cover ;. X X X To open: press the front of cup holder :. Luggage nets i It will be easier to open the cover when the rear seats are in the basic position. G Risk of injury Only place lightweight items in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky, sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the event of an accident, the luggage net will not secure the transported goods. Skibag* G Risk of injury The skibag is designed to carry up to four pairs of skis. Do not use the skibag to carry any other type of load. The skibag must always be secured when laden. Otherwise, injuries could be caused by it in the event of an accident. X Pull skibag : into the vehicle interior and unfold it. X Open the boot lid. Pull handle : on the flap. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:14; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 299 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing Fold the flap to the side until it is held in place by the magnet. X Slide the skis into the skibag from the boot. 299 will prevent access to the boot from the vehicle interior. X Removing the skibag The skibag can be removed for cleaning or drying. When the skibag has been removed, always drive with the boot lid closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior. X X Open the boot lid. X Open flap ;. Press recess : to the left and pull out the frame with the skibag. Pull strap : tight by the loose end until the skis are held firmly inside the skibag. X X X Engage hook : in securing ring ;. Pull the strap tight by the loose end. Removing the skis and folding up the skibag Loosen the two straps. X Remove hook : from securing ring ;. X Take the skis out of the skibag. X Close the flap in the boot. X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up. X Stow the skibag in the rear seat armrest. X Fold the cover back up. X Boot Stowage well On vehicles with TIREFIT or the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*, it is possible to store a suitcase in the stowage well underneath the front part of the boot floor. ! Fold down the suitcase handle before closing the boot. You could otherwise damage the boot lid. i You should always close the flap in the boot if you do not require the skibag. This * optional Z Controls G Risk of poisoning Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 300 03. Mar 2009 15:18:15; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 300 Version: 2.11.7.7 Loading and stowing X Pull down hook 2 by tab 1. Roof rack system* Controls G Risk of accident 1 Boot floor 2 Stowage well for suitcases Stowage well beneath the boot floor On the S 600 model, the rear part of the boot floor can be folded forward. An incorrectly secured roof rack or load could work loose from the vehicle and thereby cause an accident. Follow the roof rack manufacturer's installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you 1 Stowage well 2 Stowage compartment Hook only use roof rack systems which have been tested and approved for MercedesBenz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, make sure that you can: Rraise the sliding/tilting sunroof* fully Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof* fully Ropen the boot lid fully ! Do not use the hook to lash down loads. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:15; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 301 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X 301 Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor from retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Rear window roller sunblind* ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Sun visors G Risk of accident Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. Otherwise, you could be dazzled, impairing your view of traffic conditions. As a result, you could cause an accident. : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover At temperatures below -20 °C, the window blind cannot be operated. Operating from the driver's seat To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the start position. X Mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. * optional Z Controls Features Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 302 03. Mar 2009 15:18:16; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 302 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features Operating from the rear compartment Controls The switch is located on the rear door control panel. To open: slide cover : at the mark forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the ribbing at the sides and lift it up and out ;. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Ashtray in the rear compartment The ashtrays are located in the rear doors. Extending X Pull switch : up and release it. The roller sunblind extends fully. X To stop: press switch : down briefly. The roller sunblind stops briefly and retracts again. Retracting X Press switch : down past the point of resistance and release it. The roller sunblind retracts fully. X To stop: pull switch : up. The roller sunblind stops briefly and extends again. Ashtray* (smoker's package) Ashtray in the cockpit To open: lift up cover ;. X To remove the insert: press open cover ; past the stop. Insert : pops out of the holder. X Pull insert : up to remove it. X To refit the insert: press insert : into the holder until it engages. X Cigarette lighter* (smoker's package) G Risk of injury and fire Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:18; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 303 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features 303 Centre console, front : Socket in the glove compartment A socket is additionally fitted in the centre console on vehicles with the non-smoker's package. Centre console, rear compartment Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press in cigarette lighter :. Cigarette lighter : will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X : Socket on the centre console Socket in the rear passenger compartment 12 V sockets The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Illustration of a vehicle with the smoker's package* : Socket * optional Z Controls Dashboard socket Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:18; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 304 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features 304 On vehicles with the non-smoker's package, there are two sockets in the rear-compartment centre console. Controls Socket in the boot The cooling output of the coolbox depends on the ambient temperature and the selected cooling level. Should numerous electrical consumers be switched on or the battery not be sufficiently charged, the coolbox will reduce its cooling output or switch off. This is indicated by the flashing indicator lamp in the switch. The cooling function will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage. : Socket Vanity mirror in the rear compartment To open: pull handle ; on the cover. Fold the cover out to the front. X To switch on the cooling: press switch = to ON. The indicator lamp in the switch flashes for approximately 30 seconds and then lights up constantly. X To switch off the cooling: press switch = to OFF. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. X To set the cooling level to low or high: press the left-hand or right-hand side of switch : respectively. X X To open: press marking 1. The vanity mirror folds downwards in the direction of the arrow. X To close: fold up the vanity mirror until it engages. X Coolbox* G Risk of fire Do not cover the ventilation grille of the coolbox in the boot and do not transport highly flammable materials in the boot. Otherwise, there is a risk of fire. Caring for the coolbox If you do not need to use the coolbox for an extended period, you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time. Removing and fitting the coolbox You can remove the coolbox for maintenance purposes or to fit the skibag (Y page 298). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:19; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 305 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features 305 G Risk of injury To remove: switch off the coolbox. Pull mains plug : down and remove. X Unscrew both screws ;. X Pull out the coolbox. X Close flap =. X To install: swing flap = to the side until it is locked in place by the magnets. X Insert the coolbox. X Tighten both screws ;. X Connect plug :. X X To ensure optimum reception quality for mobile phones in the vehicle, and to minimise mutual influences between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field strength within the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can obtain these mobile phone brackets from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Mobile phone* G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so when the traffic situation allows. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and, thereby, jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you must only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate, reflection-free, exterior aerial. * optional Inserting the mobile phone Open the telephone compartment (Y page 296). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, you can speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 237). X Z Controls Excessive electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 306 03. Mar 2009 15:18:20; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 306 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features Controls When you take the key out of the ignition lock, the mobile phone stays on but you can no longer use the hands-free system. If you are making a call and you would like to take the key out of the ignition lock, first remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Otherwise, the call will be ended. Handset in the rear centre armrest* (Bluetooth handset) The Bluetooth handset is located in the armrest in the rear compartment. You can find out more information on how to operate the Bluetooth handset, in the "Handset in rear armrest" supplement. Infrared reflecting windscreen* The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz range. Vehicles with Night View Assist Plus* : Area transparent to radio waves (to the left of the rain sensor cover) ; Rain sensor cover In order to operate radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll systems, area : on the windscreen is transparent to radio waves. In this area, you can install radio-controlled systems. The area can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windscreen. Garage door opener* The remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. i The garage door opener is only available Vehicles without Night View Assist Plus* : Areas transparent to radio waves (to the left and right of the rain sensor cover) ; Rain sensor cover for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available from: Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre HomeLink® hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or +49 (0) 6838 907-277 (charges apply) Rthe Rthe Internet: www.homelink.com * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:20; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 307 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features 307 of the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5 to 20 cm. i The distance between the garage door's Remote control in the rear-view mirror G Risk of accident Only press the transmitter button on the integrated remote control if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. Programming the remote control i You will achieve the best results by inserting new batteries in the garage door's remote control before programming it. Erase the memory of the integrated remote control (Y page 308) before programming it for the first time. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons ; to ? on the integrated remote control. Indicator lamp : starts to flash after a short while. It flashes about once a second. X i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately the first time the transmitter button is programmed. If this transmitter button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only start flashing at a rate of once a second after 20 seconds have elapsed. Keep the transmitter buttons depressed. X Point the garage door's remote control with the transmitter towards the left-hand side X Keep the transmitter button on the garage door's remote control depressed until indicator lamp : starts to flash rapidly. The programming was successful if indicator lamp : flashes rapidly. X Release the transmitter buttons on the garage door's remote control and the integrated remote control. X If indicator lamp : goes out after approximately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidly before this: Release the transmitter buttons on the integrated and portable remote controls. X Repeat the programming procedure. When doing so, change the distance between the garage door's remote control and the transmitter buttons in the rear-view mirror. X i If the garage door system works with a rolling code, after programming you must synchronise the remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror with the garage door system receiver. You will find further information in the garage door opening system's operating instructions, e.g. the sections on "Synchronising the transmitter" or "Registering a new transmitter". You can also call the hotline mentioned above. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated remote control will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please read the operating instructions for the garage door system. Z Controls remote control and the integrated garage door opener depends on the system of the garage door drive. You might require several attempts. You should test every position for at least 20 seconds before trying another position. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:21; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 308 Version: 2.11.7.7 Features 308 Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the transmitter button on the rearview mirror that you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up continuously. Garage door system with rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes briefly and then lights up for approximately two seconds. This is repeated for up to 20 seconds. Controls X i The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the transmitter button is being pressed. The transmission will be halted after a maximum of 20 seconds and indicator lamp : will flash. Press the transmitter button again, if necessary. Slide seat backwards. To fit: place the floormat in position. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X X X X To remove: pull floormat off retainers ;. Remove the floormat. Clearing the remote control memory Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold transmitter buttons ; and ? for approximately 20 seconds until indicator lamp : flashes rapidly. The memory is cleared. X i You should clear the remote control memory before selling the vehicle. Floormat* on the driver's side G Risk of accident Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be correctly secured at all times using retainers and press-studs. Before you drive off check the floormats and secure if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured can slip and, thereby, interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 309 Version: 2.11.7.7 309 Running-in notes ............................... Refuelling ........................................... Engine compartment ........................ Tyres and wheels .............................. Winter driving ................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving abroad ................................... 310 310 313 317 324 325 327 Trailer towing* .................................. 328 Service ............................................... 331 Care .................................................... 332 Operation 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:22; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Operation 310 03. Mar 2009 15:18:22; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 310 Version: 2.11.7.7 Refuelling Running-in notes Refuelling The first 1,500 km Refuelling G Risk of accident G Risk of explosion New brake pads/linings only have optimal braking performance after several hundred kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. This also applies when brake pads/linings or brake discs have been changed. Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Before refuelling, turn off the engine and the auxiliary heating*. If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RTherefore, you should drive at varying road and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. Avoid any contact with fuels. You can damage your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuel or if you inhale fuel vapours. RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear. RChange gear in good time. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. Rtry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Ronly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional notes on running in AMG vehicles: Rdo not drive faster than 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. Ronly bring the engine up to a maximum speed of 4,500 rpm for a brief period. i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or the axle gear on your vehicle have been replaced. G Risk of injury G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This causes damage to the fuel system and engine and could result in the vehicle catching fire. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even a small quantity of the wrong fuel will damage the injection system. Damage resulting from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the implied warranty. ! Do not start the engine if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel could enter the fuel lines. This would require draining of the fuel tank and fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. When you open or close the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS GO*, the fuel filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked. The position of the fuel filler cap is to the rear on the right. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster 8. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:22; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 311 Version: 2.11.7.7 Refuelling The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. 311 octane number of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. Otherwise, you could impair engine output or damage the engine. : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table ? Fuel type To open: press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Vehicles with a diesel engine: if the fuel tank has been run completely dry, it will be necessary to bleed the fuel system (Y page 384). Petrol (EN 228) ! Refuel using only unleaded, sulphur-free premium grade petrol with a minimum recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the quality of the available petrol may not be adequate and could cause coking around the inlet valve. In such cases, and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Further information on "Fuel" (Y page 425). AMG vehicles and twelve-cylinder engines ! Refuel using only unleaded Super Plus with a minimum octane number of 98 RON/88 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. Otherwise, you could impair engine output or damage the engine. i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. You must avoid driving at full throttle. ! In emergencies, and only when the rec- ommended fuel is not available, you may also use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results in considerably higher petrol consumption and significantly reduced performance. Avoid drivZ Operation i As a temporary measure, only when the Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 312 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 312 Version: 2.11.7.7 Refuelling ing at full throttle, and only drive in drive program C. If no fuel other than regular petrol 91 RON/ 82.5 MON or a lower grade is permanently available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel by the local after-sales service. Diesel (EN 590, DIN 51628) G Risk of fire Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:22; WK Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This causes damage to the fuel system and engine and could result in the vehicle catching fire. ! Refuel using only diesel which conforms to European standard EN 590 or German standard DIN 51628. Otherwise, you could impair engine output or damage the engine. ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par- ticulate filter in countries outside the EU, only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight (50 ppm) should be used. ! In countries in which diesel with a higher sulphur content is available (e.g. 0.035 percent by weight), the engine oil should be renewed at more frequent intervals. More information about intervals for changing the engine oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! The use of fuels which do not meet the requirements of EN 590 or German standard DIN 51628 can cause increased wear, and damage the engine and the exhaust system. Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel Rheating oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do not use any special additives (exception: flow improvers – see "Low outside temperatures"). Damage caused by the use of unapproved fuels or additives is not covered by the implied warranty. Further information on "Fuel" (Y page 425). Low outside temperatures The flow properties of diesel may be inadequate at low ambient temperatures. To prevent operating problems, diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. Your vehicle must be refuelled with winter diesel at temperatures of –5 † or below. You can use winter diesel at temperatures down to about –20 † without any problems. If only "summer diesel" or less cold-resistant "winter diesel" (e.g. in Mediterranean regions) is available, you should add an amount of flow improver to the fuel corresponding to the outside temperature. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become inadequate. Otherwise, malfunctions can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. Flow improver The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further infor- Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:22; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 313 Version: 2.11.7.7 Engine compartment Engine compartment Bonnet G Risk of accident Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open up and block your view. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. Opening G Risk of injury There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner’s Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G Risk of injury The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area. Otherwise, you could be injured. * optional Vehicles with a petrol engine: The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch components of the ignition system (ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug connector or test socket) when: Rthe engine is running. Rthe engine is being started. Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand. You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. Therefore, never touch fuel injection system components when: Rthe engine is running. Rthe engine is being started. Rthe ignition is switched on. You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G Risk of injury The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper rods. Make sure that the windscreen wiper is switched off. Remove the key or make sure that no ignition level has been selected on KEYLESS GO*. In the instrument cluster, all of the indicator lamps must be out. Z Operation mation from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 313 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:23; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 314 Version: 2.11.7.7 Engine compartment 314 The bonnet release lever is located in the driver's footwell. Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. X i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. Operation Engine oil X Pull bonnet release lever :. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. The handle for opening the bonnet is located above the radiator grille. Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Checking the engine oil level When doing so: Rthe vehicle should be parked on level ground. Rthe engine should be switched off for at least five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe engine should be switched off for at least 30 minutes if the engine is not at operating temperature (i.e. if you only start the engine briefly). Using the on-board computer* i Only possible on the S 600, S 420 CDI and X Pull handle ; of the bonnet catch outwards from the radiator grille and lift the bonnet from underneath by the radiator grille. Closing G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. the S 65 AMG. On all other models, a dipstick is used to check the engine oil level (Y page 315). Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. X Press the ; or = button to select the Service menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select Engine oil level. X Press the a button. The multi-function display shows the following message: Engine oil level X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:23; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 315 Version: 2.11.7.7 Engine compartment Switch off the engine and wait for five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature, or for about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temperature (if you had started the engine only briefly), before measuring. Measuring now Measurement correct only if vehicle level The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the multi-function display: REngine oil level OK X RAdd i If you wish to cancel the measurement, 1.0 l engine oil when next refuelling press the % button on the multi-function steering wheel. RAdd RAdd 2.0 l engine oil when next refuelling X Using the oil dipstick Operation 1.5 l engine oil when next refuelling Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 315). Other messages in the multi-function display If the engine is at normal operating temperature and there is too much oil, you will see the following message: Eng. oil level Reduce oil level X Have excess oil siphoned off. ! There is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter if there is excess oil in the engine. If the Turn on ignition to see engine oil level message appears: X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. You will see the following message if you did not observe the required waiting period: Waiting period for engine oil level not observed X Repeat the measurement after about five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. X Repeat the measurement after about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temperature (if the engine was only started briefly). The following message appears if the engine is running: Engine oil level Not when engine on 315 Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Insert oil dipstick : into the oil dipstick tube to the stop, and take it out again. The oil level is correct if the level is between the minimum mark = and maximum mark ;. X Top up the oil if necessary. X Topping up the engine oil H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be damaging the environment. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:24; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 316 Version: 2.11.7.7 Engine compartment 316 must display less than 70 †. Otherwise, you could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. The coolant expansion tank is located in the engine compartment on the right when viewed in the direction of travel. Operation Example X X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove. Top up with the amount of oil required . i The difference in quantity between the minimum mark and maximum mark is approximately 2 litres. ! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil is added and the oil level is above the maximum mark on the dipstick, the engine or catalytic converter could be damaged. Have excess oil siphoned off. Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 426). X Coolant Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster. Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. There is sufficient coolant in expansion tank ; if the coolant is level with marker bar = in the filler neck when cold or approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. X Top up the coolant if necessary. X Replace cap : and tighten all the way to the stop. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 428). X Windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system* The washer fluid reservoir for the windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system is located in the engine compartment on G Risk of injury The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:25; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 317 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. 317 fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB SummerFit). X At temperatures below freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water, antifreeze additive and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X Vehicles without ABC* Tyres and wheels Points to remember ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Vehicles with ABC* i Add windscreen washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. G Risk of fire Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling washer fluid concentrate. ! Only use windscreen washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. X At temperatures above freezing: X * optional ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended* (with run-flat characteristics) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres* should only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by MercedesBenz. If you use other tyres, wheels or accessories Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage that may result. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you use tyres other than those tested and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, characteristics such as handling, vehicle noise emissions and fuel consumption may be adversely affected. In addition, the Z Operation X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 318 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 318 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels wheels may come into contact with the body or axle components when heavily loaded or when driving with snow chains. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:25; WK recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. G Risk of accident Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle or are not used as they should be, can impair driving safety. As a result, you could cause an accident. Before purchasing and using them, enquire about their suitability, legal stipulations and factory recommendations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This invalidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if tyres of the same size are required on the front and rear wheels. RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel*. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). ! Store tyres that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 319). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre pressure monitoring systems) other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres including the spare tyre*, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 319). Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:25; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 319 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, can get damaged. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. i You may fit a spare tyre* against the direction of rotation. MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system allows you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. The MOExtended run-flat system may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or with the tyre pressure monitor* and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. i Vehicles with the MOExtended run-flat system are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit.41 It is therefore recommended to additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit when 41 Only fitting tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit is available from any quali- fied specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 409). Tyre tread G Risk of accident Operation reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres examined at a specialist workshop, for example at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. Thus, you should replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less as they will no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the steering wheel so that you can see the tyre tread more easily. You could otherwise lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Tyre pressures i You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. The applicable value for the spare wheel*/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel* is stated on the spare wheel and in the technical data section. for certain countries. * optional 319 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 320 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 320 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels G Risk of accident Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s driving safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Therefore, you should regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:25; WK To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor*, the tyre pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. G Risk of accident Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other than the standard valve cap. In particular, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors which are screwed on to the valve may overload it and cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve is kept open continuously, which may lead to air loss. G Risk of accident Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies. Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved by Mercedes-Benz has been fitted on the tyre valve. Tyre pressures that are too low have a negative effect on vehicle safety, which could lead to your causing an accident. If possible, you should only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed you are driving at and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure may change by approximately 0.1 bar per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rincrease the likelihood of tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Also check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel*. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. Tyre pressure information: the values on the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler flap) are for the use of the vehicle in partially laden and fully laden condition whilst driving at maximum speed. Despite the values stated on the tyre pressure information label, for the vehicle with "partially laden up to 210 km/h" status, the values can be reduced as follows, without a reduction in safety: -0.4 bar/-6 psi: all models without 4MATIC, not S 600 and not S 420 CDI -0.3 bar/-4 psi: all models with 4MATIC, S 600 and S 420 CDI This improves the ride comfort of your vehicle; however, the fuel consumption may increase slightly. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:25; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 321 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multi-function display. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad Ryou conditions are wintry. are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged Rfitted the wheels or tyres new wheels or tyres Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four tyres is set correctly for the operating conditions concerned. X Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 319). X G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in vehicle instability when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. In the multi-function display you will see the standard display (Y page 229) X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: X Z Operation Tyre pressure loss warning 321 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 322 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels 322 Tyre press. now OK? Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. You will see the following message in the multi-function display: Run Flat Indicator restarted After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or X When the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press 9 or : to select Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. i The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. X Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:26; WK Tyre pressure monitor* If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the correct wheel electronics units are fitted to all wheels. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign body. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. Checking tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. X The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes or if you have not driven faster than 25 km/h since starting the vehicle, the following message appears: Tyre pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes i The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station with a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. The tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge when the vehicle is at high altitude are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. i After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:26; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 323 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the specified values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values, e.g. if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged Rfitted the wheels or tyres new wheels or tyres i You will find the menu overview on (Y page 230). If you wish to define the new reference values manually: X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 319). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The current pressure in each individual tyre is displayed, or the following message appears: Tyre pressures displayed after driving a few minutes X Press the : button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Use current pressure values as new reference values X Press the a button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Tyre pressure monitor restarted After a few minutes of driving, the current pressures are adopted as the new monitoring values. Cancelling the restart X Press the % button. or X Press the 9 button to leave the menu. Other messages in the multi-function display If in multi-function display the following messages appear: Please correct the tyre pressure X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Interchanging the wheels G Risk of accident Interchange the front and rear wheels only if they have the same dimensions: for example size, offset, etc. After every wheel interchange/change, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop that has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work Z Operation individual wheels is not possible, the display message Tyre Pressure Monitor Active is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. 323 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 324 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 324 Version: 2.11.7.7 Winter driving relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 150 Nm. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts of the correct size which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:26; WK The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. Interchange the wheels every 5,000 km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear, provided that the vehicle has the same size front and rear tyres. Do not reverse the direction of tyre rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor*. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor*, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Always have the wheels interchanged/ changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Winter driving Points to remember Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at the onset of winter. 42 Only Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 323). Winter tyres Use winter tyres at temperatures below +7 ˚C and in wintry road conditions. Only winter tyres displaying the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide optimum grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow the ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC* driving systems to function optimally in winter, as these tyres have been designed specifically for driving in snow. Use winter tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. G Risk of accident Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced immediately. They are no longer suitable for winter use and can no longer provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the winter tyres you have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent Speedtronic42 to the maximum permissible speed for the winter tyres (Y page 256). Once you have fitted the winter tyres: X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 319). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 322). available for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 325 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving tips G Risk of accident If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired owing to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel* replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains which have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/ tyre combinations. Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. ROnly fit snow chains in pairs and to the rear wheels, even on vehicles with 4MATIC*. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. On vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 257) or Active Body Control (ABC)* (Y page 259), if snow chains have been fitted, you may only drive at raised vehicle level. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Winter driving G Risk of accident Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the selector lever to N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. Driving tips Rolling with the engine switched off G Risk of accident Never switch the engine off while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake and you could therefore lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Brakes G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 55). This way, you can allow the * optional 325 Z Operation 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:26; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 326 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 326 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving tips G Risk of accident Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. Downhill gradients On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. i This also applies if you have activated Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:26; WK cruise control, Speedtronic, Distronic* or Distronic Plus*. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Heavy and light loads If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet roads If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. You must brake harder. You must therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet surface, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This way the brake discs will become warm, drying more quickly, which will protect them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salted roads G Risk of accident The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake disc. New brake pads/linings For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. G Risk of accident New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum brak- * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 327 Version: 2.11.7.7 Driving abroad ing effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. Braking can therefore cause noises. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. Because of this, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. Tyre grip Driving on wet roads If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permissible still water depth when the vehicle level is raised is 25 cm. Ryou should drive no faster than at walking pace. ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems and transmission. G Risk of accident While the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. Otherwise, you could cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. 327 Driving abroad Points to remember An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. The Service Hotline's current telephone numbers for use when you are abroad are to be found in the "Service24h" chapter of the Service Booklet. Only low-octane fuel is available in certain countries. You can find further information about fuel grades on (Y page 310). Z Operation 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:26; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 328 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 328 Version: 2.11.7.7 Trailer towing* Symmetrical dipped beam If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on sides of the road opposite to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less. X Have the headlamps switched over at a qualified specialist workshop, e. g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:27; WK Remember to set the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam when you return to driving on the same side of the road as that of the country in which your vehicle was registered. You may otherwise dazzle the oncoming traffic and could cause an accident. G Risk of accident Make sure that the ball coupling is fully engaged both when it is folded in and when it is folded out. The indicator lamp is not lit. Do not pull the telescopic lever if a trailer is attached. The trailer could otherwise come loose. Pull telescopic lever : slightly upwards. X Pull telescopic lever : out forwards. X Pull telescopic lever : fully upwards. The ball coupling disengages and folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ; flashes. X Guide telescopic lever : back again. X Trailer towing* Folding out the ball coupling G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fit the ball coupling. The telescopic lever is under the cover on the left-hand side of the boot. Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The power socket folds down automatically. The multi-function display shows the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message until the ball coupling is engaged. X Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling. X Notes on towing a trailer G Risk of accident When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:27; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 329 Version: 2.11.7.7 Trailer towing* Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer You will find the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, in the vehicle documents. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle in the "Technical data" section. You will find installation dimensions and loads in the "Technical data" section . The maximum drawbar load of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling is 85 kg. However, the actual noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer coupling or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Bear in mind that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight. When towing a trailer, where possible set the tyre pressures for the permissible gross weight which you find in the table on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap (higher values). i On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter accord- * optional ing to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. Coupling up a trailer G Risk of injury Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could become trapped between the bumper and trailer drawbar. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X X Driving tips G Risk of accident If the Check trailer hitch locking mechanism message appears in the multifunction display while the vehicle is in motion, pull over immediately and check whether the ball coupling is correctly engaged. i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 55). In Germany, the maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer and is either 80 km/h or 100 km/h. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. G Risk of accident Always observe the maximum speed permitted in Germany for vehicle/trailer combinations, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. This lowers the risk of an accident. Z Operation Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight 329 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 330 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 330 Version: 2.11.7.7 Trailer towing* When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas Ris an increased braking distance affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:27; WK more sensitive steering Rconsumes climbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: Do not accelerate. Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. X X G Risk of accident On no account should you attempt to draw the vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing speed. more fuel On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. i This also applies if you have activated Folding in the ball coupling i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. cruise control, Distronic*/Distronic Plus* or Speedtronic. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. Driving tips RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradient- X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Otherwise, they could be injured. Pull telescopic lever : slightly upwards. Pull telescopic lever : out forwards. X Pull telescopic lever : fully upwards. The ball coupling disengages and folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ; flashes. X Guide telescopic lever : back again. X X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:28; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 331 Version: 2.11.7.7 Service X 331 To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0, respectively. Trailer with 7-pin connector Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. Indicator lamp ; goes out and the message in the multi-function display disappears. Operation X If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Fitting the adapter Trailer power supply When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket outlet is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. ! You can connect consumers with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can obtain further information about installing the trailer electrics from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Open the socket cover. Insert connector with lug : into groove ; on the socket and turn the connector clockwise to the stop. X Make the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. Service ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. The service due date is shown in the multi-function display, for example: Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 332 Version: 2.11.7.7 Care 332 Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:28; WK Service A due in .. days Service A due in .. km Service A due The letter indicates how much time the workshop will require to carry out the service work. The letters displayed range from A for a short service duration to H for a long service duration. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. To maintain the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed before disconnecting the battery. or X Subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display after reconnecting the battery. Hiding the service message If the service due date has not yet been exceeded, the service message disappears automatically after a few seconds. You can also hide the service message yourself. X Press the % button on the multi-function steering wheel. lidated and goodwill settlements may be refused. Calling up the service due date Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the ignition. X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ASSYST PLUS. X Press a. The multi-function display shows the service due date. Care Care and cleaning products Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. To care for your vehicle, use the care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, coarse or rough cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Service due date exceeded A display message is shown in the multi-function display, for example: Service A due Service A .. days overdue Service A .. km overdue i If you fail to have the service performed by the specified date, you may be violating applicable laws. Your warranty may be inva- Rcleaning agents containing solvents and do not scour. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. You can otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces or protective films. H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not park the vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, especially if Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 333 Version: 2.11.7.7 Care the wheels have just been cleaned with a wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause rapid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park the vehicle when it is at normal operating temperature. Exterior care Automatic car wash G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when Hold or Distronic Plus* is activated. Therefore, deactivate Hold and Distronic Plus before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the beginning. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. There is otherwise a risk of damage to the exterior mirrors. ! When washing your vehicle in a tow- through car wash, make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. RVehicles with a key: Do not remove the key from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off, as this automatically shifts the automatic transmission to park position P and locks the wheels, unless you have previously shifted the automatic transmission to N. RVehicles with KEYLESS GO*: Do not open the driver's or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off, as this shifts the automatic * optional 333 transmission to park position P and locks the wheels. ! Make sure that the side windows are com- pletely closed, that the ventilation/heater blower is turned off and that the windscreen wiper switch is set to 0. Otherwise, the rain/light sensor may be activated, triggering unintended wiper movements. This could cause damage to the vehicle. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax and drying agents from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. High-pressure cleaners G Risk of accident Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle (at least 30 cm). Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor joint Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Z Operation 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:28; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 334 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 334 Version: 2.11.7.7 Care Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to failures or leaks. Remove: Rtree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Matt finish care* Your vehicle has a clear matt finish. For this reason, you should make sure that you adhere to the following instructions to avoid damage to paintwork due to improper treatment. Rtar Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic Benz care products, use only the insect remover and the car shampoo. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Remove the following types of dirt immediately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. Soak: Rinsect Rbird remains with insect remover droppings with water and rinse off the treated surface afterwards. plates or similar items to painted surfaces. Otherwise, you could damage the paintwork. ! When caring for your paintwork, do not i From the range of available Mercedes- with silicone remover ! Do not affix: ish the vehicle. Polishing will make the paintwork shine. use paint cleaner, grinding or polishing products, or gloss preservers such as wax. These products are only suitable for highgloss finishes. Using them on a vehicle with a matt finish results in serious damage to the surface (gleaming, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. stains with tar remover Rwax ! Under no circumstances should you pol- Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:28; WK Cleaning the windows X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product approved and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Under certain circumstances, deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may prevent water from draining away leading to corrosion damage. Cleaning the wiper blades G Risk of injury Before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or press the Start/Stop button* until all indicator lamps have gone out in the instrument cluster. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and cause injury. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not clean the wiper blades too often, as this will result in damage to the graphite coating. This could cause wiper noise. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully with a damp cloth. X Fold the wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. X 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 335 Version: 2.11.7.7 Care 335 Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. Operation 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:29; WK Cleaning the reversing camera* Cleaning the headlamps X Clean the plastic lenses of the headlamps with a wet sponge and windscreen washer fluid or cleaning cloths. ! Only use washer fluid or cleaning cloths suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Cleaning the sensors* X ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will ensure that their original shine is restored. ! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with alkaline-based cleaning agents such as wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product approved by Mercedes-Benz. Trailer coupling* X Clean sensors : for the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! If you clean the sensors using a high-pres- sure cleaner or steam cleaner, observe the manufacturer's information on maintaining the correct distance between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner. * optional The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove any rust using a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 336 Version: 2.11.7.7 Care 336 After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball coupling and the ball coupling recess of the vehicle. X Treat the lock with an oil that is acid and resin-free. X Check that the vehicle's trailer coupling is working properly. X ! Observe the note on care provided by the trailer manufacturer. i Maintenance of the ball coupling and Operation 03. Mar 2009 15:18:29; WK trailer coupling can also be performed by any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. Interior care Cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard G Risk of injury Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing solvents cause the surface to become porous and in the event of an airbag being triggered, plastic parts that have become loose could cause considerable injuries. Wipe the dashboard and steering wheel boss with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth) and cleaning agent. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the COMAND display Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/ LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based solvents or petrol Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household clean- ing agents These may damage the display surface. Do not exert pressure when cleaning the display surface as this may lead to irreversible damage. Cleaning the seat covers ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara covers, as these are too aggressive and, if used often, may damage the cover. ! You should clean: Rgenuine leather covers with a damp cloth, then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. For leather care, use a leather care agent recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois- tened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e. g. washing-up liquid). Rfabric covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e. g. washing-up liquid). When cleaning, take care not to rub too vigorously and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:29; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 337 Version: 2.11.7.7 Care RAlcantara covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the quality (both appearance and comfort) of the covers is retained over time. Cleaning Night View Assist Plus * ! Do not attempt to clean the lens of the Night View Assist camera. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Fold down the camera cover by the recess. X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in front of the Night View Assist camera. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the wooden trim* and trim strips Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X ! If you are using a glass cleaner, do not spray it onto the lens of the Night View Assist camera. Cleaning the plastic trim ! Do not affix to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Ensure that cosmetics, insect repellent and suntan lotion do not come into contact with the vehicle's trim. This will protect the vehicle's high-quality trim and help retain its overall appearance. * optional Z Operation the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. 337 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 338 03. Mar 2009 15:18:29; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 338 Version: 2.11.7.7 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 339 Version: 2.11.7.7 339 Where will I find...? ........................... Display messages ............................. Troubleshooting ................................ Locking/unlocking in an emergency ................................................. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints .................................. Changing batteries (keys, remote controls, headphones) ...................... Changing bulbs ................................. Replacing the wiper blades .............. Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. 340 342 374 392 394 395 397 399 400 410 414 416 Practical advice 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:31; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 340 Version: 2.11.7.7 Where will I find...? 340 Where will I find...? Warning triangle The first-aid kit is located in the luggage net on the right-hand side at the rear of the boot. The warning triangle is secured on the inside of the boot lid. Release retainer strap :. X Remove first-aid kit ; from the luggage net. Practical advice X Turn lever ; 90° in the direction of the arrow. X Remove warning triangle :. X Setting up the warning triangle Fire extinguisher* i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment under the driver's seat. X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors ; up to form a triangle and lock them at the top using pressstud :. First-aid kit i Check the expiry date of the first-aid kit annually, and replace the contents when necessary. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:32; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 341 Version: 2.11.7.7 Where will I find...? Pull handle : upwards. Pull cover ; forwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment. X = Jack X ? TIREFIT kit 341 A Vehicle tool kit Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* Vehicle tool kit and jack The vehicle tool kit and the jack are located under the boot floor. The jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. You must use axle stands if you are carrying out work on the vehicle. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Do not start the engine at any time while a wheel is being changed. i When using the jack, you should also : "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ; Fastening element = Vehicle tool kit, jack, folding chock X X Turn fastening element ; anti-clockwise. Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel :. Vehicles with a spare wheel* observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre" section (Y page 400). X Fold up the front part of the boot floor. Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit : Spare wheel ; Fastening element = Vehicle tool kit, jack, folding chock X X Turn fastening element ; anti-clockwise. Remove spare wheel :. : Electric air pump ; Folding wheel chock * optional Z Practical advice G Risk of injury Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 342 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages 342 Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK Setting up the folding wheel chock G Risk of accident The collapsible wheel chock serves as an additional measure for securing the vehicle against rolling away, e.g. when a wheel is being changed. If the instrument cluster or the multi-function display fails, it can no longer show any display messages. You will not then be able to see information about the vehicle status, such as speed, outside temperature, warning and indicator lamps, display messages or the failure of systems. Handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Fold both plates : upwards. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X X Display messages Notes G Risk of accident The on-board computer detects and shows messages or warnings from certain systems only. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, you may cause an accident. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone or a continuous tone. The display messages in the multi-function display are white, yellow or red. Red display messages have the highest priority. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the instructions provided for HOLD (Y page 256) and parking (Y page 219). Calling up display messages The on-board computer stores certain display messages which can be called up later. Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Using = or ; select the Service menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, e.g. 2 messages. X Using 9 or : select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Confirm with a. X Using : or 9 scroll through the display messages. Hiding display messages You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multi-function display will continue to show these display messages until their cause has been remedied. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 343 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press a or % to hide the display message. 343 The following tables contain all the display messages. Text messages The operating safety of your vehicle may be affected if service work is carried out incorrectly. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work performed at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded The maximum speed has been exceeded43. X Drive more slowly. ABC Malfunc‐ tion Stop vehicle The vehicle level is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears. The vehicle is leaking oil. The display message is shown continuously in the display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ABC* (Active Body Control) is malfunctioning. The display message is shown continuously in the display. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wing or the tyres could be damaged when you drive on. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 43 Only for certain countries. * optional Z Practical advice G Risk of accident and injury Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Practical advice 344 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 344 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions ABC Vehicle rising Please wait briefly The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. X Remain stationary. X Wait until the display message disappears. The vehicle level is set. ABC Malfunc‐ tion ABC* function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inopera‐ tive Adaptive Highbeam Assist* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auxiliary battery malfunc‐ tion (white display message) The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auxiliary battery malfunc‐ tion (red display message) The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is discharged. If there is a malfunction in the vehicle's electrical system, you may not be able to change the transmission position. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS deactiva‐ ted autom. See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual Vehicles with a navigation system*: the vehicle is close to a radio-telescope facility and, therefore, must not transmit any radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automatically. A warning tone also sounds. X Drive on. Distronic Plus* is available again as soon as the vehicle is far enough away from the radio telescope facility (Y page 446). * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 345 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS A warning tone sounds and Distronic Plus* is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: currently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Rthe Distronic Plus* cover in the radiator grille is dirty. Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty. 345 Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient. Distronic Plus* is operational again and the display message disappears when: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while you are driving. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be shown: Clean the Distronic Plus* cover in the radiator grille (Y page 335). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 335). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inopera‐ tive Distronic Plus* is faulty. BAS PLUS* (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may be inoperative as well. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS override Distronic Plus* is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. * optional Z Practical advice Rits Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Practical advice 346 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 346 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS - - - kmh An activation condition for Distronic Plus* is not fulfilled. The system is outside the operating temperature range. X Close the bonnet and the driver's door. X Release the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to D. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and switch on Distronic Plus* again. X Activate ESP®. X Wait until the system is in the operating temperature range. DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEED‐ TRONIC inopera‐ tive Distronic Plus* and Speedtronic are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Speed Limit Assist Currently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist* is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera’s field of vision. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow, spray or fog. Rthe camera is dazzled, for example by oncoming traffic or the sun. Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient. Speed Limit Assist* is operational again and the display message disappears when: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while you are driving. Rthe system detects that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be shown: X Clean the windscreen in the area of the camera. Speed Limit Assist Unavaila‐ Speed Limit Assist* is only available in certain countries. ble in X Drive on. this coun‐ Speed Limit Assist* is available again as soon as you drive try into a country in which its use is approved. Speed Limit Assist inopera‐ tive Speed Limit Assist* has failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 347 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages 347 Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Vehicle The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position not in position P R, N or D. X Shift the transmission to P. X Engage the electric parking brake. Drive to workshop without changing gear You cannot change the transmission position. X In transmission position D: consult a qualified specialist workshop without changing the transmission position. or X In transmission positions N, R or P: contact a qualified specialist workshop. HOLD off HOLD is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding. X Reactivate HOLD later. Intell. inopera‐ Light Sys‐ tive tem Child seat in wrong position See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual Tourist mode is active. The headlamps are set to symmetrical dipped beam (Y page 242). X If you drive in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered: the headlamps are set to symmetrical dipped beam, in order not to dazzle oncoming traffic. X If you drive in countries in which traffic drives on the same side of the road as the country where the vehicle is registered: visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the frontpassenger seat: the child seat is incorrectly positioned. X Fit the child seat in the correct position. G Risk of injury The sensor for the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z Practical advice Only when vehi‐ The vehicle is moving. select cle is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to position P stationary road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to P. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Practical advice 348 03. Mar 2009 15:18:33; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 348 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Parking Guidance deactiva‐ ted autom. See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual Vehicles with a navigation system*: the vehicle is close to a radio-telescope facility and, therefore, must not transmit any radar signals. Parking Guidance* has switched itself off automatically. X Drive on. Parking Guidance* is available again as soon as the vehicle is far enough away from the radio-astronomical installation (Y page 446). Parking Guidance inopera‐ tive Parking Guidance* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance currently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Parking Guidance* is temporarily deactivated if: Rthe radar sensor system is inoperative, e.g. because of electromagnetic radiation near television and radio transmitters. Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient. Parking Guidance* is operational again and the display message disappears when: Rthe dirt drops away while you are driving. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. If the display message continues to be shown: X Clean the bumpers (Y page 335). X Restart the engine. X Wait until the battery is charged sufficiently. Parking Guidance cancelled Parking Guidance* has been deactivated because the vehicle is skidding. X Reactivate Parking Guidance* later. Parking Guidance* has been deactivated because the sensors in the bumper are dirty or because it is malfunctioning. The parking space symbol does not appear in the multi-function display at speeds below 16 km/h. X Clean the bumpers (Y page 335). X Restart the engine. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 349 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Parking Guidance finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. PRE-SAFE inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual Function currently limited See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual G Risk of injury PRE-SAFE® has malfunctioned. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident The PRE-SAFE® Brake* is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe Distronic Plus* cover in the radiator grille is dirty. Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient. The PRE-SAFE® Brake* is operational again and the display message disappears when: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while you are driving. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be shown: Clean the Distronic Plus* cover in the radiator grille (Y page 335). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 335). X Restart the engine. X Wait until the battery is charged sufficiently. X PRE-SAFE * optional Function limited See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake* is defective. BAS PLUS* or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice PRE-SAFE 349 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 350 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 350 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Radar sen‐ deactiva‐ sor ted See Owner's Manual Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK Radar sen‐ deactiva‐ sor ted autom. See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident Vehicles with Distronic Plus*: the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 446). X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 243). Vehicles with a navigation system*: the vehicle is close to a radio-telescope facility and, therefore, must not transmit any radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automatically. The following functions are unavailable: RDistronic RBAS Plus* (Y page 246) PLUS* (Y page 54) RParking Guidance* RPRE-SAFE® RBlind X Lane Keep‐ Currently ing Assist unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Brake* (Y page 57) Spot Assist* Drive on. These functions are available again as soon as the vehicle is far enough away from the radio telescope facility (Y page 446). Lane Keeping Assist* is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera’s field of vision. Rvisibility Rthere is impaired due to heavy rain, snow, spray or fog. are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, for example by dirt or snow. Lane Keeping Assist* is operational again and the display message disappears when: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while you are driving. Rthe system detects that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be shown: X Clean the windscreen in the area of the camera. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 351 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Lane Keep‐ inopera‐ ing Assist tive Lane Keeping Assist* has malfunctioned. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Run Flat Indicator Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: a tyre presCheck tyre pres‐ sure loss warning message has been displayed. sures X Set the correct tyre pressure for all tyres (Y page 319). then X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system restart (Y page 321). Run Flat Indicator inopera‐ tive Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: the tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning system: the tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant pressure loss. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres. X Correct the tyre pressure. If necessary, set the correct tyre pressure (Y page 319). X If necessary, repair any defective tyres or change the wheel (Y page 400). X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system once the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 321). Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila‐ ble Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor*: no sensor signals can be received due to radio interference. The tyre pressure monitor* is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor* restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Tyre press. monitor inopera‐ tive Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor*: the tyre pressure monitor* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z Practical advice Tyre pres‐ Check sure tyres 351 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 352 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 352 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Tyre press. monitor inopera‐ Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the wheels fitted do not tive No feature suitable tyre pressure sensors. wheel sen‐ X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. sors The tyre pressure monitor* is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Please correct tyre pres‐ Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the pressure is insuffisure(s) cient in at least one of the tyres or the pressure difference between the individual tyres is too great. A vehicle icon is shown in the instrument cluster. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 319). Check tyre(s) G Risk of accident Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the tyre pressure has dropped significantly in one or more of the tyres. The wheel position is displayed in the instrument cluster. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair the faulty tyre or replace the wheel (Y page 400). Caution, tyre defect G Risk of accident Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the pressure has dropped significantly in one or more of the tyres. The wheel position is displayed in the instrument cluster. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair the faulty tyre or replace the wheel (Y page 400). Wheel sen‐ missing sor(s) Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the tyre pressure sensor signal for one or more of the tyres is missing. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the instrument cluster. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control Cruise control is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. inopera‐ tive * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 353 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Cruise inopera‐ control tive and SPEED‐ TRONIC Speedtronic and cruise control are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist inopera‐ tive Blind Spot Assist* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist* is temporarily inoperative if: Ryou have established the electrical connection between a trailer and your vehicle. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system has switched off automatically, for example in the vicinity of a radio telescope facility. When towing a trailer, confirm the display message with a. When driving without a trailer: Blind Spot Assist* is operational again and the display message disappears when: X Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while you are driving. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be shown: X X - - - km/h Clean the bumpers (Y page 335). Restart the engine. A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. Activate ESP® (Y page 56) X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 244). X The system has overheated. X Wait until the system has cooled down. * optional Z Practical advice Rthe Rits Cruise control 353 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 354 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 354 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Apply brake to shift out of posi‐ tion P X To start the engine, shift to either P or N You attempted to start the engine while transmission position R or D was selected. X Shift the transmission to P or N. Depress the brake pedal. Symbol messages Practical advice G Risk of accident and injury The operating safety of your vehicle may be affected if service work is carried out incorrectly. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work performed at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages L Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident The bonnet is open. X Stop immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Close the bonnet. N The boot lid is open X Close the boot lid. C At least one door is open and you are driving at more than 6 km/h. X Close the doors. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:34; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 355 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions # The alternator or vehicle's electrical system is faulty. The battery is not being charged. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions and leave the engine running. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: 355 ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. Switch off the engine. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is intact: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ? J * optional The engine fan is faulty. X Make sure that the coolant temperature does not exceed 120 †. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. ABS and ESP inop‐ erative See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. BAS PLUS* (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may be inoperative as well. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 356 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 356 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages ABS and ESP cur‐ rently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Practical advice J Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. Self diagnosis is not yet complete. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. BAS PLUS* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X On a suitable stretch of road, carefully manoeuvre the vehicle slightly to the left and right at a speed above 20 km/h until the display message disappears. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The on-board voltage may, for example, be insufficient. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. BAS PLUS* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. À Attention Assist Time for a break? Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that your concentration has waned. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À Attention Assist Inopera‐ tive ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 357 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages ÷ inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual or System Inopera‐ tive ÷ currently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS* and PRESAFE® Brake* may have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The self diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. BAS PLUS* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X On a suitable stretch of road, carefully manoeuvre the vehicle slightly to the left and right at a speed above 20 km/h until the display message disappears. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable due to undervoltage. The battery might not be charging, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. BAS PLUS* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z Practical advice Display messages 357 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 358 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 358 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The ÷ warning lamp flashes. G Risk of accident Practical advice ETS (Electronic Traction System) is deactivated. BAS PLUS* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may have failed. X Let the brakes cool down until the display message disappears and the ÷ warning lamp goes out. ETS is reactivated. j Check trailer hitch locking mechanism Ô Replace air cleaner element J Check brake fluid level 44 Only G Risk of accident The trailer coupling* is not correctly engaged. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Engage the ball coupling in the end position (Y page 328). The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced44. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. for certain vehicles. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 359 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions J EBV, ABS and ESP inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. Check brake wear X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Release parking brake G Risk of accident EBV (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. In addition, the ÷,å, J and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up and a warning tone sounds. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. BAS PLUS* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* may have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake. or X Pull away carefully (Y page 220). ! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 220). X After the emergency stop: release the electric parking brake lever. * optional Z Practical advice Display messages 359 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 360 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 360 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions ! The indicator lamp (red) flashes, the warning lamp (yellow) lights up and a warning tone sounds. The electric parking brake is faulty and the braking effect is restricted. While the vehicle is in motion: X Release the electric parking brake handle. While the vehicle is stationary: Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake. X Practical advice If the display message continues to be shown: Shift the transmission to P. X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 341) from the vehicle tool kit to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual ! The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. Additionally the indicator lamp (red) lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Pull the electric parking brake handle. or Pull away carefully (Y page 220). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X To apply: Switch off the ignition. X Pull the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds, until the display message disappears. X If the display message continues to be shown: Shift the transmission to P. Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 341) from the vehicle tool kit to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 361 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages 361 Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions ! The indicator lamp (red) flashes. The power supply for the electric parking brake was interrupted. X Pull the electric parking brake handle. or X Pull away carefully (Y page 220). or X Pull the electric parking brake lever until the display message disappears. ! The indicator lamp (red) flashes, the warning lamp (yellow) lights up and a warning tone sounds. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. or X Pull away carefully (Y page 220). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicator lamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- or undervoltage. X Pull away carefully (Y page 220). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. In case of over- or undervoltage: X Remove the cause for the over- or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage or release the electric parking brake. If this does not release the electric parking brake: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 362 03. Mar 2009 15:18:35; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 362 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Practical advice ! The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicator lamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake has overheated. X Allow the vehicle to cool down. Do not engage or release the electric parking brake during this time. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 219). X When the vehicle has cooled down: switch the ignition off and on again, then engage or release the electric parking. ! Parking brake inopera‐ tive ! The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicator lamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to P. X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 341) from the vehicle tool kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the park‐ ing brake ! The indicator lamp (red) flashes. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Key: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS GO*: switch on the ignition. ! Clean fuel fil‐ ter There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off45. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 45 Only for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 363 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Stop vehi‐ G Risk of accident cle Vehi‐ The vehicle level control system is malfunctioning. cle too X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. low X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wing or the tyres could be damaged when you drive on. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. The vehicle may be raised, depending on the type of malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle level is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears. ¨ Vehicle rising Please wait briefly ¨ Malfunc‐ tion D Power steering malfunc‐ tion See Owner's Manual The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. X Remain stationary. X Wait until the display message disappears. The vehicle has reached the level required for driving. G Risk of accident The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident The power steering assistance is reduced. You will need to use more force to steer. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice ¨ 363 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 364 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 364 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages 7 Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of injury Vehicles with rear seat belt status indicator*: if the symbol appears in the lower multi-function display, a seat belt buckle on a rear seat was released while the vehicle was in motion. X Ask occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts* (Y page 206) 6 Restraint G Risk of injury system The restraint system is faulty. malfunc‐ tion Con‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. sult work‐ shop 6 Front G Risk of injury left-hand The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malside mal‐ functioned. function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Consult workshop or Front righthand side malfunc‐ tion Con‐ sult work‐ shop 6 Rear left- G Risk of injury hand side The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malmalfunc‐ functioned. tion Con‐ sult work‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. shop or Rear righthand side malfunc‐ tion Con‐ sult work‐ shop * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 365 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions 6 Rear G Risk of injury centre The rear centre restraint system has malfunctioned. malfunc‐ tion Con‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. sult work‐ shop 6 Left G Risk of injury windowbag There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowmalfunc‐ bag. tion Con‐ sult work‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. shop or Right windowbag malfunc‐ tion Con‐ sult work‐ shop  Key does not belong to vehicle You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key.  Change key bat‐ teries The key batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 395).  Replace key The KEYLESS GO* key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  Key being initial‐ ised Please wait The vehicle is registering the KEYLESS GO* key. X Wait until the display message disappears.  Remove KEYLESS GO* is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. starting X Remove the KEYLESS GO* button from the ignition lock button, (Y page 193). then X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired insert key position. * optional 365 Z Practical advice 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 366 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 366 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages  Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Key still The KEYLESS GO key* has been detected inside the vehicle in vehicle during locking. X  Key not detected (white display message) Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the vehicle. You want to unlock or lock the vehicle and the KEYLESS GO key* cannot be currently detected by the vehicle. X Locate the KEYLESS GO key*. If the KEYLESS GO key* is still not detected: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. Practical advice You are in the vehicle and the KEYLESS GO key* currently cannot be detected by the vehicle. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS GO function* in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS GO key* is still not detected: Remove the KEYLESS GO* button from the ignition lock (Y page 193). X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X  Key not detected (red display message) The KEYLESS GO key* is not in the vehicle. If you switch off the engine, you can no longer centrally lock the vehicle and no longer start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Locate the KEYLESS GO key*. The KEYLESS GO key* is not detected while driving because a powerful radio transmitter is causing interference. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the KEYLESS GO* button from the ignition lock (Y page 193). X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 367 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages 367 Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The KEYLESS GO* key is not detected by the vehicle. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS GO function* in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS GO key* is still not detected: Remove the KEYLESS GO* button from the ignition lock (Y page 193). X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.  At least one door is open. Close doors to X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. lock vehi‐ cle & inopera‐ tive Bat‐ tery low The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating/ventilation* has switched off or cannot be switched on. X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating/ventilation* can be reactivated as soon as there is sufficient onboard voltage. & inopera‐ tive Refuel vehicle The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heating* cannot be switched on. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. & inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual The auxiliary heating* is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating*, waiting several minutes between each attempt. X If the auxiliary heating* does not switch on, visit a qualified specialist workshop. + Top up coolant See Own‐ er's Man‐ ual The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 316). X Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. * optional Z Practical advice X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 368 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 368 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages ? Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The coolant is too hot. Coolant Stop vehi‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the cle Turn engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. engine off X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked, e.g. by slush. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Observe the coolant temperature gauge. The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop immediately and safely when traffic conditions permit and check the poly-V-belt. Practical advice If the poly-V-belt is torn: X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is intact: Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Observe the coolant temperature gauge. X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X b The third brake lamp is faulty. The display message will only Third brake lamp appear if all LEDs have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Left-hand cornering light or Righthand cor‐ nering light The left-hand or right-hand cornering lamp* is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 397). b Left-hand dipped beam The left-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 397). X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Righthand dipped beam The right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:36; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 369 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions b Active Light Function inopera‐ tive The active light function* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Trailer Left-hand turn sig‐ nal or Trailer Righthand turn signal The left-hand or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. X Change the bulb. b The trailer brake lamp is faulty. Trailer Brake lamp X Change the bulb. b Trailer Left-hand tail lamp or Trailer Righthand tail lamp The left-hand or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Change the bulb. b AUTO lights inopera‐ tive The light sensor is faulty. Daytime driving lights are switched on. X Switch off the daytime driving lights in the on-board computer (Y page 241). X Switch the lighting on or off using the light switch. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Rear left- The rear left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty. hand turn X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. signal or Rear righthand turn signal * optional Practical advice Display messages 369 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 370 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 370 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions b Turn sig‐ The left-hand or right-hand turn signal on the exterior mirror is faulty. The display message will only appear if all LEDs have nal in left-hand failed. exterior X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. mirror or Turn sig‐ nal in righthand exte‐ rior mir‐ ror b Front left-hand turn sig‐ nal or Front righthand turn signal The front left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Left-hand main beam or Righthand main beam The left-hand or right-hand main beam headlamp is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 397). b Left-hand The left-hand or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. licence X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. plate lamp or Righthand licence plate lamp b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to $ or c. or X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 371 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions b Left-hand foglamp or Righthand fog‐ lamp The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Rear left- The rear left-hand or right-hand foglamp is faulty. hand fog‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. lamp or Rear righthand fog‐ lamp b The left-hand or right-hand side lamp is faulty. Front left-hand X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. parking lamp or Front righthand park‐ ing lamp b Left-hand reversing lamp or Righthand reversing lamp b Left-hand The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. The tail lamp/ display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. brake lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or Righthand tail lamp/ brake lamp Practical advice Display messages 371 The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 372 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 372 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions b Left day‐ The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. The time driv‐ display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. ing lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or Right day‐ time driv‐ ing lamp b Intell. The Intelligent Light System* is faulty. The lights remain availLight Sys‐ able without the Intelligent Light System. tem inop‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. erative Á Night View Assist inopera‐ tive Night View Assist Plus* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Á Night View Assist currently unavaila‐ ble The temperature of the camera is too high. X Wait until you see the Night View Assist available again display message. You can also: X Fold the camera cover down (Y page 337). X Adjust the air distribution of the automatic air conditioning upwards. Á Night View Assist Lights must be on or set to AUTO A condition for activating Night View Assist Plus* has not been met. X Turn the light switch to c or L. Á Night View Assist Not in Reverse A condition for activating Night View Assist Plus* has not been met. X Shift the transmission to P, N or D. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 373 Version: 2.11.7.7 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Á Night View Assist Lights on or AUTO, not in Reverse A condition for activating Night View Assist Plus* has not been met. X Turn the light switch to c or L. X Shift the transmission to P, N or D. Á Night You have attempted to activate Night View Assist Plus*in the View daytime. Assist Night View Assist Plus* can only be activated when it is dark. only when it is dark 4 There is insufficient oil in the engine. There is a risk of engine Engine oil level damage. Stop vehi‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the cle Turn engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. engine off X Top up and check the engine oil level (Y page 314). 4 Top up The engine oil level is too low46. with 1 X Check the engine oil level (Y page 314). litre of X If necessary, top up the engine oil. engine X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs oil when topping up more often than usual. next refu‐ elling 4 Engine oil level Reduce oil level You have added too much engine oil46. The engine or catalytic converter may be damaged. X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level. Observe the legal requirements. 4 Engine oil level cannot be measured The measuring system is malfunctioning46. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. Check engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 314). oil level X If necessary, top up the engine oil. when next X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs refuelling topping up more often than usual. 46 Only on certain vehicles. * optional Z 373 Practical advice 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 374 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 374 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Display messages Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions h Tyre pres‐ G Risk of accident sure Cau‐ Vehicles with the tyre pressure monitor*: the pressure is tion, dropping rapidly in one or more of the tyres. tyre X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or defect braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair the faulty tyre or replace the wheel (Y page 400). h Tyre pres‐ G Risk of accident sure Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the tyre pressure has Check dropped significantly in one or more of the tyres. tyre(s) X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair the faulty tyre or replace the wheel (Y page 400). C There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. 8 The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operaReserve fuel level tion of the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ¥ Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level has sunk to about 1 litre. X Top up the windscreen washer fluid (Y page 316). Troubleshooting Points to remember G Risk of accident and injury The operating safety of your vehicle may be affected if service work is carried out incorrectly. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work performed at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 375 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting 375 Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The seat ventilation* has switched itself off prematurely. The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are switched on. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. the reading lamp or interior lighting. The seat heating* has switched itself off prematurely. The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are switched on. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. the reading lamp or interior lighting. The cooling system cannot be switched on using COMAND. Cooling has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear-window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are switched on. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. the reading lamp or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating will switch back on automatically. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat*: The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp beside the instrument cluster on the right is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. The automatic child seat recognition* is malfunctioning. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, for example: Rnotebook Rmobile Rcards phone with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit: X * optional Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice Warning and indicator lamps in switches, buttons and exterior mirrors Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 376 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 376 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem The yellow 9 Blind Spot Assist* indicator lamps light up in the exterior mirrors. Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist* is not active at speeds below 30 km/h. In this case, there will be no indication if there are vehicles in the Blind Spot Assist monitoring range. X You must therefore pay careful attention to the traffic conditions. X Check whether a lane change can be made without risk. The red 9 Blind G Risk of accident Spot Assist* warning Blind Spot Assist* has detected a vehicle within the Blind Spot lamp is lit in one of the Assist monitoring range. exterior mirrors. X You must therefore pay careful attention to the traffic conditions. X Check whether a lane change can be made without risk. The red 9 Blind Spot Assist* warning lamp flashes in one of the exterior mirrors. A double warning tone also sounds. You have switched on the turn signals. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist* has detected a vehicle within the Blind Spot Assist monitoring range. X You must therefore pay careful attention to the traffic conditions. X Check whether a lane change can be made without risk. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:37; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 377 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting 377 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a fault. Other systems, e.g. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS* (Brake Assist Plus), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), EBV (electronic brake-force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake*, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, are also deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you brake hard. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. · The red distance G Risk of accident warning lamp* The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed lights up while selected. the vehicle is in X Increase the distance. motion. · The red distance G Risk of accident warning lamp* You are approaching a vehicle in front at too great a speed lights up while the vehicle is in X Be prepared to brake immediately. motion. A warn- X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. ing tone also sounds. G Risk of accident Distronic Plus* has detected a stationary obstacle in your line of travel. The vehicle will not be braked automatically. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. * optional Z Practical advice Problem Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 378 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 378 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem ÷ å J ! Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps, the red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ÷ The yellow ESP® å and ESP® OFF ! warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. ÷ The yellow ESP® å and ESP® OFF ! warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident Electronic brake force distribution (EBV) is faulty. Other systems, e.g. ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS*, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake*, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, are also unavailable. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you brake hard. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident EBV is faulty. Other systems, e.g. ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS*, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake*, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, are also unavailable. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you brake hard. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS and ESP® are faulty. Other systems, e.g. BAS, BAS PLUS*, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake*, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, are also unavailable due to a malfunction. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you brake hard. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 379 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem 379 Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions å The yellow ESP® G Risk of accident OFF warning ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will not lamp is lit while stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. the engine is X Reactivate ESP®. running. Exceptions: (Y page 56) X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ÷ The yellow ESP® å and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. * optional G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS*, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury There is a malfunction in the restraint system. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z Practical advice ÷ The yellow ESP® G Risk of accident warning lamp ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of flashes while the skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. vehicle is in Cruise control or Distronic Plus* is deactivated. motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 56) Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 380 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 380 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Practical advice ! The red indicator G Risk of accident lamp for the The electric parking brake is temporarily malfunctioning or defecelectric parking tive. brake flashes and/or the yel- X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). low warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. J The red brake G Risk of accident system warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir. lamp comes on while the engine X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving is running. A under any circumstances. warning tone X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. also sounds. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. ; The yellow Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry. engine diagnos- X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. tics warning Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be lamp lights up checked. while the engine is running. ; The yellow There may be a fault, for example: engine diagnos- Rin the engine management tics warning Rin the ignition system lamp lights up while the engine Rin the exhaust system is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine can run in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 381 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting h The yellow tyre pressure monitor* warning lamp is on. Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor* has detected a sudden or significant pressure loss in at least one of the tyres. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 342). 7 The red seat belt The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger warning lamp to fasten their seat belts. lights up for 6 X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 203). seconds after the engine is started47. 7 After the engine G Risk of injury starts, a warning The driver's seat belt is not fastened. tone sounds for X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 203). up to 6 sec47 The warning tone ceases. onds . 7 The red seat belt G Risk of injury warning lamp The driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt. lights up after X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 203). the engine The warning lamp goes out. starts, as soon as the driver's G Risk of injury door or the front-passenger There are objects on the front-passenger seat door is closed. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out. 47 Only for certain countries. * optional Z Practical advice Problem 381 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 382 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 382 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions 7 The red seat belt G Risk of injury warning lamp The driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt. At flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly intermittent driven faster than 25 km/h. audible warning X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 203). sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. Practical advice G Risk of injury There are objects on the front-passenger seat At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operation of warning lamp lights up the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. Warning tones Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The anti-theft warning alarm* is triggered. You have opened the vehicle with the anti-theft alarm system still activated*. X Switch off the alarm (Y page 59). You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multi-function display. X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 342). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. X Turn the light switch to $ or c. or X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 383 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem 383 Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of injury The driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 203). You hear a warning tone. The · red distance warning lamp* lights up while the vehicle is in motion. X Observe the explanations for the distance warning lamp* (Y page 377). You hear a dual warning The 9 red Blind Spot Assist* warning lamp flashes in one of tone. the exterior mirrors. Observe the explanations for the Blind Spot Assist* warning lamp (Y page 376). Practical advice X Accident Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. You are unable to determine the extent of the damage. You cannot detect any damage. Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of fire The fuel line or the fuel tank has been damaged. The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion. X Switch off the ignition immediately. X Remove the ignition key. Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Start the engine as normal. The NECK-PRO head Your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision. restraints/NECK-PRO X Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head luxury head restraints* restraints* (Y page 394). on the driver's and the front-passenger's seat have been triggered. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 384 03. Mar 2009 15:18:38; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 384 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Fuel and fuel tank Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Practical advice The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap is not released. Or: The key batteries are discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 393). Or: X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 392). The fuel filler flap is released, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel tank in a vehi- There is air in the fuel system. cle with a diesel engine X Refuel the vehicle (at least 5 litres). has been run comX Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds. Turn the key to pletely dry and the position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. engine will not start. X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for at least 10 seconds. Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine still does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 385 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting 385 Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The engine will not start. You can hear the starter motor operating. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. RThe on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too weak or discharged. Before the next start attempt, turn the key back to position 0 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock or press the Start/Stop button* until all the indicator lights in the instrument cluster have gone out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 217). When doing so, remember that excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine will not The fuel tank has been run dry. start. You can hear the X Refuel the vehicle. starter motor operatX Bleed the fuel system (Y page 384). ing. The reserve fuel warning lamp is on and the fuel gauge shows 0. The engine will not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 412). If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z Practical advice X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Practical advice 386 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 386 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine control unit. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently. value above 120 †. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant The coolant warning to cool down. lamp may also light up X Check the coolant level (Y page 316). Observe the warning and a warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound (Y page 227). If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. Automatic transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Turn the key in the ignition to position 0 (Y page 192) or press the Start/Stop button* repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 387 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting 387 PARKTRONIC* Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning display are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 335). warning display are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. Only the red segments The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or in the PARKTRONIC ultrasound waves. warning display are lit. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. Headlamps Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The headlamps are mis- Air humidity is very high. ted up on the inside. X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The headlamps are demisted after a short distance. The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been able to enter. X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z Practical advice Problem Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 388 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 388 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. Practical advice The windscreen wipers fail completely. G Risk of accident The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist worknozzles no longer hits shop. the centre of the windscreen. Side windows Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions A side window will not close. Objects are trapped between the window and the door frame. X Remove the objects. X Close the side window. There are objects in the window guide rail which are preventing the window from closing. X Remove the objects. X Close the side window. You cannot see the cause. X Close the side window with increased force or without the antientrapment feature (Y page 215). Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 389 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting 389 Mirrors Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions An exterior mirror has been pushed out of position. Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electrically: X Move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*: Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 201) repeatedly until you hear a distinct click. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirror as usual (Y page 201). Key Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again. If this does not work: X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 393). X Check the key batteries and replace them if necessary (Y page 395). The key is faulty. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 393). X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z Practical advice X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 390 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 390 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions You can no longer lock KEYLESS GO* is in standby mode because the vehicle has not or unlock the vehicle been unlocked for an extended period. using KEYLESS GO*. X Pull the door handle twice and then insert the key into the ignition lock. Practical advice KEYLESS GO* is malfunctioning. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to open the vehicle again. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 393). You have lost a key. Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. X X You have lost the emergency key element. The engine cannot be started using the key. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. The on-board voltage is too low. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Start the engine within 30 seconds of inserting the key in the ignition lock. X Repeat if necessary. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary (Y page 410). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 412). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily. started using KEYLESS X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. GO*. The key is in the There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. vehicle. X Start your vehicle using the key in the ignition lock. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:39; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 391 Version: 2.11.7.7 Troubleshooting 391 Auxiliary heating/ventilation* Display messages FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. $ FAIL The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. © FAIL There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Night View Assist Plus* Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen. X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 399). The windscreen is smeared after cleaning the vehicle in a car wash. X Clean the windscreen (Y page 334). Windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windscreen. The windscreen is misted up on the inside. X Demist the windscreen (Y page 284). The windscreen is iced up. X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 283). * optional Z Practical advice Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 392 03. Mar 2009 15:18:40; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 392 Version: 2.11.7.7 Locking/unlocking in an emergency Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen. X Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 334). Parking up the vehicle Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions The vehicle is to be left The battery can be damaged through exhaustive discharge. parked up for longer X Disconnect the battery (Y page 413) or connect to a trickle than four weeks. charger. Practical advice i Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The vehicle is to be left Damage resulting from non-use may occur if the vehicle is parked parked up for longer up for long periods. than six weeks. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Locking/unlocking in an emergency Emergency key element If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system* will be triggered (Y page 59). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X Press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button* in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS GO*. The key must be outside the vehicle. Removing the emergency key element (vehicles with KEYLESS GO) X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove emergency key element ; from the key. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:40; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 393 Version: 2.11.7.7 Locking/unlocking in an emergency Removing the emergency key element (vehicles without KEYLESS GO) 393 The door is unlocked. Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Pull the door handle again. X X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove emergency key element ; from the key. Unlocking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked centrally with the key or KEYLESS GO*: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 392). If the key is defective, you can lock the doors and the boot by taking the following steps. If the vehicle central locking is malfunctioning, you cannot lock the boot. If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked centrally with the key or KEYLESS GO*: X Press down the locking knobs on the open rear doors. X Close the rear doors. X Close the driver's door. X Open the front-passenger door. X Press down the locking knob of the driver's door from inside the vehicle. X Press down the locking knob on the open front-passenger door. i Make sure that you have the vehicle key on your person and that it is not left in the vehicle. X X Close the front-passenger door. Check whether the doors and the boot are locked. Boot ! The boot lid swings upwards when Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Firmly turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1 and hold it in this position. X i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot can no longer be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS GO*: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 392). emergency key element clockwise. X Pull the door handle firmly. The locking knob pops up. * optional Z Practical advice Locking the vehicle Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 394 Version: 2.11.7.7 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints 394 Insert the emergency key element fully into tailgate lock :. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as possible. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:40; WK Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints If NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints* have been triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rearend collision. You can recognise when head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints* checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, following a rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints i This work requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Push the head restraint cushion backwards by the lower part as far as it will go 2. X Push the head restraint cushion down into the guide as far as it will go 3. X Firmly press back the head restraint cushion until it engages 1. X NECK-PRO luxury head restraints* i If you have problems resetting the head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Remove resetting tool 1 from the vehicle tool kit in the boot. X Insert resetting tool 1 into guide 2 between the head restraint cushion and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Press resetting tool 1 downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool 1. X * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:41; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 395 Version: 2.11.7.7 Changing batteries (keys, remote controls, headphones) 395 Firmly press back head restraint cushion 3 until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second head restraint. X Changing batteries (keys, remote controls, headphones) Notes G Risk of poisoning Batteries contain toxic and caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries away from children. If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately. Insert emergency key element : into the opening in the key and push in the direction of the arrow. Battery tray ; is released. X Pull battery tray ; out of the key. X H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. They contain highly toxic substances. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. Key Checking the batteries X Press the & or % button. The batteries are in order if the battery charge indicator lamp lights up briefly. Remove old batteries : from the battery tray. X Insert the new batteries beneath the contact spring with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Push the battery tray back into the key housing until the battery tray engages. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Changing batteries (key with KEYLESS GO*) Changing a battery (key without KEYLESS GO*) You require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 392). You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 392). Z Practical advice It is advisable to have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:42; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 396 Version: 2.11.7.7 Changing batteries (keys, remote controls, headphones) 396 Practical advice X Press the emergency key element into the opening in the key in the direction of arrow ; until cover : of the battery tray opens. Be sure that your fingers are not stopping the cover from opening. Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. X Remote control for the entertainment system* Remove the cover of the battery tray. Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out of the key. X Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Insert the front tabs of the battery tray's cover first and then press to close it. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X X Auxiliary heating* remote control One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 397 Version: 2.11.7.7 Changing bulbs You require two 1.5 V, AAA batteries. X Press lug ; downwards and remove cover =. X Remove old batteries A. X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery tray : when doing so. X Place cover = with tabs ? on battery tray :. X Press cover = until lug ; snaps into place. Wireless headphones for the entertainment system* Headphones, left side You require two 1.5 V, AAA batteries. X Lift cover : upwards and open the battery tray. When doing so, hold the left headphone as shown in the illustration to prevent the batteries from falling out. X Remove the old batteries. X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery tray when doing so. X Fold down cover : and close the battery tray. If the batteries have been inserted correctly, the indicator lamp will light up green when the headphones are switched on. Changing bulbs Notes on changing bulbs i If you need assistance in changing the bulbs, contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp settings checked regularly. Only use the types of bulbs specified here. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when fitting. G Risk of injury Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Otherwise, you could be burned if you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, particularly if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. G Risk of injury Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even * optional 397 Z Practical advice 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:42; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 398 03. Mar 2009 15:18:43; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 398 Version: 2.11.7.7 Changing bulbs fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not change xenon bulbs yourself but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can replace the following bulbs: Bulb type : Main-beam spot lamp: H7 55 W Intelligent Light System headlamp* Bulb type : Main-beam spot lamp*48: H11 55 W Practical advice Bi-xenon headlamps ; Infrared light*48 (Night View Assist Plus*): H11 55 W 48 Due to their location, have the bulbs in the left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:43; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 399 Version: 2.11.7.7 Replacing the wiper blades 399 Changing bulbs Main-beam spot lamp (bi-xenon headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and remove it. X Push the two detents on the right and left of bulb holder ; and remove the bulb from bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ; until it engages. X Insert bulb holder ; into the guide in the headlamp. Cable outlet = must be pointing down and to the right. X Turn bulb holder ; clockwise. Cable outlet = must be pointing down and to the left. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise. X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and remove it. X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ;. Left-hand headlamp: cable outlet = must be pointing up and to the right. Right-hand headlamp: cable outlet = must be pointing down and to the left. X Turn bulb holder ; clockwise. Handle ? of bulb holder ; must be vertical. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise. X X Main-beam spot lamp* (Intelligent Light System*)/Infrared light* (Night View Assist Plus*) i The washer fluid reservoir in the engine compartment must be removed before you can change a bulb in the left-hand headlamp. Have the work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. * optional Replacing the wiper blades G Risk of accident The windscreen will no longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. Z Practical advice X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 400 03. Mar 2009 15:18:44; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 400 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre G Risk of accident Removing the wiper blades The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Practical advice Removing X Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position Vehicles without KEYLESS GO* X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windscreen wipers to position ° on the combination switch. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Vehicles with KEYLESS GO* X Switch off the engine. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. X Set the windscreen wipers to position ° on the combination switch. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windscreen wipers start. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position: press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Remove the wiper blade from the retainer on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X Flat tyre Flat tyre equipment variants Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 341) Ra "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* (Y page 341) Ra spare wheel* (Y page 341) Rthe MOExtended run-flat system* (Y page 409) Preparing the vehicle i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOE tyres*. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:44; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 401 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -20 †. G Risk of accident In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk and tyre sealant is unable to provide breakdown assistance if: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm Rthe wheel rim is damaged Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the TIREFIT kit, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump from the stowage well underneath the boot floor (Y page 341). X Affix part : of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X G Risk of injury TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doc- tor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. Z Practical advice Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Engage the electric parking brake manually (Y page 220). X Move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever to P. X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they get out of the vehicle. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Get out of the vehicle. X Close the driver’s door. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 340) at a suitable distance. Observe legal requirements. X 401 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:44; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 402 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre 402 RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes. i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. X Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty tyre. Practical advice G Risk of injury Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions shown on the sticker on the electric air pump. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of two different air pumps. Version 1 can be identified by the flap, behind which the hose with the pressure gauge and cable are located; version 2 has a pressure gauge integrated in the electric air pump. Version 1 Make sure pressure release screw F on pressure gauge G is fully closed. X Screw filler hose D onto valve E. X Insert plug A into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 302) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 303). X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. X X Open flap ; on the electric air pump. Pull connector A with cable and air pump hose B out of the housing. X Screw air pump hose B onto flange C of TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head downwards into recess = of the electric air pump. X X Press on/off switch ? on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:45; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 403 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Pump up the tyre again. X G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. When a tyre pressure of at least 1.8 bar is reached: Press on/off switch ? on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Remove the TIREFIT kit from the wheel. X ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of the filler hose. This may cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag in which the TIREFIT kit was contained. Stow away the TIREFIT kit, the electric air pump and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. X G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: open pressure release screw F on pressure gauge G. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X G Risk of accident Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. H Environmental note Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Practical advice ! Do not operate the electric air pump for 403 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:45; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 404 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre 404 Version 2 X Press on/off switch = on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. X Pull connector ? with cable and air pump hose A out of the housing. X Screw air pump hose A onto flange B of TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the electric air pump. Practical advice X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. ! Do not operate the electric air pump for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. X G Risk of accident Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 302) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 303). X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. X If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:45; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 405 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre Press on/off switch = on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Remove the TIREFIT kit from the wheel. X ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of the filler hose. This may cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag in which the TIREFIT kit was contained. Stow away the TIREFIT kit, the electric air pump and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. X G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. H Environmental note Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel* G Risk of accident The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* are different from those of the damaged wheel. Your vehicle's handling characteristics will change when a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* is fitted. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. * optional The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* may only be used for a short time. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h and do not deactivate ESP®. Never drive the vehicle with more than one "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* fitted. Z Practical advice When a tyre pressure of at least 1.8 bar is reached: 405 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:46; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 406 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre 406 G Risk of accident Have the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Practical advice Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 400). X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead position. X Remove the following items from the stowage well under the boot floor: Rthe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* X Rthe container with the wheel bolts for the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* Rthe vehicle tool kit Rthe wheel chock Rthe jack X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. On level ground: place chocks or similar items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. X On downhill gradients: place chocks or similar items behind the wheels of the front and rear axle. X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Raising the vehicle G Risk of injury The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. The vehicle must be placed on stands if you intend to work under it. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. The vehicle could otherwise fall off the jack and seriously injure you. Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid is opened or closed), and you could be seriously injured. G Risk of accident If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: Rslip off the jack Rinjure Rbe you or others damaged * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:46; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 407 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre 407 Thus, it is important to make sure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centring pin ? from the vehicle tool kit into the thread. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. X The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. Position jack : at jacking point ;. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G Risk of accident Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub. G Risk of accident Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under jacking point ;. X Turn crank = until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:47; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 408 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre 408 G Risk of accident X Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Practical advice Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz and the respective wheel. Other bolts may work loose or damage the brake system. Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. Wheel bolts for: : 17" light-alloy wheel, 7-spoke design with MB Number A 221 401 76 02, 18" lightalloy wheel and larger ; 17" light-alloy 5-spoke design, 17" lightalloy 7-spoke design with MB Number A 221 401 02 02 = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* ! Always use wheel bolts ; or = to fit 17", Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Lowering the vehicle Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is standing firmly on the ground again. X Place the jack to one side. X 5-spoke/7-spoke wheels with MB Number A 221 401 02 02 or the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*. Using other wheel bolts when fitting 17", 5-spoke/7-spoke wheels or the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* could damage the brake system. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:47; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 409 Version: 2.11.7.7 Flat tyre 409 message appears in the multi-function display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. G Risk of accident X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque is 150 Nm. G Risk of accident Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 150 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit in the stowage well under the boot floor. i When you are driving with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or with the tyre pressure monitor. ! The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum range that can be driven in emergency operation is measured from the point at which the pressure loss warning * optional Rwhen braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden acceleration and/or manoeuvring, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further, if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the wheel(s) checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Practical advice The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 410 03. Mar 2009 15:18:48; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 410 Version: 2.11.7.7 Battery i On a vehicle with MOExtended tyres, only Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. use MOExtended spare tyres. These must be of the size specified for the vehicle. Battery Practical advice Notes on the vehicle battery In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. To prevent damage from corrosion, only replace the battery with one that has a central ventilation cover. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. G Risk of injury Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries in the household rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to a special collection point for old batteries. G Risk of injury For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: Rdo not lean over the battery. Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery. You could otherwise cause a short circuit and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. Rmake sure that you do not create an electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:48; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 411 Version: 2.11.7.7 Battery ers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving the battery. Rnever Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. ! Before loosening the terminal clamps of the battery, switch off the engine and remove the key or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, make sure that the ignition is not switched on. In the instrument cluster, all of the indicator lamps must be out. Otherwise, you may destroy electronic components, such as the alternator. i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have work involving the battery, e.g. removal, charging and replacement, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Installation location of the battery Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the engine compartment. It is located on the front bulkhead under the filter box on the righthand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. i If the battery is discharged, you must use the emergency key element to unlock the vehicle. Charging the battery G Risk of injury Only charge the installed battery using a Mercedes-Benz approved battery charger. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This could injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged while still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and use the DIRECT SELECT lever to set the transmission to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Open the bonnet. X Check that the breather hose is fitted and that there is a cell cap on the opposite side of the battery. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal. X Connect the positive clamp of the battery charger to the positive terminal of the battery. X Example : Negative terminal ; Positive terminal i Remove the key if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consum- * optional Z Practical advice touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. 411 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 412 Version: 2.11.7.7 Battery 412 Connect the negative clamp of the battery charger to the vehicle's earth point. X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in the operating instructions for your battery charger. X Disconnect the battery charger after charging. X Attach the positive terminal cover. X Close the bonnet. X Jump-starting Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:48; WK If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from an external battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: Rjump-starting may only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. Rdo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. Rjump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. Ronly use jump leads which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. i Jump leads and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery charger. G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started. G Risk of explosion Gases escaping from the battery during jumpstarting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in the index. Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P. Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the bonnet (Y page 313). X X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am Remove the cover from positive terminal :. X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery A using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to earth point ? of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery A first. X Start the engine. X First, remove the jump lead from earth point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive terminal : and positive terminal ;, each time disconnecting from the battery on your own vehicle first. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 413 Version: 2.11.7.7 Battery 413 Disconnecting and removing the battery Practical advice 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:49; WK G Risk of accident If the battery is disconnected: Rthe brake boosting effect will not be available. Greater braking force will then be required and brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Ryou can no longer turn the key in the ignition lock and, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, pressing the start/stop button will have no effect. Rthe selector lever is locked in position P. ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, you may damage the vehicle electronics. i On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: pull the start/stop button out (Y page 193) and use the key with KEYLESS GO like the normal key. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 414 Version: 2.11.7.7 Towing and tow-starting 414 Disconnecting the battery Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and use the DIRECT SELECT lever to set the transmission to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Open the bonnet. X Remove the negative terminal clamp from the battery. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal. X Remove the positive terminal clamp from the battery. X Disconnect the breather hose. X Practical advice 03. Mar 2009 15:18:49; WK Removing the battery X Loosen the brackets which hold the battery in place and remove the battery. Fitting and connecting the battery Fitting the battery X X Insert the battery into the battery case. Secure the battery with the bracket in the battery case. Reconnecting the battery ! Always reconnect the battery in the sequence described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Switch off all electrical consumers. Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. X X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that a cell cap is fitted between the battery and the breather hose. X Close the bonnet. X Towing and tow-starting Points to remember G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. G Risk of accident If you have the vehicle towed, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthere is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. Greater braking force will then be required and brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with full force. Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when Hold or Distronic Plus* is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and Distronic Plus if the vehicle is to be towed. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. When towing, observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:49; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 415 Version: 2.11.7.7 Towing and tow-starting is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! When towing, pull away slowly and with- out jerking. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and set the automatic transmission to N. Then turn the key back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. ! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar to the towing eyes. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. RTow-starting RThe ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front/rear axle raised. Otherwise, intervention by ESP® could damage the brake system. RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Otherwise: - you cannot switch on the ignition. - you cannot move the DIRECT SELECT lever to N. - you have no support when braking. ROn vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 192). i Switch off the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 176). Otherwise, you could be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Fitting the towing eye Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch*: if you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball coupling and connect the towbar (Y page 328) to this. the vehicle is not permitted. RVehicles with 4MATIC* must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised. RIf the engine does not start, try jump-starting it (Y page 412). RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle, have it towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, only tow it with the propeller shaft disconnected. RThe automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever must be in the N position when towing the vehicle. * optional Z Practical advice ! Make sure that the electric parking brake 415 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:50; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 416 Version: 2.11.7.7 Fuses 416 Opening the covers ! The engine must be switched off (key in ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised or if the parking brake is being tested on a dynamometer. Otherwise, intervention by ESP® could damage the brake system. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are located at the front and rear behind covers. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 192) in the ignition lock. i On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: use the key instead of the start-stop button. Practical advice X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to the N position. Removing the towing eye Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 341). X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise. X Unscrew the towing eye. X Press cover : inwards on the marking in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover : off the opening. X Securing the towing eye Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 341). X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and tighten it. X Towing the vehicle ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed with the front or rear axle raised. Replace the cover and press it until it engages. X Return the towing eye and the wheel wrench to the vehicle tool kit. X Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes or trailer coupling* can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. ! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Fuses Notes on changing fuses The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo* optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:50; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 417 Version: 2.11.7.7 Fuses G Risk of fire Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the required fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. A circuit overload could otherwise cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Fuse allocation chart The fuse allocation chart is located with the vehicle tool kit in the stowage well under the boot floor (Y page 300). Before changing a fuse Park the vehicle. Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X X Dashboard fuse boxes There is a fuse box located on both the driver's side and the front-passenger side. ! Do not use a pointed object, such as a screwdriver, to open the fuse box in the cockpit. You could otherwise damage the dashboard. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. ! Turn off the internal on-board electrical system of the vehicle if you are carrying out work on the fuses. Further information can be found in the index under "Disconnecting the battery". The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse boxes on the right-hand and left-hand sides of the dashboard Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle Rfuse To open: open the driver's door or frontpassenger door. X Press in cover : with the palm of your hand ;. Cover : is raised at the top. X Pull cover : out at the top = and the side ?. X To close: fold in cover : until it engages. X box in the rear Z Practical advice nents on the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A MercedesBenz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. 417 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:51; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 418 Version: 2.11.7.7 Fuses 418 Fuse box in the engine compartment There is a fuse box on both the left-hand and right-hand side of the engine compartment. Fuse box located on the left in the direction of travel To open X Open the bonnet (Y page 313). Lift cover ; on lower edge :. The retaining lugs are loosened. X Remove cover ; upwards. X To close: put cover ; back in position. X Press down cover ; with your hand until all four retaining lugs engage. X Close the bonnet (Y page 314). Practical advice X ! The cover must be fitted properly; other- wise, moisture or dirt could affect the operation of the fuses. Example: vehicle with a diesel engine Loosen screws : with a suitable Allen key. X Vehicles with a diesel engine: remove bracket = and the control unit. X All vehicles: remove cover ; and place to one side. X Fuse box in the rear compartment The fuse box is behind the armrest in the rear. To close Put cover ; back in position. Vehicles with a diesel engine: put bracket = and the control unit back in position. X All vehicles: tighten screws : with a suitable Allen key. X Close the bonnet (Y page 314). X X ! The cover must be fitted properly; other- wise, moisture or dirt could affect the operation of the fuses. Fuse box on the right in the direction of travel X To open: open the bonnet (Y page 313). To open: fold down the armrest. Pull handle : upwards in the direction of the arrow. X Fold down cover ;. X X Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:51; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 419 Version: 2.11.7.7 Fuses 419 ! Make sure that the seal of the cover is not damaged when you open and close it. Loosen cover ? with a suitable object =. Remove cover ? upwards. Practical advice X X Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 420 03. Mar 2009 15:18:52; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 420 Version: 2.11.7.7 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 421 Version: 2.11.7.7 421 Notes on the technical data ............. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Service products and capacities ..... Vehicle data, S 300 ........................... Vehicle data, S 350 ........................... Vehicle data, S 350 4MATIC ............ Vehicle data, S 450 ........................... Vehicle data, S 450 4MATIC ............ Vehicle data, S 500 ........................... Vehicle data, S 500 4MATIC ............ Vehicle data, S 600 ........................... Vehicle data, S 63 AMG .................... Vehicle data, S 65 AMG .................... Vehicle data, S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY (Belgium) .............................. Vehicle data, S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY ............................................... Vehicle data, S 350 CDI 4MATIC ..... Vehicle data, S 450 CDI .................... Tailgate opening dimensions ........... Tyres and wheels .............................. 422 422 422 424 425 429 430 430 431 431 432 432 433 433 434 434 435 435 436 436 436 Trailer coupling* ............................... 442 Frequencies for garage door openers* .................................................... 443 24-GHz radar sensor system* (country overview) ............................ 446 Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:53; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 422 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 422 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle electronics Notes on the technical data i The technical data was determined in Technical data 03. Mar 2009 15:18:53; WK accordance with EU directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. Therefore, the data may differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident and injury Vehicles with BlueHYBRID*: make sure that you read the "BlueHYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise fail to detect dangers. You can find technical data on the Internet at: www.mercedes-benz.com Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of nonapproved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rother road users could be endangered Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle. H Environmental note Daimler also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved conversion parts and accessories are available from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres. There, you can also receive advice about technical modifications and have the parts professionally fitted. Always quote the vehicle identification number and the engine number when ordering genuine parts. You will find these numbers on your vehicle's identification plates, for example (Y page 424). Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics G Risk of accident Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle’s roadworthiness could be affected. ! Only have maintenance work on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components may wear more quickly and your vehicle's * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 423 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle electronics warranty and operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting of two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitter) When retrofitting RF transmitters, the ISO/TS 21609 technical specifications49 are to be used. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment (e.g. taxis, hire cars or official vehicles), use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing the fittings. Waveband Maximum transmission output (PEAK) GSM 1800 10 W UMTS 10 W Aerial positions The following aerial positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed: ! The Mercedes-Benz warranty does not cover consequential damage resulting from improper installation. To ensure proper installation, MercedesBenz recommends having this work done at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission output Transmission output at the aerial base must not exceed the maximum values below. Waveband Maximum transmission output (PEAK) Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W 4 m waveband 30 W 2 m waveband 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W 70 cm waveband 35 W GSM 900/AMPS 10 W : Front roof area (vehicles with sliding/tilt- ing sunroof*: observe the roof's sweep) (vehicles with panorama sliding roof*: this area is not authorised for use) ; Rear roof area (vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof*: this area is not authorised for use) = Rear mudguard (recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road) ? Boot lid G Risk of accident Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction, impair the vehicle's operating safety and, thus, also impair your own safety. To ensure proper installation, Mercedes-Benz recommends having this work done at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at a qualified specialist workshop. 49 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles -- (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment. * optional Z 423 Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:53; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Technical data 424 03. Mar 2009 15:18:54; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 424 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle identification plates G Risk of injury Vehicle identification plates Improper installation of RF transmitters can lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. To ensure proper installation, Mercedes-Benz recommends having this work done at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number The vehicle identification plate is located on the side of the door frame on the right-hand side. Deviations with respect to aerial locations, output and frequencies must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other aerial positions There is no restriction for aerial positions in the outer area of the vehicle for these wavebands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm waveband, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and UMTS. Legal provisions for fittings must be observed. RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used in the vehicle without restrictions. X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed, e.g. approved wavebands, maximum output and aerial positions on the vehicle. Vehicle identification plate illustration : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer = EU type approval number ? Vehicle identification number (VIN) A Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight B Maximum permissible towing weight C Maximum permissible front axle load D Maximum permissible rear axle load E Paint code Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 425 Version: 2.11.7.7 Service products and capacities Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to the information on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is located in the rear behind the armrest. Rparts Fold down the armrest in the rear. Vehicle identification number (VIN) 1 is under a cover in the armrest. Engine number The engine number is stamped on the crankcase. More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Service products and capacities Service products are: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) and service products are matched. Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved service products is not covered by the warranty. You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB X Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (such as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake Fuel fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use those products which have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle and which are listed in the Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant section since: * optional 425 G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Before refuelling, turn off the engine and the auxiliary heating*. Z Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:54; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 426 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 426 Version: 2.11.7.7 Service products and capacities G Risk of injury Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. Allowing fuels to come into direct contact with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is damaging to your health. Technical data 03. Mar 2009 15:18:54; WK Tank capacity Total capacity 90 l Reserve fuel, except for AMG vehicles Approximately 11 l Reserve fuel in AMG vehicles Approximately 14 l ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the injection system. Damage resulting from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the implied warranty. Further information on refuelling and on fuels (Y page 310) Notes on fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short trips Rwhen Rin towing a trailer mountainous terrain i Only for certain countries: the respective current consumption and emission values of your vehicle can be found in the COC papers (EC CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered. ! Do not use any special additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. Damage resulting from the use of such additives is not covered by the MercedesBenz implied warranty. H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Engine oil Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. A list of the engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products can be called up by visiting http://bevo.daimler.com and entering the MB Sheet number. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Engine oils which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz have the MB Sheet number indicated on the oil container under the "MB approval" notice. The table shows which MB Sheet number applies to which engine: Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 427 Version: 2.11.7.7 MB Sheet number S 30050 S 350 S 350 4MATIC S 450 S 450 4MATIC S 500 S 500 4MATIC S 600 S 63 AMG51 S 65 AMG51 229.3, 229.5 mm 229.5 S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY (Belgium) S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY S 350 CDI 4MATIC S 450 CDI MB Sheet number 228.3, 228.5, 228.51, 229.3, 229.31, 229.5, 229.51 Vehicles without a diesel particle filter52 MB Sheet number Vehicles with a diesel particle filter i In the event that the: Rengine Rgrade RSAE oil brand (MB Sheet number) classification (viscosity) is not available, you can use another mineral or synthetic engine oil which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You must then have an oil change carried out at the earliest possible opportunity. Mixing oils reduces the benefits of highgrade engine oil. 427 Technical data Service products and capacities 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select the SAE classification (viscosity) of the engine oil according to the outside temperature. The following table shows you the viscosity classes to be used depending on the average air temperature. ! Do not use lubricant additives, as they can lead to increased wear and damage to mechanical assemblies. The use of lubricant additives will result in a restriction of your warranty. 50 Only for certain countries. only SAE 0W-40 engine oils may be used. 52 Only for certain countries. 51 Restriction: Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 428 03. Mar 2009 15:18:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 428 Version: 2.11.7.7 Service products and capacities Coolant The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection Technical data Rantifreeze Rraising protection the boiling point i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is topped up with a coolant that will ensure adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Type of vehicle Replacement amount with oil filter S 350 4MATIC 7.0 l S S 350 S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY (Belgium) S 350 CDI 4MATIC 8.0 l S 450 S 450 4MATIC S 500 S 500 4MATIC 8.5 l 30053 S 63 AMG54 premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants and on filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 310.1, or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion, and the boiling point will be too low. 8.75 l (9.35 l55) S 600 S 65 AMG 9.0 l S 450 CDI 10.5 l 53 Only ! Only top up with coolant that has been If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling system against freezing down to around -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †); otherwise, heat will not be effectively dissipated. for certain countries. with external oil cooler. 55 Replacement amount with oil filter including external oil cooler. 54 Engine Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 429 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 300 If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. Vehicle dimensions ! The cooling system contains a supply Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Brake fluid Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. G Risk of accident If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. Have the brake fluid renewed every two years with a brake fluid that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and have this confirmed in the Service Booklet. i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. Vehicle data, S 300 i The S 300 model is only available in cer- 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Technical data which must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250, 000 km at the latest. The warranty is only valid if you top up with an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and if the recommended mixture ratio is observed. Long wheelbase Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 1895 kg Long wheelbase 1955 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). tain countries. Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 429 5096 mm Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Technical data 430 03. Mar 2009 15:18:55; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 430 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 350 4MATIC Vehicle data, S 350 Vehicle data, S 350 4MATIC Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Short wheelbase 2120 mm Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Vehicle weights Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 1895 kg Short wheelbase 1955 kg Long wheelbase 1955 kg Long wheelbase 2025 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 431 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 450 4MATIC Vehicle data, S 450 Vehicle data, S 450 4MATIC Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Short wheelbase 2120 mm Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Vehicle weights Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 1955 kg Short wheelbase 2030 kg Long wheelbase 2015 kg Long wheelbase 2075 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Z 431 Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:56; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Technical data 432 03. Mar 2009 15:18:56; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 432 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 500 4MATIC Vehicle data, S 500 Vehicle data, S 500 4MATIC Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Short wheelbase 2120 mm Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Vehicle weights Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 1955 kg Short wheelbase 2030 kg Long wheelbase 2015 kg Long wheelbase 2075 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:56; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 433 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 63 AMG Vehicle data, S 600 Vehicle dimensions Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle length (ECE) 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2120 mm Vehicle height Wheelbase Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1488 mm 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1488 mm 3165 mm Wheelbase Vehicle weights Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Technical data Vehicle dimensions Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) 433 2210 kg Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 2070 kg Long wheelbase 2140 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Vehicle data, S 63 AMG You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5122 mm Long wheelbase 5252 mm Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 434 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 434 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY (Belgium) Vehicle data, S 65 AMG Vehicle dimensions Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle dimensions Technical data 03. Mar 2009 15:18:56; WK Vehicle length (ECE) 5252 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2120 mm Vehicle height Wheel base 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm 1488 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm 3165 mm Wheelbase Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm 2270 kg Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 1955 kg Long wheelbase 2005 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Vehicle data, S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY (Belgium) You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 435 Version: 2.11.7.7 Vehicle data, S 350 CDI 4MATIC Vehicle data, S 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Vehicle weights Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Vehicle data, S 350 CDI 4MATIC Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Short wheelbase 1955 kg Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 2005 kg Long wheelbase 3165 mm The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg 435 Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase 2030 kg Long wheelbase 2070 kg Z Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:56; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Technical data 436 03. Mar 2009 15:18:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 436 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels Vehicle weights Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Long wheelbase 2150 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). You will find weight information specific to the vehicle on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 424). Vehicle data, S 450 CDI Tailgate opening dimensions Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) Short wheelbase 5096 mm Long wheelbase 5226 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Short wheelbase 2120 mm Long wheelbase 2120 mm Vehicle height Short wheelbase 1479 mm Long wheelbase 1479 mm Wheelbase Short wheelbase 3035 mm Long wheelbase 3165 mm : 1776 mm Tyres and wheels Points to remember ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EU directive) Short wheelbase : Tailgate opening height 2090 kg ommends that you only use tyres which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are specially adapted for use with the control Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 437 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended* (with run-flat characteristics) If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage which may occur. Information about tyres can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Therefore, it is recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit is available from any quali- fied specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, characteristics such as handling, noise levels and fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimensional variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. You will find further information about tyre pressures in the “Operation” section (Y page 319). i Notes on vehicle tyres: Always Rfit tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rfit the same type of tyres on your vehicle at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) i Vehicles with the MOExtended run-flat system are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit.56 56 Only for certain countries. * optional 437 Z Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:57; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 438 03. Mar 2009 15:18:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 438 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels Tyres of the same dimensions Both axles S 300 / S 350 / S 450 / S 500 / S 350 CDI / S 450 CDI / S 450 4MATIC / S 500 4MATIC / S 350 CDI 4MATIC Technical data 17" Summer tyres 235/55 R17 99W Winter tyres 235/55 R17 99V M+S i Light-alloy wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 43 18" Summer tyres 255/45 R18 99Y Winter tyres 255/45 R18 99V M+S i Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 43 18" Summer tyres57 255/45 R18 99Y MOExtended Winter tyres57 255/45 R18 99V M+S MOExtended i Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 43 19" Summer tyres 255/40 R19 100Y XL Winter tyres 255/40 R19 100V XL M+S i Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Both axles 18" 19" S 600 S 63 AMG / S 65 AMG Winter tyres 255/45 R18 99V M+S i – Winter tyres57 255/45 R18 99V M+S MOExtended i – Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 43 – Winter tyres 255/40 R19 100V XL M+S i 255/40 R19 100V XL M+S i Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 57 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor*. * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:57; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 439 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels 439 Mixed tyres i FA: front axle, RA: rear axle 18" FA RA 19" FA RA Summer tyres 255/45 R18 99Y Summer tyres58 255/45 R18 99Y MOExtended Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres59 275/45 R18 103Y Summer tyres58, 59 275/45 R18 103Y MOExtended Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 18 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres 255/40 R19 100Y XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres59 275/40 R19 101Y Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Technical data S 300 / S 350 / S 450 / S 500 / S 600 / S 350 CDI / S 450 CDI 58 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated. chains not permitted. 59 Snow * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 440 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 440 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels 19" FA RA Technical data 03. Mar 2009 15:18:57; WK 19" FA RA 20" FA RA S 63 AMG S 65 AMG Summer tyres 255/40 ZR19 XL – Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 – Summer tyres59 275/40 ZR19 XL – Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 – Winter tyres 255/40 R19 100V XL M+S i 255/40 R19 100V XL M+S i Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 275/40 R19 105V XL M+S i 275/40 R19 105V XL M+S i Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres 255/35 ZR20 XL 255/35 ZR20 XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 8.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres59 275/35 ZR20 XL 275/35 ZR20 XL Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 9.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 Winter tyres59 AMG equipment* Tyres of the same dimensions Both axles S 450 4MATIC / S 500 4MATIC / S 350 CDI 4MATIC 19" 20" 59 Snow Summer tyres 255/40 R19 100Y XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres 255/35 ZR20 XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 chains not permitted. Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 441 Version: 2.11.7.7 Tyres and wheels 441 Mixed tyres i FA: front axle, RA: rear axle 19" FA RA 20" FA RA Summer tyres 255/40 R19 100Y XL Summer tyres 255/40 ZR19 XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres60 275/40 R19 101Y Summer tyres60 275/40 ZR19 XL Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres 255/35 ZR20 XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 Summer tyres60 Light-alloy wheels Technical data S 300 / S 350 / S 450 / S 500 / S 600 / S 350 CDI / S 450 CDI 275/35 ZR20 XL 9.5J x 20 H2 ET 43 Spare wheel* Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel*, depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. ! The maximum tyre pressure given in the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap must be set for the spare wheel*. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*61 All models Tyres T 155 / 70 R19 Tyre pressure 4.2 bar Steel wheel 4.5B x 19 H2 ET 35 60 Snow 61 Snow chains not permitted. chains not permitted. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 442 03. Mar 2009 15:18:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 442 Version: 2.11.7.7 Trailer coupling* Trailer coupling* Mounting dimensions Technical data G Risk of accident Only have a trailer coupling retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Anchorage points for the trailer coupling : Anchorage points ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line For trailer couplings fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension is 1,272.5 mm. Trailer loads All models62 Permissible trailer load, braked 2100 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked63 750 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight64 85 kg 62 The S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG models cannot be used for towing a trailer. a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill. 64 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. 63 At * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 443 Version: 2.11.7.7 Frequencies for garage door openers* 443 Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Long wheelbase 1370 kg 1370 kg S 350 4MATIC / S 450 / S 500 1375 kg 1390 kg S 450 4MATIC / S 500 4MATIC 1385 kg 1395 kg – 1430 kg S 320 CDI / S 320 CDI (Belgium) / S 320 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY 1375 kg 1385 kg S 320 CDI 4MATIC 1380 kg 1395 kg S 420 CDI 1415 kg 1430 kg S / S 350 S 600 Technical data Short wheelbase 28065 Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio type approval number MHz frequency range Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868 Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Bulgaria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 27, 40, 433, 868 07 Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433 Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 27, 40, 433, 868 29 April 05 Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 05 Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 27, 40, 433, 868 May 05 65 Not 27, 40, 433, 868 available in all countries. * optional Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Technical data 444 03. Mar 2009 15:18:58; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 444 Version: 2.11.7.7 Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio type approval number France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 May 05 French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 May 05 Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 MHz frequency range 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 May 05 Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15350 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15358 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15359 27, 40, 433, 868 Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3 June 2005 27, 40, 433, 868 Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868 Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 / 26 April 06 27, 40, 433, 868 Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 445 Version: 2.11.7.7 Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio type approval number MHz frequency range Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 27, 40, 433, 868 May 05 New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433 The Netherlands Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Romania Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Russia 13 May 05 433 Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433 Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 27, 40, 433, 868 May 05 Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 * optional 27, 40, 433, 868 Z 445 Technical data 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:59; WK Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, Technical data 446 03. Mar 2009 15:18:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 446 Version: 2.11.7.7 24-GHz radar sensor system* (country overview) Country Radio type approval number MHz frequency range Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 27, 40, 433, 868 South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433 Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg. No. 844 13 27, 40, 433 May 05 Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 United Arab Emirates 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433 Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 24-GHz radar sensor system* (country overview) The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. When you are driving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system using the on-board computer (Y page 243). The current country overview can be obtained from a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Vehicles with COMAND and navigation system*: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically near radio telescope facilities. If Distronic Plus*, Parking GuidCountry ance*, Blind Spot Assist* or PRE-SAFE® Brake* are activated at this point, a corresponding warning will appear in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system is being switched off. BAS PLUS* is also no longer available. If the deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer (Y page 243). Vehicles without COMAND and navigation system* and vehicles for Australia: deactivate the radar sensor system in the onboard computer when you are near a radio telescope facility (Y page 243). Radio telescope facilities Geographic coordinates (latitude/longitude) Distance to be maintained from the facility Egypt – – – Andorra – – – Australia Parkes 32°59'59"S, 148°15'44" E 10 km * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 447 Version: 2.11.7.7 24-GHz radar sensor system* (country overview) Radio telescope facilities Geographic coordinates (latitude/longitude) Distance to be maintained from the facility Narrabri 30°18'52"S, 149°32'56" E 10 km Canberra 35°23'54"S, 148°58'40" E 3 km Western Australia 26°37'13"S, 117°30'40" E 10 km Bahrain – – – Belgium – – – Bosnia-Herzegovina – – – Bulgaria – – – Denmark – – – Germany Effelsberg 50°31'32"N, 06°53'00" E 6.5 km Estonia – – – Finland Metsähovi 60°13'04" N, 24°23'37" E 7 km Tuorla 60°24'56" N, 22°26'31" E 5 km Plateau de Bure 44°38'01" N, 05°54'26" E 35 km Floirac 44°50'10" N, 00°31'37" W 35 km Gibraltar – – – Greece – – – Cambridge 52°09'59" N, 00°02'20" E 9 km Darnhall 53°09'22" N, 02°32'03" W 5 km Jodrell Bank 53°14'10" N, 02°18'26" W 9 km Knockin 52°47'24" N, 02°59'45" W 5 km Pickmere 53°17'18" N, 02°26'38" W 5 km Ireland – – – Iceland – – – Medicina 44°31'14" N, 11°38'49" E 20 km Noto 36°52'34" N, 14°59'21" E 8 km Sardinia 39°29'50" N, 09°14'40" E 15 km – – – France United Kingdom Italy Yemen * optional Technical data Country 447 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 448 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 448 Version: 2.11.7.7 24-GHz radar sensor system* (country overview) Country Technical data 03. Mar 2009 15:18:59; WK Radio telescope facilities Geographic coordinates (latitude/longitude) Distance to be maintained from the facility Jordan – – – Canada – – – Croatia – – – Kuwait – – – Latvia Ventspils 57°33'12" N, 21°51'17" E 8.5 km Lebanon – – – Lithuania – – – Luxembourg – – – Malaysia – – – Malta – – – Macedonia – – – Mexico – – – Mongolia – – – New Zealand – – – The Netherlands – – – Norway – – – Oman – – – Austria – – – Pakistan – – – Cracow-Fort Skala 50°03'18" N, 19°49'36" E 1 km Torún-Piwnice 52°54'48" N, 18°33'30" E 1 km Portugal – – – Romania – – – Saudi Arabia – – – Sweden Onsala 57°23'45" N, 11°55'35" E 12 km Switzerland Bleien 47°20'26" N, 08°06'44" E 3 km Singapore – – – Slovakia – – – Poland * optional Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:18:59; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 449 Version: 2.11.7.7 24-GHz radar sensor system* (country overview) Radio telescope facilities Geographic coordinates (latitude/longitude) Distance to be maintained from the facility Slovenia – – – Yebes 40°31'27" N, 03°05'22" W 15 km Robledo 40°25'38" N, 04°14'57" W 7 km South Africa – – – Syria – – – Czech Republic – – – Turkey – – – Ukraine – – – Hungary Penc 47°47'22" N, 19°16'53" E 2 km USA – – – United Arab Emirates – – – Cyprus – – – Spain * optional Technical data Country 449 Z Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 450 03. Mar 2009 15:19:00; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 450 Version: 2.11.7.7 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 03. Mar 2009 15:19:00; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 451 Version: 2.11.7.7 451 Dateiname: 6515231002_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 221_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB bjanott, 452 03. Mar 2009 15:19:00; WK 2009-02-27T14:56:10+01:00 - Seite 452 Version: 2.11.7.7